REQUEST FOR PROPOSAL FOR COOLING TOWER REPLACEMENT Cooling... · Project Title: Cooling Tower Replacement Deliver this package to the Purchasing Office – JMC RM 140 It is mandatory

REQUEST FOR PROPOSAL FOR

COOLING TOWER REPLACEMENT RFP Number: 2-RFP-18-007 Opening Date: February 8, 2018 Opening Time: 2:00 P.M.

COOLING TOWER REPLACEMENT OKLAHOMA CITY COMMUNITY COLLEGE (OCCC)

CONTRACTORS: Proposals are invited for Cooling Tower Replacement for Oklahoma City Community College (OCCC) in accordance with the standard terms and conditions and specifications set forth in this Request for Proposal (RFP). Proposals must be received at the address noted below and no later than the date and time of the submission deadline. All proposals must be clearly marked as a sealed proposal with the RFP Number, Opening Date and Time on the outside of the envelope or packing containing the Proposal. OCCC reserves the right to reject any or all proposals. Proposal submissions MUST meet all general and specific terms and contain the following:

1. Detailed response to the RFP 2. Statement of Price 3. Certification for Competitive Bid and Contract (Non-Collusion Certification) 4. Supplier Contract Affidavit 5. Certificate of Compliance, if applicable

RFP Number: 2-RFP-18-007 Proposal Delivery Address: Date Issued: January 17, 2018 Mr. Craig Sisco, Director of Purchasing Oklahoma City Community College Submission Deadline (Opening): John Massey Center, Purchasing Dept. Date: February 8, 2018 Room 140 Time: 2:00 P.M. CST 7777 South May Avenue Oklahoma City, OK 73159 CERTIFICATION: Upon signing this Proposal;, the Contractor certifies that the Standard Terms and Conditions and specification have been read as set forth in the RFP, understands such and agrees to be bound by these Standard Terms and Conditions and specifications when a contract is entered into pursuant to this RFP. The Contractor also agrees that the proposal incorporates the Standard Terms and Conditions and specification of this RFP and is the complete and exclusive statement of the terms of the agreement between the parties, which supersedes all proposals or prior agreements, oral or written, and all other communications between the parties relating to the RFP. Proposal that are not signed will be rejected. ________________________________________ ____________________________ Name of Firm Federal Tax ID # ________________________________________ ____________________________ Address, City State, Zip Email Address ________________________________________ ____________________________ Printed Name Title ______________________________________ ____________________________ Signature of Authorized Individual Date

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.0 General Information

1.1 Introduction

1.2 College Information

1.3 Schedule of Events

1.4 Independent Contractor

2.0 Proposal Request

2.1 Issuing Office

2.2 Electronic Copies of RFP

2.3 Clarification of RFP

2.4 Cost for Proposal Preparation and Campus Visits

3.0 Proposal Information

3.1 Submission of Proposal

3.2 Response Format

3.3 Contents of Proposal

3.4 Official Contractor’s Representative

3.5 Proprietary Information

3.6 Addendum

3.7 Modification or Withdrawal of Proposal

3.8 Selection, Negotiation, Additional Information

3.9 Clarification of Proposals

3.10 Minimum Specifications

4.0 General Provisions

4.1 Contractor’s Obligation to Indemnify, Hold Harmless and Defend

4.2 Equal Employment Opportunity / Non-Discrimination

4.3 Insurance

4.4 Comply with Laws

4.5 Assignments / Subcontracting

4.6 Invoice and Payment Provisions

5.0 Specifications – Cooling Tower Replacement

6.0 Price Proposal

6.1 Price Proposal

7.0 Terms and Conditions

7.1 Contractual Force and Effect

7.2 Contract Status

7.3 Terms and Conditions of Resulting Contract are Incorporated as Reference

7.4 Reservation

7.5 Ethical Standards

7.6 Compliance with Provisions

7.7 Conflicting Provisions

7.8 Discrepancies between Numbers and Words

7.9 Settlement of Contract Disputes

7.10 Termination Provision / Termination for Default / Show Cause Letter / Certain Remedies

7.11 Contract Modification

7.12 Contract Assignment or Sublet

7.13 No Waiver of Rights by OCCC

7.14 Contract Guidelines

7.15 Contract Negotiation

7.16 Pricing After the Initial Contract Year

7.17 Contract Components

7.18 Laws and Regulations

7.19 Prior Course of Dealings

7.20 Availability to Other Colleges and Universities

7.21 Payment in Advance of Receipt of Products or Services Prohibited

7.22 Choice of Law and Venue

7.23 Equal Opportunity Employer

7.24 American with Disabilities Act

7.25 Debarment and Suspension

7.26 Environmental

7.27 Anti-Lobbying

7.28 Access to Vendors

7.29 Federal, State and Local Taxes, Licenses and Permits

7.30 Indemnification Requirements

7.31 Limitation of Liability

7.32 Conflict of Interest

7.33 Intellectual Property Licenses and Releases

7.34 College Provides Information in Good Faith without Liability

7.35 Notification of Non-Selection

7.36 Public Record

7.37 Proposal Pricing to Reflect College Tax Exempt Status

7.38 Contractors Understanding of the RFP

8.0 Selection Criteria

8.1 General

8.2 Initial Classification of Proposals as Response or Nonresponsive

APPENDICES

Appendix A – Cooling Tower Replacement Specifications

Appendix B – References

Appendix C – Required Forms

Appendix D – No Bid Response Form

REQUEST FOR PROPOSAL FOR COOLING TOWER REPLACEMENT

FOR OKLAHOMA CITY COMMUNITY COLLEGE

1.0 GENERAL INFORMATION

1.1 Introduction

Oklahoma City Community College, hereinafter referred to as OCCC, will consider

proposals for the Cooling Tower Replacement for OCCC located at 7777 South May

Avenue, Oklahoma City. OCCC invites experienced companies, herein referred to as

Contractor, to submit responses to this Request for Proposal (RFP) for the operation of

such in accordance with the RFP specifications and terms and conditions.

1.2 College Information

OCCC is a two year community college which first opened in 1972. It has grown to serve

more than 28,000 students per year. It offers a full range of associate degree programs,

which prepare students to transfer to baccalaureate institutions. Other degree and

certificate programs are designed to prepare students for immediate employment in a

variety of fields. Additionally, OCCC offers a wide range of community and continuing

education courses, workshops, conferences, and seminars.

1.3 Schedule of Events

The following schedule will apply to this RFP, but may change in accordance with the

College’s needs.

1.4 Independent Contractor

The relationship of the Contractor and OCCC shall be that of an Independent Contractor,

and other provision herein withstanding. Any and all employees or agents of the

Contractor or other persons, while engaged in the performance of any work or services

required by the Contractor under these specifications, shall not be considered employees

of OCCC.

Release of RFP January 17, 2018

Last Day/Time to Submit Written Questions January 31, 2018; 1:00 P.M. CST

Submission Deadline (Opening) February 8, 2018; 2:00 P.M. CST

Evaluation Period February 8, 2018 – February 11, 2018

Beginning Date of Contract (Estimated) February 12, 2018

2.0 PROPOSAL REQUEST

2.1 Issuing Office

This RFP is issued on behalf of the Executive Director for Facilities Management of

Oklahoma City Community College. The Purchasing department located at 7777 South

May Avenue, Oklahoma City, is the sole point of contact between Contractors and OCCC

for the selection process. Personal contact should be made through:

Mr. Craig Sisco, Director of Purchasing

Oklahoma City Community College

Purchasing Department

[email protected]

or his designee. OCCC will provide written notification of OCCC’s intent to award the

contract.

2.2 Electronic Copies of RFP

Electronic copies of the RFP will be distributed to Contractors by e-mail or can be

downloaded from the OCCC Purchasing website located at www.occc.edu/purcahsing.

2.3 Clarification of RFP

Contractors may submit written questions regarding the specifications or requirements

of the RFP. Written questions must be received by email to OCCC no later than 1:00 p.m.

CST on January 31, 2018. Questions will not be answered over the phone and phone or

voice messages received regarding this RFP will not be returned. If OCCC determines that

it should provide additional information or clarification, or if additional requirements are

needed, Contractors will be notified by written addendum. All addenda issued will also

be posted on the OCCC Purchasing website as referenced in section 2.2. All or any

addenda issued must acknowledged by the Contractor in the RFP submitted.

2.4 Cost for Proposal Preparation and Campus Visits

OCCC will not reimburse the Contractor for costs incurred in the preparation and

submission of proposals, nor will OCCC reimburse Contractors for expenses related to

visiting the campus or providing on-campus presentations related to proposals, if

applicable.

3.0 PROPOSAL INFORMATION

3.1 Submission of Proposals

Contractors shall provide one (1) original and signed copy of the RFP, including

acknowledgement of any addenda issued and one (1) electronic copy in compact disc or

flash drive format. Please do not password protect compact disc or flash drive.

mailto:[email protected]

http://www.occc.edu/purcahsing

Sealed written proposals will need to be received by 2:00 p.m. CST on February 5, 2018,

at the following address:

Attn. Mr. Craig Sisco, Director of Purchasing


Purchasing Department

John Massey Center, Room 140

7777 South May Avenue

Oklahoma City, OK 73159

All proposal packages must be signed, sealed and labeled. The below sample label must

be used on the envelope.

Bid No: 2-RFP-18-007 RFP Due Date: February 8, 2018 RFP Due Time: 2:00 p.m. Offeror’s Name: ____________________________ Offeror’s Address: ____________________________ ____________________________ Project Title: Cooling Tower Replacement Deliver this package to the Purchasing Office – JMC RM 140

It is mandatory that the RFP package label, as shown above, is used or this exact

information is provided on the outside of the sealed proposal package. Failure to do so

may cause the proposal to be rejected.

Proposals must be signed by an official authorized to bind the Contractor to the resulting

contract. Any literature descriptive of the Contractor must be submitted with the original

and electronic proposal.

Contractors are cautioned that only written information contained in this RFP (including

any amendments and addenda) are to be relied upon for preparation of a proposal.

Each Contractor is solely responsible for the timely delivery of the proposal by the

specified deadline. State law required that the proposal be submitted no later than the

date and time specified in this RFP. Contractor mailing proposals should allow a sufficient

mail delivery period to ensure timely receipt of their proposal by the issuing office. Once

again, timely receipt is defined as on or prior to 2:00 p.m. CST on February 8, 2018. Any

proposals received after the scheduled date and time will be immediately disqualified. All

proposals shall be guaranteed and binding for a period of not less than ninety (90) days

past the proposal submission deadline.

3.2 Response Format

Beginning with the first subsection, it is requested that Contractor respond to each

subsection of this RFP in the same paragraph and item number sequence, stating first the

requirement and then providing their response.

For those paragraphs or items not requiring a specified response, Contractors may

respond with concurrence or acknowledgement. Reference to handbooks or other

technical documentation may be used to augment the response to an item but may not

constitute the entire response.

Reference to handbooks and technical documentation must include the paragraph and/or

page number of the reference document. It is requested that brochures and bulky

publications be separate from the written response.

3.3 Contents of Proposal

A. Contractors should include as part of their proposal all of the provisions of this RFP

and furnish all required information.

B. If the Contractor submits standard terms and conditions with the proposal, and if any

of those terms are in conflict with the laws of the State of Oklahoma, state law shall

govern. Standard terms and conditions submitted may need to be amended to

adequately reflect all of the conditions of this RFP. Upon award of this RFP, the

Contractor will be sent OCCC’s standard Contract for Services to sign for the

impending contract period.

C. All agreements of any nature requiring execution by OCCC must be submitted with

the proposal.

D. These documents should be amended by the Contractor in accordance with

subsection 7.14 of this document.

E. A sample contract, if applicable, must be submitted with the proposal for review if

required by the Contractor and will later require signature of OCCC officials.

F. OCCC reserves the right to reject any proposal that does not comply with their

requirements and specifications of the RFP. An offer may be rejected if the offer

contains or imposes terms or conditions that would modify the requirements of the

RFP or limit the offerors’ liability to the State of Oklahoma or OCCC.

3.4 Official Contractor’s Representative

The name, mailing address, telephone, e-mail address and fax number of the Contractor’s

authorized agent with authority to bind the Contractor with respect to questions

concerning the Contractor’s proposal must be clearly stated in the proposal. The proposal

and/or the letter which transmits the proposal to OCCC must be signed by an authorized

officer of the Contractor.

3.5 Proprietary Information

All proposals submitted in response to this RFP will become the property of OCCC and will

be open to public inspection after the proposal opening in accordance with the laws of

the State of Oklahoma.

3.6 Addendum

Written addenda will be issued for any changes and /or revisions in the proposal

specifications and will become part of this RFP. Only written communications is binding

of the College.

3.7 Modification or Withdrawal of Proposal

Proposals may be modified or withdrawn, by the bidder, prior to the established due date

and time. All modifications to the bidders proposal must be communicated in writing to

the Purchasing department contact or designee and modifications mailed or delivered in

a sealed envelope using the sample label indicated in section 3.1 and referenced as a

modification to Contractor’s original submitted proposal. Modification mailed or

delivered must be received by OCCC Purchasing office by the due date and time indicated

in this RFP.

3.8 Selection, Negotiation, Additional Information

OCCC is not bound to accept the lowest priced proposal if not in the best interest of the

College. The College reserves the right to negotiate with any vendor or vendors to arrive

at its final decision and/or to request additional information or clarification on any matter

included in the proposal. The selected proposal will be the most advantageous offer for

OCCC determined by evaluation and comparison of other factors in addition to cost or

price.

Prior to award, OCCC may elect to conduct negotiation with the highest ranked

respondent(s) for the purposes of:

Resolving minor differences and informalities;

Clarifying necessary details and responsibilities;

Emphasizing important issues and/or points;

Receiving assurances from respondents, and;

Exploring ways to improve the final contract.

3.9 Clarification of Proposals

Contractors may be required to clarify or further explain their proposal. Any clarification

will be submitted in writing by the Contractor and will considered part of the proposal.

Refusal by a Contractor to comply with this requirement will be cause for rejection of the

proposal.

3.10 Minimum Specifications

The services described herein indicate minimum specification required for cooling tower

replacement at OCCC.

Contractors responding to this RFP should outline a complete program which they would

propose and any pertinent factors they wish OCCC to consider in evaluating the proposal.

4.0 GENERAL PROVISIONS

4.1 Contractor’s Obligation to Indemnify, Hold Harmless and Defend

Contractor without exception shall indemnify and hold harmless OCCC, its Regents,

administration, employees, students, and any agent authorized to act on behalf of OCCC

from any liability of any nature or kind and from any and all damages to persons and

property resulting from or alleged to result from activities, acts or omissions of Contractor

and of Contractor’s agents, and also hold harmless from any losses or damages which

should arise due to failure of any utility service or any act causing interruption of

Contractor’s operation outside control of OCCC. A party shall not be liable for any claims,

demands, actions, costs, expenses and liabilities, including attorneys’ fees, which may

arise in connection with the action or failure to act of the other party or its employees,

officers, directors or agents in performing any of their obligations under this Services

Contract unless so ordered by a court of competent jurisdiction. OCCC’s liability is

governed and limited by the Oklahoma Governmental Tort Claims Act.

4.2 Equal Employment Opportunity

Contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant because of race, creed,

color, sex, age, disability, religion, or national origin, and will make a diligent and

continuing effort to insure that all persons are afforded equal employment opportunities

without discrimination because of race, creed, color, sex, age, disability, religion, or

national origin. Equal opportunity shall apply to recruitment, employment, job

assignment, promotion, upgrading, demotion, transfer, lay-off, termination, rate of pay,

all other forms of compensation, and selection of training. The enumeration of the

foregoing items shall not be limited to the scope of the application of this equal

employment opportunity provision.

Contractor will state, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees, that all qualified

applications will be afforded equal employment opportunities without discrimination

because of race, creed, color, sex, age, disability, religion or national origin.

Contractor shall state its non-discrimination and/or affirmative action policy.

4.3 Insurance

It is the intention of OCCC that Contractor be an Independent Contractor and not an

employee under this agreement. In order to protect OCCC from liability, the successful

Contractor shall agree to maintain at his/her own cost malpractice insurance in the

minimum amount of $1,0000,000.00 to cover activities of Contractor. All policies shall

contain a covenant requiring thirty (30) days written notice to OCCC before cancellation,

reduction, or modifications. All policies shall be primarily and non-contributing with any

insurance carried by OCCC. Upon notification of intent to award, Contractor shall furnish

OCCC a certificate of insurance, if applicable.

Insurance shall be effective and evident of acceptable insurance furnished to OCCC, prior

to commencing any operations under this Contract.

Contractor shall obtain and maintain in full force at all times during the term of this

Contract insurance coverage naming the State of Oklahoma acting through OCCC, as a

certificate holder that includes –

Comprehensive General Liability in the amount of $1,000,000 per occurrence and

of $1,000,000 in the aggregate.

Business Automobile Liability Insurance for all owned, non-owned and hired

vehicles with a minimum combined limit of $1,000,000 per occurrence for bodily

injury and property damage.

Workers Compensation with limits required by the State of Oklahoma and with

Employer’s Liability limits of $500,000 per accident.

If insurance policies are not written for amounts specified above, Contractor shall carry

Umbrellas or Excess Liability Insurance for any differences in amounts specified. If Excess

Liability is provided, it shall follow the forms of the primary coverage.

Each policy of required insurance shall provide for thirty (30) days written notice of

cancellation to the Owner and include the following provisions, “It is the condition of this

policy that the Company shall furnish written notice to Oklahoma City Community

College, Purchasing Department, 7777 S. May Avenue, Oklahoma City, Oklahoma 73159,

thirty (30) days written notice in advance of any reduction in, or cancellation of this

policy.”

At the beginning of each contract period, the Contractor shall furnish certificates to OCCC

showing that such insurance is in effect. In the event that Contractor shall fail to maintain

and keep in force product liability insurance, general liability insurance, property damage

insurance, and worker’s compensation insurance, OCCC shall have the right to cancel and

terminate the agreement immediately without notice. The protection afforded under the

policies will not be cancelled or reduced until at least thirty (30) days after notice is sent

to OCCC by the insurance company or agent. The insurance company provider must have

an A.M. Best rating of A+ VIII.

4.4 Comply with Laws

Without additional expense to OCCC, the Contractor shall be liable for all applicable

Federal, State, and local taxes and shall comply with all laws, ordinances, codes, and

regulation and shall obtain and pay for all permits and licenses.

4.5 Assignments / Subcontracting

The selected Contractor will be required to assume all responsibility for the Cooling Tower

Replacement contract and will be OCCC’s sole point of contact.

The Contractor shall not subcontract or assign any interest in the contract and shall not

transfer any interest, whatsoever, in the contract (whether by assignment or novation),

without prior written consent of OCCC.

4.6 Invoice and Payment Provisions

Payments to Contractor by OCCC shall be made upon receipt of approved invoices.

Invoices must be in duplicate and mailed to:


Accounts Payable

7777 S. May Avenue

Oklahoma City, OK 73159

Invoices must be submitted on a timely basis. Invoices shall show as a minimum: purchase

order number; contract number; detail of charges; and any prompt payment discounts.

Charges are payable when billed and process by OCCC per Net 30 payment terms.

5.0 Specifications

Please see APPENDIX A – COOLING TOWER REPLACEMENT SPECIFICATIONS.

6.0 PRICE PROPOSAL

Provide a written and detailed proposal for all labor, materials, and equipment for the Cooling

Tower Replacement per the specifications listed in this RFP.

TOTAL PROPSAL PRICE $___________________________

7.0 TERMS AND CONDITIONS

7.1 Contractual Force and Effect

The following terms and conditions establish OCCC’s rights and expectations with respect

to the services sought hereunder. Unless otherwise specifically proposed by the

Contractor, each term or condition herein shall, upon award by OCCC, have the force and

effect of a contractual understanding between OCCC and each successful Contractor.

OCCC may pursue any remedy legally available to it in the event the Contractor breaches

or violates any such term or condition.

7.2 Contract Status

OCCC may hold each Contractor’s response to this RFP as a legal offer to contract. If OCCC

formally accepts such offer, a contractual relationship shall be deemed to exist and OCCC

will so communicate to each successful Contractor by issuing a notice of award.

7.3 Terms and Conditions of Resulting Contract are Incorporated by Reference

The specifications, terms and conditions set forth in this RFP and any related award

document shall be incorporated by reference without Contractor exception into any

resulting contract between OCCC and any successful Contractor.

7.4 Reservation

This RFP does not commit OCCC to award a contract. Further, OCCC reserves the right to

accept or reject, in part or in its entirety, any or all proposals received, to re-advertise if

deemed necessary, and to investigate any or all proposals as required. Proposals which

fail to comply fully with any provision of the specification of the RFP will be considered

invalid and will not receive consideration.

7.5 Ethical Standards

It shall be a breach of ethical standards for a person to be retained, or to retain a person,

to solicit or secure a State contract upon an agreement or understanding for a

commission, percentage, brokerage, or contingent fee, except for retention of bona fide

employees or bona fide established selling agencies maintained by the Contractor for the

purpose of securing business.

7.6 Compliance with Provisions

Contractor shall state that they have read, understand and will comply with all provisions

and with the standard terms and conditions.

7.7 Conflicting Provisions

Under no circumstances shall any provision be effective if it is later found to be in conflict

with state statute or other superior directive. In the event of a conflict between or among

any provision contained in the resulting contract, such conflict shall be resolved in the

following order, most effect to least effect.

1. Original RFP

2. Negotiations on those matters eligible for negotiation

3. Additional agreements and/or stipulations

4. Contractor’s Proposal

7.8 Discrepancies between Numbers and Words

In the event of a discrepancy between information written in numbers and the same

information also written in words, the information written in words shall govern.

7.9 Settlement of Contract Disputes

In the event of dispute, doubt, or difference of opinion as to any matter related to any

contract resulting from this RFP, OCCC reserves the right to select a ranking College

executive officer to render a decision. Such decision shall be final and binding on all

parties to the contract.

7.10 Termination Provision / Termination for Default / Show Cause Letter / Certain Remedies

The contract resulting from this RFP may be terminated by either party at any time by

giving a sixty (60) day written notice to the other party.

OCCC may terminate a contract resulting from this RFP for reason of the Contractor’s

default, if conditions including but not limited to those described in the following list

come into being.

The Contractor is adjudged bankrupt, makes a general assignment for the benefit

of the Contractor’s creditors, or a receiver is appointed on account of the

Contractor’s insolvency.

The Contractor persistently or repeatedly refuses or fails to perform any of the

provisions of the contract; or so fails to make progress pursuant to the contract’s

terms; or so fails to meet any delivery dates except when extension may be

granted to carry on as required by the contract.

The Contractor persistently or repeatedly refuses or fails to make prompt

payment to subcontractors.

The Contractor persistently or repeatedly disregards laws, ordinances, or the

instructions of any duly authorized representative of OCCC.

The Contractor otherwise commits a substantial violation of any provision of the

contract.

OCCC may, in its sole discretion and without prejudice to any other right or remedy either

terminate the contract or deliver to the Contractor a letter citing the instances of

noncompliance and directing the Contractor to show cause why the contract should not

be terminated (Show Cause Letter). The Contractor shall have ten (10) days to reply to

the Show Cause Letter and indicate why the contract should not be terminated. The

Contractor shall then have thirty (30) days to cure the noncompliance cited in the Show

Cause Letter. If the noncompliance is not cured within thirty (30) days, OCCC may

negotiate a schedule to terminate the contract.

In the event all or any part of the contract is terminated, OCCC may take possession of

any and all materials and finish the contract by whatever methods OCCC may deem

expedient. In such case, the Contractor shall not be entitled to any further payment until

the contract is finished. The Contractor shall be liable for any excess costs incurred by

OCCC to perform the balance of the contract. The rights and/or remedies of OCCC under

these terms and conditions are not exclusive but are in addition to any other rights to

refuse to consider proposal received from the Contractor in response to RFP’s that OCCC

may issue in the future.

7.11 Contract Modification

No change or modification to a contract resulting from this RFP shall take effect until all

parties have agreed in writing to such change or modification.

7.12 Contract Assignment or Sublet

No successful Contractor shall assign, transfer, or sublet, either in whole or in part, any

contract resulting from this RFP, without prior written approval from OCCC.

7.13 No Waiver of Rights by OCCC

No delay or failure on OCCC’s part to enforce any provision of this agreement shall

constitute or be construed by any party as a waiver or limitation of OCCC rights under any

resulting contract.

7.14 Contract Guidelines

Contractors should note the following in regard to the State’s contracting authority, and

amend any documents accordingly. Failure to conform to these standards may result in

rejection of the proposal.

A. The State of Oklahoma may not contract with another party:

1) To support continuation of performance in subsequent year of multi-year

contract when funds are not appropriated or otherwise made available.

The Contractor may be reimbursed for the reasonable value of any non-

recurring costs incurred but not amortized in the price of the

commodities or services delivered under the contract. No other

termination charges shall be authorized.

2) To pay any penalties or charges for late payment or any penalties or

charges which, in fact are penalties, for any reason.

3) To indemnify and defend that party for any liability and damages;

however, the State may agree to hold the other party harmless from any

loss or claim resulting directly from and attributable to the State’s use or

possession of equipment and reimburse that party for the loss caused

solely by the State’s use or possession, provided that such obligation is

determined by and under the procedures of the State of Oklahoma.

4) Upon default, to pay all sums to become due under a contract.

5) To pay damages, legal expenses or other costs and expenses of any party.

6) To conduct litigation in a place other than Oklahoma.

7) To agree to any provision of a contract which violates the laws or

Constitution of the State of Oklahoma.

B. A party wishing to contract with the State of Oklahoma must:

1) Remove any language from its contract which grants to it remedies other

than:

a) The right to possession

b) The right to accrued payments

2) Include in its contract that the laws of the State of Oklahoma govern the

contract.

C. The State of Oklahoma may contract with another party:

1) In the event the legislature of the State of Oklahoma does not

appropriate funds for the services described in this contract, OCCC may,

upon sixty (60) days written notice to Contractor, cancel this contract as

to that period for which no appropriations were made; or, in the event

that there are no funded appropriations from which payment can be

made for the services described in this contract, OCCC may, upon sixty

(60) days written notice to Contractor, cancel this contract as to that for

which there is no funded appropriations from which payment can be

made.

7.15 Contract Negotiation

OCCC reserves the right to negotiate with the successful Contractor the final terms and

conditions deemed to be most advantageous to OCCC.

7.16 Pricing After the Initial Contract Year

Pricing may be negotiated for each and any period, except the initial period, prior to the

beginning of the contract period. All prices will remain firm for any and each contract

period. OCCC recognizes that the cost of labor of the Contractor may fluctuate from year

to year. However, for each year of the contract, price increases, if any that may be

proposal by the Contractor must be documented and justified to OCCC. OCCC reserves

the right to approve or reject all price changes. In no event, except by OCCC request, will

price changes increase by more than the portion of the “cost of living index” relating to

food and labor as established by the United State Department of Labor for the previous

twelve (12) month period. All increased must be in conformance with any Federal or State

wage price controls that may be in existence at that time. Any exceptions, except as stated

above, to this would be any Federal, State or local statutory changed directly affecting

costs (sales tax, minimum wage).

7.17 Contract Components

This RFP, the successful Contractor’s response thereto, and any additional written

modifications and/or stipulations mutually agreed upon by OCCC and the successful

Contractor will constitute the final contract. During the contractual period, any changes

to the conditions outlines in these materials must be approved in writing with the

signatures of representatives from each selected Contractor(s) and OCCC.

7.18 Laws and Regulations

Contractors are solely responsible for keeping themselves fully informed of and faithfully

observing all laws, ordinances, and regulations affecting the rights of their employees,

and shall protect and indemnify OCCC, its officers and agents against any claims of liability

arising from or based on any violation thereof. By submitting a proposal for services, the

Contractor certifies that they and any proposed subcontractors, are in compliance with

25 O.S. §1313 and participate in the Status Verification System. The Status Verification

System is defined in 25 O.S. §1312 and includes but is not limited to the free Employment

Verification Program (E-Verify) available at www.dhs.gov/E-Verify. Contractor further

agrees to affirm and certify in writing to OCCC in the event a contract between OCCC and

the Contractor results from this RFP that sexual or violent offenders are prohibited and

no Contractor, subcontractor or their employee is registered or required to be registered

as a sex or violent offender under the Oklahoma Sex Offender Registry Act or the Mary

Rippy Violent Crimes Offender Act.

http://www.dhs.gov/E-Verify

7.19 Prior Course of Dealings

No trade usage, prior course of dealing, or course of performance under other contracts

shall be a part of any contract resulting from this RFP; nor shall such trade usage, prior

course of dealing, or course of performance be used in the interpretation or construction

of such resulting contract.

7.20 Availability to Other Colleges and Universities

In the event a contract between OCCC and the Contractor results from this RFP, the

Contractor shall agree to offer same prices, terms, conditions, and all other particulars

herein to all other institutions within the Oklahoma State Regents for Higher Education

system. Provided however that the Contractor may apply fair and reasonable cost

adjustments to those institutions whose locations may be materially remote or proximate

when compared to the distance contemplated under this RFP.

7.21 Payment in Advance of Receipt of Products or Services Prohibited

As a state agency, OCCC is prohibited by statute from paying for products or services in

advance. Payment provisions shall be in arrears, with late payment and interest calculated

as provided by Oklahoma law.

7.22 Choice of Law and Venue

The resulting contract shall be construed under the laws of the State of Oklahoma, and

venue in any action to enforce shall be in Oklahoma County, Oklahoma.

7.23 Equal Opportunity Employer

The Contractor must assure that they are an Equal Opportunity Employer, a provider of

services and/or assistance, and in compliance with the 1964 Civil Rights Act, Title IX of the

Education Amendments of 1972, Section 504 or the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, as

amended, and Executive Orders 11246 and 11375. The Contractor must acknowledge the

requirements in their submitted proposal. Please refer to Certificate of Compliance in

Appendix B – Required Forms

7.24 Americans with Disabilities Act

The Contractor must assure compliance with the American with Disabilities Act of 1990

(Public Law 101-336) and all amendments and requirements imposed by the regulations

issued pursuant to this act. The Contractor must acknowledge the requirements in the

submitted proposal.

7.25 Debarment and Suspension

As supplemented in the Department of Labor regulations (29C.F.R. Part 98), the

Contractor certifies that neither it nor its principals are presently debarred, declared

ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from participation in this contract by any governmental

debarment or agency.

7.26 Environmental

The Contractor, if engaged hereby for any amount in excess of $100,000, shall comply

with all applicable standards, orders and regulations issued pursuant to the Clean Air Act

(42 U.S.C. 7401 et seq.) and the Federal Water Pollution Control Act as amended (33 U.S.C.

1251 et seq.). Violations must be reported to OCCC and federal agencies as required

under OMB Circular A-110.

7.27 Anti-Lobbying

Contractor, if engaged hereby for an amount in excess of $100,000, shall comply with the

requirement of the Byrd Anti-Lobbying Amendment (31 U.S.C. 1352), by providing to

OCCC all certifications required there under regarding the disclosure of the use of funds

for lobbying. The Contractor will certify that it will not and has not used Federal

appropriated funds to pay any person or organization for influencing or attempting to

influence an officer or employee of a member of Congress in connection with obtaining

and Federal contract, grant or any other award covered by 31 U.S.C. 1352. Contractor

shall also disclose any lobbying with non-Federal funds that takes place in connection with

obtaining any Federal award.

7.28 Access to Vendors

The Contractor shall maintain all fiscal records and any other records relating to this

contract in such a manner as to clearly document the Company’s performance hereunder.

OCCC, the Federal government, or any their duly authorized representatives, shall have

access to any books, documents, paper and records of the Contractor which are directly

pertinent to this contract for the purpose of making audits, examinations, excepts and

transcriptions.

7.29 Federal, State and Local Taxes, Licenses and Permits

Contractors are solely responsible for complying with all laws, ordinances, and regulations

on taxes, licenses and permits, as they may apply to any matter under this RPF.

Contractors shall, at no expense to OCCC, procure and keep in force during the entire

period of the contract all such permits and licenses and pay such taxes.

7.30 Indemnification Requirements

The below listed requirements are mandatory.

Hold Harmless: The successful Contractor shall indemnify and hold the State

Regents harmless from all performance or failure of performance under the

resulting contract.

Liens: The successful Contractor shall keep the State Regents free and clear from

all liens asserted by any person or firm for any reason arising from the furnishing

of services or materials by or to the bidder.

Qualification Data: If necessary to evaluate vendor qualifications, you may be

required to furnish additional information. Information may include but not

limited to the following:

o Ability to meet specifications quality requirements

o Availability to provide service

o Executive and/or key person resumes and references

o Financial resources and/or audited financial reports

o Personnel resources and/or experience

7.31 Limitation of Liability

The successful Contractor acknowledges that under the laws of the State of Oklahoma,

Contractors may not contractually limit their potential liability. The Oklahoma

Constitution prohibits the inclusion of clauses in any OCCC or other State contract which

limits the Contractor’s liability for fraud, willful injury to persons or property, or violation

of the law, whether willful or negligent; or otherwise has the effect of requiring OCCC to

indemnify the Contractor for the Contractor’s own damages. To the extent any limitation

of liability contained in any resulting contract is construed by a court of competent

jurisdiction to be a limitation of liability in violation of Oklahoma law, such limitation of

liability shall be void.

7.32 Conflict of Interest

Information on possible conflicts of interest should be provided as part of the proposal

response. Such information will be taken into account in making a decision of the

selection of the Contractor to perform the services. Should a conflict arise during

preparations for or while undertaking these services, the Contractor shall immediately

advise OCCC of such conflict.

7.33 Intellectual Property Licenses and Releases

The selected Contractor is responsible for any indemnification issues related to or arising

from it undertaking and performance of the Scope of Work; and for obtaining all releases,

licenses, waivers, permits, or other permission needed for use of talent, copyrighted or

trademarked materials, information, sound, or images, or that are or may be subject to

common law or other property rights. The selected Contractor is solely responsible for

any contracts, agreements, licenses, releases, fees or negotiations needed to obtain the

necessary rights to use of any and all such talent, materials, information, images, sound,

and property as well as all related administrative and legal expenses. Selected

Contractor’s cost to secure and defend intellectual property rights related to performance

under the contract shall be included in the firm fixed price contract.

7.34 College Provides Information in Good Faith without Liability

All information provided by OCCC in this RFP is offered in good faith. Individual items are

subject to change at any time. OCCC makes not warranty or certification that any item is

without error. OCCC is not responsible or liable for any use of the information, or for any

claims attempted to be or asserted therefrom.

7.35 Notification of Non-Selection

OCCC reserves the right not to notify bidders whose RFP responses are not selected for

further consideration or notice of award. If OCCC decides to notify such bidders in writing,

it will send the notification to the e-mail address indicated in each such bidder’s proposal.

7.36 Public Record

Once finalized, documents resulting from this RFP, including the resulting award(s), are

available for public inspection pursuant to the Open Records Act. Copies are provided

upon written request to OCCC Public Relations, 7777 South May Avenue, Oklahoma City,

Oklahoma 73059. OCCC shall not be liable in any manner or in any amount for disclosing

Proprietary Information if such information is required by law to be disclosed.

7.37 Proposal Pricing to Reflect College Tax Exempt Status

Proposal pricing shall be exclusive or taxes. Oklahoma City Community College is exempt

from taxes, including State Sales Tax, Property (Ad Valorem) Tax and Federal Excise Tax.

The exemption authority is Oklahoma State Tax Code, Title 68, OS 1981, Article 13, Section

1356 (Oklahoma Tax Commission Tax Exemption Permit #EXM-14371559-02) and Federal

Tax Exempt Number 73-1556390.

7.38 Contractors Understanding of the RFP

In responding to this RFP, the Contractor accepts the responsibility fully to understand

the RFP in its entirety, and in detail, including making any inquiries to OCCC as necessary

to gain such understanding. OCCC reserves the right to disqualify any Contractor who

demonstrates less than such understanding. Further, OCCC reserves the right to

determine, at its sole discretion, whether the Contractor has demonstrated such

understanding. Related to this, OCCC’s right extends to cancellation of award if award has

been made. Such disqualification and/or cancellation shall be at no fault, cost, or liability

whatsoever to OCCC.

8.0 SELECTION CRITERIA

8.1 General

The Contractor will be selected on the basis of which proposal is, in the opinion of OCCC,

in the best interest of OCCC when all factors are considered. Factors considered will

include, but not necessarily limited to: pricing, services offered, quality, experience,

marketing capabilities, creativity, and the ability to perform efficient, economical

services. Also, Contractor performance records, references, response to this RFP, and

service related performance capabilities will be reviewed. Other relevant factors that

OCCC may deem to be important will be considered. Some of these factors are judgmental

and subjective, and the decision of OCCC is final. OCCC reserves the right to reject any

and all proposals or parts thereof, and to waive informalities in the proposals received.

Contractors are encouraged to submit any additional information or comments they

wished considered. This additional information should be included as a separate appendix

to the proposal.

Contractors shall be cautioned not to minimize the importance of adequate responses,

although a particular category may carry less weight than other areas.

The award will be made to the Contractor whose proposal conforms to the RFP and, in a

sole judgement of OCCC, will be most advantageous to OCCC.

8.2 Initial Classification of Proposals as Responsive or Nonresponsive

OCCC shall initially classify all proposals as either “responsive” or “nonresponsive”. OCCC

may deem a proposal nonresponsive if: any of the required information is not provided,

the submitted price is found to be excessive or inadequate as measured by the RFP

criteria, or the proposal does not meet RFP requirements and specification. OCCC may

find any proposal to be nonresponsive at any time during the procurement process. If

OCCC deems a proposal nonresponsive, it will not be considered further.

APPENDICES

Appendix A – Cooling Tower Replacement Specifications

Appendix B – References

Appendix C – Required Forms

Appendix D – No Bid Response Form

APPENDIX A

COOLING TOWER REPLACEMENT SPECIFICATIONS

MAIN BUILDING COOLING TOWER REPLACEMENT Oklahoma City Community College

000010 TABLE OF CONTENTS For Construction December 14, 2017 Page 1 of 1

Technical Specifications

SECTION 000010 – TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISON 22 – PLUMBING 220719 Plumbing Piping Insulation 221116 Domestic Water Piping DIVISION 23 - HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 230500 Common Work Results for HVAC 230513 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment 230517 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping 230519 Meters and Gauges for HVAC Piping 230523 General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping 230529 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment 230548 Vibration Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment 230553 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment 230593 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing For HVAC 230719 HVAC Piping Insulation 232113 Hydronic Piping 232116 Hydronic Piping Specialties 232123 Hydronic Pumps 236500 Cooling Towers


220719 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

For Construction December 14, 2017 Page 1 of 11

SECTION 220719 - PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following plumbing piping services:

1. Domestic cold-water piping. 2. Condensate drains 3. Refrigerant suction

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory- and field-applied, if any).

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger.

2. Detail attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation. 3. Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation. 4. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each

type of insulation. 5. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and access

panels. 6. Detail application of field-applied jackets. 7. Detail application at linkages of control devices.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests and test methods employed.

C. Field quality-control reports.




1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less.

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less.

C. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous components:

1. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application. Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.

B. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.

1.8 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.

B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Piping Insulation Schedule," "Outdoor, Aboveground Piping Insulation Schedule," and "Outdoor, Underground Piping Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:

1. Type I, 850 Deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

2.2 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.

C. ASJ Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.

2.3 SEALANTS

A. ASJ Flashing Sealants:

1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 4. Color: White.

2.4 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:

1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

2.5 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.




B. Metal Jacket:

1. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005, Temper H-14.

a. Factory cut and rolled to size. b. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules. c. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil- thick polysurlyn. d. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers:

1) Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket. 2) Preformed 2-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius

elbows. 3) Tee covers. 4) Flange and union covers. 5) End caps. 6) Beveled collars. 7) Valve covers. 8) Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers are not

available.

2.6 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136.

1. Width: 3 inches. 2. Thickness: 11.5 mils. 3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 4. Elongation: 2 percent. 5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 6. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.See Editing Instruction

No. 1 in the Evaluations for cautions about naming manufacturers. Retain subparagraph and list of manufacturers below.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects. 2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.




3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.

B. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.

3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor

legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

L. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.




M. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.

N. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.

O. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Cleanouts.

P. Continuously insulate

3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface

and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing.

4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface


3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches.

4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.

D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.




F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. 2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies.

3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated.

2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.

6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.

7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.

8. Label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union." Match size and color of pipe labels.

C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape




insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.

D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following:

1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation.

2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.

3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.

4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.

5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION

A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the

thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of

adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.

4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation. 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to

eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when available.




2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's

recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

3.7 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION

A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.

2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.


1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the


adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least

1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.


1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available.

2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.



2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body.

3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.




3.8 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION

A. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints.

3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Perform tests and inspections.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers, two locations of welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three locations of flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article.

D. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements.

3.10 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:

1. Underground piping. 2. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury. 3. Chemical Waste 4. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces. 5. Vertical portions of storm drain piping (unless needed for acoustical performance)

C. PVC Jackets shall be installed on insulated piping in conjunction with the fitting covers to provide a total sealed system as required by USDA and FDA for applications in food processing and pharmaceutical facilities. Does not apply to facilities not governed by USDA or FDA guidelines.

D. Insulate cold pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature with vapor retardant jackets with self-sealing laps. 1. Domestic cold water 2. Chilled water




3. Condensate drain 4. Refrigerant Suction

3.11 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Domestic Cold Water:

1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following:

a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, ASTM C547, Type I: 1/2 inch thick.

2. NPS 1-1/4 and Larger: Insulation shall be the following:

a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, ASTM C547, Type I: 1 inch thick.

B. Coil Condensate Drain:

1. All Sizes: Insulation shall be the following:

a. Mineral-Fiber, Performed Pipe Insulation, ASTM C547, Type I: 1/2 inch thick.

C. Floor Drains, Traps, and Sanitary Drain Piping within 10 Feet of Drain Receiving Condensate and Equipment Drain Water below 60 Deg F:

1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following:

a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, ASTM C547, Type I: 1/2 inch thick.

3.12 OUTDOOR, ABOVEGROUND PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Domestic Water Piping:

1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following:

a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, ASTM C547, Type I: 2 inches thick.

3.13 OUTDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE

A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.

B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

C. Piping:

1. Aluminum, Smooth: 0.016 inch thick.

END OF SECTION 220719


22116 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING For Construction December 14, 2017 Page 1 of 15

SECTION 221116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Under-building-slab and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, and fittings inside buildings.

2. Encasement for piping.


A. Product Data: For transition fittings and dielectric fittings.

B. Shop Drawings: Provide installation drawings indicating tubing layout, manifold locations, plumbing fixtures supported and schedules with details required for installation of the system.


A. System purging and disinfecting activities report.

B. Field quality-control reports.

C. Certificates: Certificate indicating that the PEX-a installer is authorized to install the manufacturer’s products.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Warranty documents specified herein.

B. Operation and maintenance data.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. For PEX piping systems, provide a limited warranty of 25 years for all PEX tubing and associated fittings when installed by a manufacturer trained contractor and certified plumbing professional.




A. Provide a domestic water system that complies with International Code Conference (ICC) – International Plumbing Code (IPC).

B. PEX Installer Qualifications: Use an installer with demonstrated experience on projects of similar size and complexity and possessing documentation proving successful completion of PEX plumbing installation training by the PEX tubing manufacturer.


A. Comply with manufacturer’s ordering instructions and lead-time requirements to avoid construction delays.

B. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.

C. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful environmental conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer.

D. Store PEX tubing in cartons or under cover to avoid dirt or foreign material from being introduced into the tubing.

E. Do not expose PEX tubing to direct sunlight for more than 30 days. If construction delays are encountered, provide cover to portions of tubing exposed to direct sunlight.

1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt water service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of water service.

2. Do not interrupt water service without Owner's written permission.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

B. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 14 and NSF 61 Annex G. Plastic piping components shall be marked with "NSF-pw."



2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, drawn temper.

B. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K water tube, annealed temper.

C. Cast-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings.

D. Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings.

E. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.

F. Copper Unions:

1. MSS SP-123. 2. Cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body. 3. Ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces. 4. Solder-joint or threaded ends.

2.3 PEX TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Manufacturer: Uponor.

B. Tubing:

1. Material: Crosslinked polyethylene (PEX) manufacturer by PEX-a or Engel method. PEX-b and PEX-c is not allowed.

2. Type: Wirsbo AQUAPEX. 3. Material Standard: Manufactured in accordance with ASTM F876 and ASTM F877 and

tested for compliance by an independent third party agency. 4. Standard grade hydrostatic design and pressure ratings from PPI. 5. Fire-rated assembly listings in accordance with ANSI/UL 263.

a. UL Design No. L557 — 1-hour wood frame floor/ceiling assemblies. b. UL Design No. K913 — 2-hour concrete floor/ceiling assemblies. c. UL Design No. U372 — 1-hour wood stud/gypsum wallboard wall assemblies. d. UL Design No. V444 — 1-hour steel stud/gypsum wallboard wall assemblies.

6. Minimum Bend Radius (cold bending): No less than six times the outside diameter. Use a bend support as supplied by the PEX tubing manufacturer for tubing with a bend radius less than stated.

7. Nominal Inside Diameter: Provide tubing with nominal inside diameter, in accordance with ASTM F876 as indicated.

a. ⅜ inches. b. ½ inches. c. ¾ inches. d. 1 inches. e. 1¼ inches. f. 1½ inches.



g. 2 inches. h. 2½ inches. i. 3 inches.

C. Fittings for PEX Tube:

1. Material: Fitting assembly shall be manufactured from material listed in paragraph 5.1 of ASTM F1960.

2. Material Standard: Comply with ASTM F 1960. 3. Type: PEX-a cold expansion fitting.

a. Assembly consists of the appropriate ProPEX insert with a corresponding ProPEX Ring and matching PEX tube dimensions.

4. Crimp fittings are not allowed.

D. Manifold:

1. Material: Type L copper body with UNS 3600 series brass ProPEX outlet connections or engineered plastic (EP) body with ProPEX outlet connections.

2. Manifold Type: Uponor ProPEX copper manifold or Uponor engineered plastic (EP) manifold.

3. All manifolds shall be manufactured with the appropriate-sized ProPEX fittings on the manifold supply inlets.

E. Accessories:

1. Angle stops and straight stops that are compatible with PEX tubing are supplied by the PEX tubing manufacturer.

2. Bend supports designed for maintaining tight radius bends are supplied by the PEX tubing manufacturer.

3. ProPEX expander tool to install the ASTM F1960 compatible fittings are supplied by the PEX tubing manufacturer.

4. The tubing manufacturer provides clips and/or PEX rails for supporting tubing runs. 5. All horizontal tubing hangers and riser clamps are epoxy-coated material. 6. Fixture pipe termination: Tubing manufacturer wall bracket with copper stub-outs.

2.4 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS

A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials:

1. AWWA C110/A21.10, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free unless otherwise indicated.

2. Full-face or ring type unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.

C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys.

D. Flux: ASTM B 813, water flushable.



E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing unless otherwise indicated.

2.5 ENCASEMENT FOR PIPING

A. Standard: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105/A21.5.

B. Form: Sheet or tube.

C. Color: Black or natural.

2.6 TRANSITION FITTINGS

A. General Requirements:

1. Same size as pipes to be joined. 2. Pressure rating at least equal to pipes to be joined. 3. End connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting.

C. Sleeve-Type Transition Coupling: AWWA C219.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. b. Dresser, Inc. c. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The). d. JCM Industries, Inc. e. Romac Industries, Inc. f. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. g. Smith-Blair, Inc. h. Viking Johnson.

D. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

a. Uponor.

2.7 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Dielectric Unions:




a. A.Y. McDonald Mfg. Co. b. Capitol Manufacturing Company. c. Central Plastics Company. d. HART Industrial Unions, LLC. e. Jomar Valve. f. Matco-Norca. g. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company. h. Wilkins. i. Zurn Industries, LLC.

2. Standard: ASSE 1079. 3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F. 4. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

C. Dielectric Flanges:


a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Matco-Norca. d. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company. e. Wilkins. f. Zurn Industries, LLC.

2. Standard: ASSE 1079. 3. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly. 4. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F. 5. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder-joint

copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

D. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:


a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Central Plastics Company. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges. 3. Pressure Rating: 150 psig. 4. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic. 5. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene. 6. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.



E. Dielectric Nipples:


a. Elster Perfection Corporation. b. Grinnell Mechanical Products. c. Matco-Norca. d. Precision Plumbing Products. e. Victaulic Company.

2. Standard: IAPMO PS 66. 3. Electroplated steel nipple complying with ASTM F 1545. 4. Pressure Rating and Temperature: 300 psig at 225 deg F. 5. End Connections: Male threaded. 6. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.

B. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

C. Install underground copper tube and ductile-iron pipe in PE encasement according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105/A21.5.

D. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve inside the building at each domestic water-service entrance.

E. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.

F. Install water-pressure-reducing valves downstream from shutoff valves.

G. Install domestic water piping level with 0.25 percent slope downward toward drain and plumb.

H. Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility company's requirements.

I. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

J. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.



K. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space.

L. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

M. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher than the system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

N. Install piping free of sags and bends.

O. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

P. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and specialty.

Q. Install pressure gages on suction and discharge piping for each plumbing pump and packaged booster pump.

R. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

S. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs.

T. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

U. Do not install domestic water piping over electrical equipment.

V. PEX

1. Comply with manufacturer’s product data, including product technical bulletins, installation instructions, design drawings and the Uponor Professional Plumbing Installation Guide.

2. Install Wirsbo AQUAPEX tubing in accordance with the tubing manufacturer's recommendations and as indicated in the installation handbook.

3. Do not install PEX tubing within 6 inches of gas appliance vents or within 12 inches of any recessed light fixtures.

4. Do not solder within 18 inches of PEX tubing in the same waterline. Make sweat connections prior to making PEX connections.

5. Do not expose PEX tubing to direct sunlight for more than 30 days. 6. Ensure no glues, solvents, sealants or chemicals come in contact with the tubing without

prior permission from the tubing manufacturer. 7. Use grommets or sleeves at the penetration for PEX tubing passing through metal studs. 8. Protect PEX tubing with sleeves where abrasion may occur. 9. Use strike protectors where PEX tubing penetrates a stud or joist and has the potential for

being struck with a screw or nail. 10. Use tubing manufacturer-supplied bend supports where bends are less than six times the

outside tubing diameter. 11. Minimum horizontal supports are installed not less than 32 inches between hangers in

accordance with model plumbing codes and the installation handbook. 12. PEX riser installations require epoxy-coated riser clamps installed at the base of the

ceiling per floor. 13. A mid-story support is required for riser applications.



14. Pressurize Wirsbo AQUAPEX tubing with air in accordance with applicable codes or in the absence of applicable codes to a pressure of 25 psi above normal working pressure of the system.

15. Comply with safety precautions when pressure testing, including use of compressed air, where applicable. Do not use water to pressurize the system if ambient air temperature has the possibility of dropping below 32°F.

16. Through-penetration Firestop a. Ensure compliance of one- and two-hour rated through penetration assemblies in

accordance with ASTM E814. b. A list of firestop manufacturers that list PEX tubing with their firestop systems is

available from the PEX tubing manufacturer.

3.2 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly.

C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged.

D. Brazed Joints for Copper Tubing: Comply with CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed Joints" chapter.

E. Soldered Joints for Copper Tubing: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate asbestos-free, nonmetallic gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for domestic water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.

G. Joints for PEX Piping: Join according to ASTM F 1807.

H. Joints for Dissimilar-Material Piping: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems.

3.3 TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping.

B. Transition Fittings in Underground Domestic Water Piping:

1. Fittings for NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Fitting-type coupling. 2. Fittings for NPS 2 and Larger: Sleeve-type coupling.



C. Transition Fittings in Aboveground Domestic Water Piping NPS 2 and Smaller: Plastic-to-metal transition fittings or unions.

3.4 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.

B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric couplings or nipples.

C. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flange kits.

D. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 5 and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits.

3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Install pipe hanger and support products.

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps. 2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

B. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

C. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch.

D. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 4. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 5. NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod. 6. NPS 6: 10 feet with 5/8-inch rod. 7. NPS 8: 10 feet with 3/4-inch rod.

E. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.

F. Install vinyl-coated hangers for PEX piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1 and Smaller: 32 inches with 3/8-inch rod.



G. Install hangers for vertical PEX piping every 48 inches.

H. Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. When installing piping adjacent to equipment and machines, allow space for service and maintenance.

C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect to the following:

1. Domestic Water Booster Pumps: Cold-water suction and discharge piping. 2. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than

equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components.

B. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Piping Inspections:

a. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

b. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction:

1) Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing in after roughing in and before setting fixtures.

2) Final Inspection: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified in "Piping Tests" Subparagraph below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

c. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.



d. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Piping Tests:

a. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water.

b. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

c. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

d. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow it to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

e. Repair leaks and defects with new materials, and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.

f. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.

B. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

D. PEX-a Manufacturer’s Field Services: Provide manufacturer’s field service consisting of product use recommendations and periodic site visit for inspection of product installation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

1. Site Visits: A minimum of two (2), 2-hour site visits.

3.9 ADJUSTING

A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:

1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs. 2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position. 3. Open throttling valves to proper setting.

4. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during installation.

5. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs. 6. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for

application where used and are clean and ready for use. 7. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.

3.10 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:



1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using.

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below:

a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets.

b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:

1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.

2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.

c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time.

d. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination. e. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Clean non-potable domestic water piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using.

2. Use purging procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or; if methods are not prescribed, follow procedures described below:

a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets.

b. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.

C. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. Include copies of water-sample approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

E. PEX-a: Clean installed products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions prior to owner’s acceptance.

3.11 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated.

C. Fitting Option: Extruded-tee connections and brazed joints may be used on aboveground copper tubing.



D. Under-building-slab, domestic water, building-service piping, NPS 3 and smaller, shall be one of the following:

1. Soft copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type K; wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and brazed joints.

2. PEX-a tube; fittings for PEX-a tube; and PEX-a cold expansion fitting.

E. Under-building-slab, domestic water, building-service piping, NPS 4 to NPS 8 and larger, shall be one of the following:


F. Under-building-slab, domestic water piping, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be one of the following:


2. PEX-a tube, NPS 2 and smaller; fittings for PEX-a tube; and PEX-a cold expansion fitting.

G. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be one of the following:

1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and soldered joints.

2. PEX-a tube, NPS 2 and smaller; fittings for PEX-a tube; and PEX-a cold expansion fitting. a. NOTE: PEX TUBING NOT ALLOWED IN HVAC PLENUM SPACES UNLESS

USING A UL ASSEMBLY THAT COMPLIES WITH NPFA 90A FLAME SPREAD UNDER 25 AND SMOKE DEVELOPED UNDER 50. CONTRACTOR SHALL TAKE CARE AND MAKE ALLOWANCES FOR PROTECTION OF PEX IN WALLS TO AVOID PUNCTURE OR DAMAGE BY OTHER CONSTRUCTION. INSTALLATION SHALL BE PER MANUFACTUERS’ RECOMMENDATIONS AND SHALL BE SUPPORTED AND ROUTED IN A NEAT, UNIFORM MANNER AND SHALL AVOID SAGS AND TIGHT RADIUSED ELBOWS AND BENDS.

H. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4, shall be the following:


2. PEX-a tube, NPS 3 and smaller; fittings for PEX-a tube; and PEX-a cold expansion fitting.

I. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 5 to NPS 8, shall be one of the following:




3.12 VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply:

1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly, ball, or gate valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

2. Throttling Duty: Use ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly or ball valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3. Hot-Water Circulation Piping, Balancing Duty: Calibrated balancing valves. 4. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.

B. Use check valves to maintain correct direction of domestic water flow to and from equipment.



230500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC For Construction December 14, 2017 Page 1 of 7

SECTION 230500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Dielectric fittings. 2. Mechanical sleeve seals. 3. Sleeves. 4. Escutcheons. 5. Grout. 6. HVAC demolition. 7. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. 8. Concrete bases. 9. Supports and anchorages.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and chases.

E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Welding certificates.




A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes

involved and that certification is current.

C. Electrical Characteristics for HVAC Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.

B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F.

D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.

E. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.

F. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.

2.2 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve.

B. Sealing Elements: EPDM or NBR (material shall be compatible with intended application) interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

C. Pressure Plates: Include two for each sealing element.



D. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

2.3 SLEEVES

A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.

C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.

1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.

E. Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

F. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.

G. Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth-outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

2.4 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated finish.

C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated and rough brass.

D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated and rough brass.

2.5 GROUT

A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, non-shrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.

1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, non-staining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.



3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HVAC DEMOLITION

A. Disconnect, demolish, and remove HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed.

1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.

2. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material. Contractor shall receive approval from Architect/Owner before abandoning piping or equipment in place.

3. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.

4. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. Contractor shall receive approval from Architect/Owner before abandoning piping or equipment in place.

5. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. 6. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove,

clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational.

7. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner.

B. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable, remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and quality.

3.2 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.



F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

G. Install piping at indicated slopes.

H. Install piping free of sags and bends.

I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

M. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.

N. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter. 2. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements

required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

O. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

P. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations.

Q. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

R. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements.

3.3 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems.



B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

D. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

E. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

G. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.

1. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion. 2. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.

3.4 PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.

4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.

3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated.

B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install HVAC equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.



D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.

3.6 CONCRETE BASES

A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project.

1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit.

2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base.

3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.

4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions. 7. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in

Division 03.

3.7 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor HVAC materials and equipment.

B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.

3.8 GROUTING

A. Mix and install grout for HVAC equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors.

B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.

C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.

D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.

E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.

F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.

G. Place grout around anchors.

H. Cure placed grout.



230513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT For Construction December 14, 2017 Page 1 of 3

SECTION 230513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following:

1. Motor controllers. 2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load. 3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. 4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.

B. Motors 1/3 HP and smaller shall be 120 volts, single phase. Motors 1/2 HP and larger shall be 208, 230, or 460 volts, 3 phase. Motors shall be size and rating as indicated on the drawings. Motors that are an integral part of special equipment may vary from above to meet manufacturing standards.

2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS

A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet above sea level.

B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.



2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS

A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.

B. Efficiency: Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.

C. Service Factor: 1.15.

D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque.

1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding. 2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed.

E. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.

F. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

G. Temperature Rise: Class B.

H. Insulation: Class F.

2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box, suited to control method.

B. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers:

1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by pulse-width modulated inverters.

2. Energy- and Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation. 3. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation. 4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected

motors. 5. Shaft Grounding: Motors over 25HP shall be equipped with a conductive microfiber,

shaft grounding ring with a minimum of two rows of circumferential micro fibers to discharge electrical shaft currents within the motor and/or its bearings. AEGIS or equal. Grounding rings shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Application note: motors up to 100HP shall be provided with a minimum of one shaft grounding ring installed either on the drive end or non-drive end. Motors over 100HP shall be provided with an insulated bearing on the non-drive end and a shaft grounding ring on the drive end of the motor. Grounding rings shall be provided and installed by the motor manufacturer or installed by a reputable motor shop with expertise in the proper installation of devices. If the devices are not factory installed, a third party shall be engaged to test the installation to verify that no shaft currents are present.



2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS

A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application:

1. Permanent-split capacitor. 2. Split phase. 3. Capacitor start, inductor run. 4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.

B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.

C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.

E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)



230517 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING For Construction December 14, 2017 Page 1 of 4

SECTION 230517 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Sleeves. 2. Sleeve-seal systems. 3. Grout.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Cast-Iron Wall Pipes: Cast or fabricated of cast or ductile iron and equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.

B. Galvanized-Steel Wall Pipes: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, with plain ends and welded steel collar; zinc coated.

C. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, with plain ends.

D. PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.

E. Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

2.2 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.



2. CALPICO, Inc. 3. Metraflex Company (The). 4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. 5. Proco Products, Inc.

B. Description: Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling annular space between piping and sleeve.

1. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

2. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, of length

required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.

2.3 GROUT

A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.

B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to provide 1-inch annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls.

1. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

C. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and walls are constructed.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level.

2. Using grout, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeve-seal system.

D. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.



1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. 2. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between

sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. 3. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint sealants

appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.

E. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials.

3.2 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at service piping entries into building.

B. Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and for sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in penetration, assemble sleeve-seal system components, and install in annular space between piping and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make a watertight seal.

3.3 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE

A. Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications:

1. Exterior Concrete Walls above Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves. b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.

2. Exterior Concrete Walls below Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system.

1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.

b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system.


3. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system.




b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system.


4. Concrete Slabs above Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: PVC Pipe Sleeves. b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves .

5. Interior Partitions:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: PVC-pipe sleeves. b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel-sheet sleeves.



230519 METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING For Construction December 14, 2017 Page 1 of 7

SECTION 230519 - METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Liquid-in-glass thermometers. 2. Thermowells. 3. Dial-type pressure gages. 4. Gage attachments. 5. Magnetic flowmeters.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Product certificates.

D. Operation and maintenance data.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS

A. Metal-Case, Industrial-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:


a. Flo Fab Inc. b. Miljoco Corporation. c. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group. d. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Company. e. Trerice, H. O. Co. f. Weiss Instruments, Inc. g. Winters Instruments - U.S.

2. Standard: ASME B40.200.



3. Case: Cast aluminum; 7-inch nominal size unless otherwise indicated. 4. Case Form: Adjustable angle unless otherwise indicated. 5. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue or red organic liquid. 6. Tube Background: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings

graduated in deg F and deg C. 7. Window: Glass. 8. Stem: Aluminum and of length to suit installation.

a. Design for Air-Duct Installation: With ventilated shroud. b. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem.

9. Connector: 1-1/4 inches, with ASME B1.1 screw threads. 10. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a maximum of

1.5 percent of scale range. 11. Provide brass ball valve for isolation of gauge.

2.2 THERMOWELLS

A. Thermowells:

1. Standard: ASME B40.200. 2. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting. 3. Material for Use with Copper Tubing: CNR or CUNI. 4. Material for Use with Steel Piping: CRES. 5. Type: Stepped shank unless straight or tapered shank is indicated. 6. External Threads: NPS 1/2, NPS 3/4, or NPS 1, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads. 7. Internal Threads: 1/2, 3/4, and 1 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads. 8. Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or stem. 9. Insertion Length: Length required to match thermometer bulb or stem. 10. Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and tubing. 11. Bushings: For converting size of thermowell's internal screw thread to size of

thermometer connection. 12. Provide brass ball valve for isolation of gauge.

B. Heat-Transfer Medium: Mixture of graphite and glycerin.

2.3 PRESSURE GAGES

A. Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages:


a. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge. b. Ashcroft Inc. c. Ernst Flow Industries. d. Flo Fab Inc. e. Marsh Bellofram. f. Miljoco Corporation.



g. Noshok. h. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group. i. REOTEMP Instrument Corporation. j. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Company. k. Trerice, H. O. Co. l. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. m. Weiss Instruments, Inc. n. WIKA Instrument Corporation - USA. o. Winters Instruments - U.S.

2. Standard: ASME B40.100. 3. Case: Liquid-filled type(s); cast aluminum or drawn steel; 4-1/2-inch nominal diameter. 4. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated. 5. Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and

bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated. 6. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer. 7. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in psi . 8. Pointer: Dark-colored metal. 9. Window: Glass. 10. Ring: Brass. 11. Accuracy: Grade C, plus or minus 3 percent of middle half of scale range. 12. Provide brass ball valve for isolation of gauge.

B. Remote-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages:


a. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge. b. Ashcroft Inc. c. Ernst Flow Industries. d. Flo Fab Inc. e. Marsh Bellofram. f. Miljoco Corporation. g. Noshok. h. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group. i. REOTEMP Instrument Corporation. j. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Company. k. Trerice, H. O. Co. l. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. m. Weiss Instruments, Inc. n. WIKA Instrument Corporation - USA. o. Winters Instruments - U.S.

2. Standard: ASME B40.100. 3. Case: Liquid-filled type; metal; 4-1/2-inch nominal diameter with back flange and holes

for panel mounting. 4. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated. 5. Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2 ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and

bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated. 6. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.



7. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in psi psi and kPa.

8. Pointer: Dark-colored metal. 9. Window: Glass or plastic Insert material. 10. Ring: Metal Stainless steel Insert material. 11. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half of Grade B, plus or minus 2

percent of middle half of Grade C, plus or minus 3 percent of middle half of Grade D, plus or minus 5 percent of whole scale range.

12. Provide brass ball valve for isolation of gauge.

2.4 GAGE ATTACHMENTS

A. Snubbers: ASME B40.100, brass; with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and piston-type surge-dampening device. Include extension for use on insulated piping.

B. Siphons: Loop-shaped section of steel pipe with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2 pipe threads.

C. Valves: Brass ball Brass or stainless-steel needle, with NPS 1/4 NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2 NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.

2.5 FLOWMETERS

A. Magnetic Flowmeters:


a. ABB; Instrumentation and Analytical. b. Emerson Process Management; Rosemount. c. Yokogawa Electric Corporation.

2. Description: Full-bore magnetic flowmeter. 3. Flow Range: Sensor and indicator shall cover operating range of equipment or system

served. 4. Sensor: Insertion type; for inserting probe into piping and measuring flow directly in

gallons per minute.

a. Design: Plused DC, magnetic type measurement for water. b. Construction: Stainless-steel or low-copper aluminum with integral transmitter

and direct-reading scale. c. Minimum Pressure Rating: 150 psig. d. Minimum Temperature Rating: 250 deg F.

5. Indicator: Integral part of sensor. 6. Integral Transformer: For low-voltage power connection. 7. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.35 percent or better. 8. Display: Shows rate of flow, flow velocity and total volume in gallons. 9. Operating Instructions: Include complete instructions with each flowmeter.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install thermowells with socket extending a minimum of 2 inches into fluid one-third of pipe diameter to center of pipe and in vertical position in piping tees.

B. Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors. Include bushings if required to match sizes.

C. Install thermowells with extension on insulated piping.

D. Fill thermowells with heat-transfer medium.

E. Install direct-mounted thermometers in thermowells and adjust vertical and tilted positions.

F. Install remote-mounted thermometer bulbs in thermowells and install cases on panels; connect cases with tubing and support tubing to prevent kinks. Use minimum tubing length.

G. Install direct-mounted pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at the most readable position.

H. Install remote-mounted pressure gages on panel.

I. Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gage for fluids (except steam).

J. Install valve and syphon fitting in piping for each pressure gage for steam.

K. Install flow indicators in piping systems in accessible positions for easy viewing.

L. Assemble and install connections, tubing, and accessories between flow-measuring elements and flowmeters according to manufacturer's written instructions.

M. Install flowmeter elements in accessible positions in piping systems.

N. Install flowmeter elements, with at least minimum straight lengths of pipe, upstream and downstream from element according to manufacturer's written instructions.

O. Install permanent indicators on walls or brackets in accessible and readable positions.

P. Install connection fittings in accessible locations for attachment to portable indicators.

Q. Mount thermal-energy meters on wall if accessible; if not, provide brackets to support meters.

R. Install thermometers in the following locations:

1. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic zone. 2. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic boiler. 3. Two inlets and two outlets of each chiller. 4. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air-handling units. 5. Two inlets and two outlets of each hydronic heat exchanger.



6. Inlet and outlet of each thermal-storage tank. 7. Outside-, return-, supply-, and mixed-air ducts. 8. Insert location.

S. Install pressure gages in the following locations:

1. Discharge of each pressure-reducing valve. 2. Inlet and outlet of each chiller chilled-water and condenser-water connection. 3. Suction and discharge of each pump. 4. Insert location.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance of meters, gages, machines, and equipment.

B. Connect flowmeter-system elements to meters.

C. Connect flowmeter transmitters to meters.

D. Connect thermal-energy meter transmitters to meters.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.

3.4 THERMOMETER SCHEDULE

A. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each hydronic zone shall be one of the following:

1. Liquid-filled Sealed, bimetallic-actuated type. 2. Industrial-style, liquid-in-glass type.

B. Thermometers at inlets and outlets of each chiller shall be one of the following:


C. Thermometers at inlets and outlets of each hydronic heat exchanger shall be one of the following:


D. Thermometer stems shall be of length to match thermowell insertion length.



3.5 THERMOMETER SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Chilled-Water Piping: 0 to 100 deg F.

B. Scale Range for Condenser-Water Piping: 0 to 150 deg F.

C. Scale Range for Heating, Hot-Water Piping: 0 to 250 deg F.

3.6 PRESSURE-GAGE SCHEDULE

A. Pressure gages at discharge of each pressure-reducing valve shall be one of the following:

1. Liquid-filled Sealed Open-front, pressure-relief Solid-front, pressure-relief Insert type, direct remote-mounted, metal case.

2. Sealed Insert type, direct remote-mounted, plastic case.

B. Pressure gages at inlet and outlet of each chiller chilled-water and condenser-water connection shall be one of the following:



C. Pressure gages at suction and discharge of each pump shall be one of the following:



3.7 PRESSURE-GAGE SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Chilled-Water Piping: 0 to 160 psi.

B. Scale Range for Condenser-Water Piping: 0 to 160 psi.

3.8 FLOWMETER SCHEDULE

A. Flowmeters for Chilled-Water Piping: Full bore magnetic type.



230523 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING For Construction December 14, 2017 Page 1 of 9

SECTION 230523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Bronze ball valves. 2. Iron, single-flange butterfly valves. 3. Iron, grooved-end butterfly valves. 4. High-performance butterfly valves. 5. Bronze swing check valves. 6. Iron swing check valves. 7. Iron, center-guided check valves.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated.


A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer.

B. ASME Compliance: ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES

A. Refer to HVAC valve schedule articles for applications of valves.

B. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.

C. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

D. Valve Actuator Types:



1. Gear Actuator: For quarter-turn valves NPS 8 and larger. 2. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types. 3. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and smaller. 4. Chainwheel: Device for attachment to valve handwheel, stem, or other actuator; of size

and with chain for mounting height, as indicated in the "Valve Installation" Article.

E. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extensions and the following features: 1. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and

protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation.

2. Butterfly Valves: With extended neck.

F. Valve-End Connections:

1. Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves. 2. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18. 3. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.

2.2 BRONZE BALL VALVES

A. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Stainless-Steel Trim:


a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c. Hammond Valve. d. Milwaukee Valve Company. e. NIBCO INC.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. SWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). c. CWP Rating: 600 psig (4140 kPa). d. Body Design: Two piece. e. Body Material: Bronze. f. Ends: Threaded. g. Seats: PTFE or TFE. h. Stem: Stainless steel. i. Ball: Stainless steel, vented. j. Port: Full.

2.3 IRON, SINGLE-FLANGE BUTTERFLY VALVES

A. 150 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with EPDM Seat and Stainless-Steel Disc:




a. Bray Controls; a division of Bray International. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. e. DeZurik Water Controls. f. Hammond Valve. g. Milwaukee Valve Company. h. Mueller Steam Specialty; a division of SPX Corporation. i. NIBCO INC. j. Tyco Valves & Controls; a unit of Tyco Flow Control.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-67, Type I. b. CWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). c. Body Design: Lug type; suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at rated

pressure without use of downstream flange. d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, cast iron or ASTM A 536, ductile iron. e. Seat: EPDM. f. Stem: One- or two-piece stainless steel. g. Disc: Stainless steel.

B. 200 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with EPDM Seat and Stainless-Steel Disc:


a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. d. DeZurik Water Controls. e. Hammond Valve. f. Milwaukee Valve Company. g. Mueller Steam Specialty; a division of SPX Corporation. h. NIBCO INC.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-67, Type I. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). c. Body Design: Lug type; suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at rated

pressure without use of downstream flange. d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, cast iron or ASTM A 536, ductile iron. e. Seat: EPDM. f. Stem: One- or two-piece stainless steel. g. Disc: Stainless steel.



2.4 IRON, GROOVED-END BUTTERFLY VALVES

A. 175 CWP, Iron, Grooved-End Butterfly Valves:


a. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc. b. Shurjoint Piping Products. c. Tyco Fire Products LP; Grinnell Mechanical Products. d. Victaulic Company.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-67, Type I. b. CWP Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa). c. Body Material: Coated, ductile iron. d. Stem: Two-piece stainless steel. e. Disc: Coated, ductile iron. f. Seal: EPDM.

2.5 HIGH-PERFORMANCE BUTTERFLY VALVES

A. Class 150, Single-Flange, High-Performance Butterfly Valves:


a. Bray Controls; a division of Bray International. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Flowseal. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. d. DeZurik Water Controls. e. Hammond Valve. f. Jamesbury; a subsidiary of Metso Automation. g. Milwaukee Valve Company. h. NIBCO INC. i. Tyco Valves & Controls; a unit of Tyco Flow Control.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-68. b. CWP Rating: 285 psig (1965 kPa) at 100 deg F (38 deg C). c. Body Design: Lug type; suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at rated

pressure without use of downstream flange. d. Body Material: Carbon steel, cast iron, ductile iron, or stainless steel. e. Seat: Reinforced PTFE or metal. f. Stem: Stainless steel; offset from seat plane. g. Disc: Carbon steel. h. Service: Bidirectional.



2.6 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc:


a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. d. Hammond Valve. e. Milwaukee Valve Company. f. NIBCO INC. g. Powell Valves.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 3. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). c. Body Design: Horizontal flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze. e. Ends: Threaded. f. Disc: Bronze.

2.7 SPRING-ASSISTED IN-LINE CHECK VALVES


1. Durabla; Model SCV.

B. Description:

1. Stainless steel construction. 2. 316 SS springs.

2.8 IRON SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Class 125, Iron Swing Check Valves with Metal Seats:


a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. d. Hammond Valve. e. Milwaukee Valve Company. f. NIBCO INC.



g. Powell Valves.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-71, Type I. b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12 (DN 65 to DN 300), CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). c. NPS 14 to NPS 24 (DN 350 to DN 600), CWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). d. Body Design: Clear or full waterway. e. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. f. Ends: Flanged. g. Trim: Bronze. h. Gasket: Asbestos free.

B. Class 125, Iron Swing Check Valves with Nonmetallic-to-Metal Seats:


a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-71, Type I. b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12 (DN 65 to DN 300), CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). c. NPS 14 to NPS 24 (DN 350 to DN 600), CWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). d. Body Design: Clear or full waterway. e. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. f. Ends: Flanged. g. Trim: Composition. h. Seat Ring: Bronze. i. Disc Holder: Bronze. j. Disc: PTFE or TFE. k. Gasket: Asbestos free.

2.9 IRON, CENTER-GUIDED CHECK VALVES

A. Class 125, Iron, Globe, Center-Guided Check Valves with Metal Seat:


a. Hammond Valve. b. Metraflex, Inc. c. Milwaukee Valve Company. d. Mueller Steam Specialty; a division of SPX Corporation. e. NIBCO INC. f. Spence Strainers International; a division of CIRCOR International.

2. Description:



a. Standard: MSS SP-125. b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12 (DN 65 to DN 300), CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). c. NPS 14 to NPS 24 (DN 350 to DN 600), CWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron. e. Style: Globe, spring loaded. f. Ends: Flanged. g. Seat: Bronze.

B. Class 125, Iron, Globe, Center-Guided Check Valves with Resilient Seat:


a. Anvil International, Inc. b. Hammond Valve. c. Milwaukee Valve Company. d. NIBCO INC.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-125. b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12 (DN 65 to DN 300), CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). c. NPS 14 to NPS 24 (DN 350 to DN 600), CWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron. e. Style: Globe, spring loaded. f. Ends: Flanged. g. Seat: EPDM or NBR according to listing and usage.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.

B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations.

C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.

E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.



3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

E. Install chainwheels on operators for butterfly valves NPS 4 and larger and more than 96 inches above floor. Extend chains to 60 inches above finished floor.

F. Install swing check valves for proper direction of flow and in horizontal position with hinge pin level.

1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level. 2. Center-Guided Check Valves: In horizontal or vertical position, between flanges.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.

3.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:

1. Shutoff Service: Ball or butterfly valves. 2. Throttling Service, Except Steam: ball or butterfly, valves. 3. Pump-Discharge Check Valves:

a. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves with bronze or nonmetallic disc. b. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Iron swing check valves with spring or iron,

center-guided, metal or resilient-seat check valves.

B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.

C. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections:

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.

2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.

3. For Copper Tubing, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends. 4. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends. 5. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end

option is indicated in valve schedules below.



6. For Steel Piping, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends.

3.5 CONDENSER-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Pipe NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: 1. Ball Valves: Two piece, full port, bronze with bronze trim. 2. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.

B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger:

1. Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12 (DN 65 to DN 300): 200 CWP, EPDM seat, aluminum-bronze or stainless steel disc.

2. Iron, Grooved-End Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12 (DN 65 to DN 300): 175 CWP.

3. High-Performance Butterfly Valves: Class 150, single flange. 4. Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 125, metal seats. 5. Iron, Center-Guided Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 24 (DN 65 to DN 600):

Class 125, metal seat.



230529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT For Construction December 14, 2017 Page 1 of 10

SECTION 230529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal pipe hangers and supports. 2. Trapeze pipe hangers. 3. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. 4. Pipe stands. 5. Equipment supports.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for HVAC piping and equipment shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.




A. Welding certificates.




A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Clevis 2. Fee and Mason 3. Anvil 4. PDH Manufacturing, Inc,.

2.2 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. 2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped. 3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. 4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to

support bearing surface of piping. 5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.

2.3 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.

2.4 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS


1. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. 2. Clement Support Services. 3. ERICO International Corporation. 4. National Pipe Hanger Corporation. 5. PHS Industries, Inc. 6. Pipe Shields Inc. 7. Piping Technology & Products, Inc.



8. Rilco Manufacturing Co., Inc. 9. Value Engineered Products, Inc.

B. Insulation-Insert Material for Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig or ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier.

C. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.

D. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

E. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature.

2.5 PIPE STANDS

A. General Requirements for Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated assemblies made of manufactured corrosion-resistant components to support roof-mounted piping.

B. Compact Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic unit with integral-rod roller, pipe clamps, or V-shaped cradle to support pipe, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

C. Low-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: One-piece stainless-steel base unit with plastic roller, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

D. High-Type, Single-Pipe Stand:

1. Description: Assembly of base, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe support, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

2. Base: Stainless steel. 3. Vertical Members: Two or more cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel, continuous-

thread rods. 4. Horizontal Member: Cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel rod with plastic or stainless-

steel, roller-type pipe support.

E. High-Type, Multiple-Pipe Stand:

1. Description: Assembly of bases, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe supports, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

2. Bases: One or more; plastic. 3. Vertical Members: Two or more protective-coated-steel channels. 4. Horizontal Member: Protective-coated-steel channel. 5. Pipe Supports: Galvanized-steel, clevis-type pipe hangers.

F. Curb-Mounted-Type Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe supports made from structural-steel shapes, continuous-thread rods, and rollers, for mounting on permanent stationary roof curb.



2.6 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbon-steel shapes.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure.

B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

D. Pipe Stand Installation:

1. Pipe Stand Types except Curb-Mounted Type: Assemble components and mount on smooth roof surface. Do not penetrate roof membrane.

2. Curb-Mounted-Type Pipe Stands: Assemble components or fabricate pipe stand and mount on permanent, stationary roof curb.

E. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.

F. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.



G. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

H. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

I. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

J. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

K. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

L. Insulated Piping:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation.

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick. e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.

5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicate-insulation inserts of length at least as long as protective shield.

6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.



3.2 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth.

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.3 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so

contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.

3.5 PAINTING

A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.



C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports, metal trapeze pipe hangers, and metal framing systems and attachments for general service applications.

F. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper attachments for copper piping and tubing.

G. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

H. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.

I. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of up to 1050 deg F, pipes NPS 4 to NPS 24, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.

3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 36, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.

4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 24 if little or no insulation is required.

5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.

6. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 8.

7. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

8. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

9. Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

10. Split Pipe Ring with or without Turnbuckle Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 8.

11. Extension Hinged or Two-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 3.

12. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 13. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or

contraction. 14. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-

pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate. 15. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with

steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate, and with U-bolt to retain pipe.

16. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36 if vertical adjustment is required, with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.



17. Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30, from two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

18. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 24, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

19. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42 if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary.

20. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 24 if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and vertical adjustment is not necessary.

21. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 30 if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition to expansion and contraction.

J. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24.

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

K. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads. 2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. 3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings. 4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of

building attachments. 5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

L. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.

2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.

3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles.

4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. 5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are

considerable and rod sizes are large. 6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to

flange edge. 8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams. 9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-

beams for heavy loads.



10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I-beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.

11. Malleable-Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to structural steel.

12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:

a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb. b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb. c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.

13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. 14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required. 15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear

horizontal movement where headroom is limited.

M. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

N. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement. 2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-

1/4 inches. 3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41, roll hanger with

springs. 4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal

expansion in piping systems. 5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability

factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger. 6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit

variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from base support.

7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from trapeze support.

8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These supports include the following types:

a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally. b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically. c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member.



O. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

P. Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

Q. Use mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction.



230548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT For Construction December 14, 2017 Page 1 of 7

SECTION 230548 - VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Isolation pads. 2. Isolation mounts. 3. Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts. 4. Freestanding and restrained spring isolators. 5. Housed spring mounts. 6. Elastomeric hangers. 7. Spring hangers. 8. Spring hangers with vertical-limit stops. 9. Pipe riser resilient supports. 10. Resilient pipe guides. 11. Restraining braces and cables. 12. Steel and inertia, vibration isolation equipment bases.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. IBC: International Building Code.

B. ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service.


A. Wind-Restraint Loading:

1. Basic Wind Speed: 90 MPH. 2. Building Classification Category: I. 3. Minimum 10 lb/sq. ft. multiplied by the maximum area of the HVAC component

projected on a vertical plane that is normal to the wind direction, and 45 degrees either side of normal.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:



1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation device.

B. Welding certificates.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air-mounting systems to include in operation and maintenance manuals.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Ace Mountings Co., Inc. 2. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 3. Isolation Technology, Inc. 4. Kinetics Noise Control. 5. Mason Industries. 6. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. 7. Vibration Isolation. 8. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.

C. Pads: Arranged in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates, and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment.

1. Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene.

D. Mounts: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant rubber, hermetically sealed compressed fiberglass, or neoprene isolator elements with factory-drilled, encapsulated top plate for bolting to equipment and with baseplate for bolting to structure. Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range.



1. Materials: Cast-ductile-iron or welded steel housing containing two separate and opposing, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene elements that prevent central threaded element and attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation.

2. Neoprene: Shock-absorbing materials compounded according to the standard for bridge-bearing neoprene as defined by AASHTO.

E. Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open-spring isolators.

1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load.

2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure. 5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4-inch- thick, rubber

isolator pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500 psig. 6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw

to fasten and level equipment.

F. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with limit-stop restraint.

1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to weight being removed; factory-drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inch- thick, neoprene or rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.

2. Restraint: Limit stop as required for equipment and authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the

spring at rated load. 4. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 5. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 6. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure.

G. Housed Spring Mounts: Housed spring isolator with integral. 1. Base: Factory drilled for bolting to structure. 2. Snubbers: Vertically adjustable to allow a maximum of 1/4-inch travel up or down

before contacting a resilient collar.

H. Elastomeric Hangers: Single or double-deflection type, fitted with molded, oil-resistant elastomeric isolator elements bonded to steel housings with threaded connections for hanger rods. Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range.

I. Spring Hangers: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring and insert in compression.

1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.


3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.



4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure. 6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-reinforced

cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame. 7. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support

spring coil.

J. Spring Hangers with Vertical-Limit Stop: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring and insert in compression and with a vertical-limit stop.

1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.


3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure. 6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. 7. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower

threaded rod. 8. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support

spring coil.

K. Pipe Riser Resilient Support: All-directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of 2 steel tubes separated by a minimum of 1/2-inch- thick neoprene. Include steel and neoprene vertical-limit stops arranged to prevent vertical travel in both directions. Design support for a maximum load on the isolation material of 500 psig and for equal resistance in all directions.

L. Resilient Pipe Guides: Telescopic arrangement of 2 steel tubes or post and sleeve arrangement separated by a minimum of 1/2-inch- thick neoprene. Where clearances are not readily visible, a factory-set guide height with a shear pin to allow vertical motion due to pipe expansion and contraction shall be fitted. Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable to allow for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of motion to meet location requirements.

2.2 VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT BASES

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 2. Isolation Technology, Inc. 3. Kinetics Noise Control. 4. Mason Industries. 5. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.



6. Vibration Isolation. 7. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc. 8. Insert manufacturer's name.

C. Steel Base: Factory-fabricated, welded, structural-steel bases and rails.

1. Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1-inch clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide bases or rails.

a. Include supports for suction and discharge elbows for pumps.

2. Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. Bases shall have shape to accommodate supported equipment.

3. Support Brackets: Factory-welded steel brackets on frame for outrigger isolation mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support.

D. Inertia Base: Factory-fabricated, welded, structural-steel bases and rails ready for placement of cast-in-place concrete.

1. Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1-inch clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide bases or rails.

a. Include supports for suction and discharge elbows for pumps.

2. Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. Bases shall have shape to accommodate supported equipment.

3. Support Brackets: Factory-welded steel brackets on frame for outrigger isolation mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support.

4. Fabrication: Fabricate steel templates to hold equipment anchor-bolt sleeves and anchors in place during placement of concrete. Obtain anchor-bolt templates from supported equipment manufacturer.

2.3 FACTORY FINISHES

A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.

B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested equipment before shipping.

1. Powder coating on springs and housings. 2. All hardware shall be galvanized. Hot-dip galvanized metal components for exterior use. 3. Baked enamel or powder coat for metal components on isolators for interior use. 4. Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and wind-control devices to indicate

capacity range.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and wind-control devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Multiple Pipe Supports: Secure pipes to trapeze member with clamps approved for application.

A. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings to receive them.

B. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static.

3.3 VIBRATION-CONTROL DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Restraints: 1. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance

between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch.

B. Piping Restraints:

1. Comply with requirements in MSS SP-127. 2. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet o.c., and longitudinal supports a maximum

of 80 feet o.c. 3. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet.

C. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.

D. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base.

E. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.

F. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.

G. Drilled-in Anchors:



1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid pre-stressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.

2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength.

3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened.

4. Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air pockets in the adhesive.

5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench. 6. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior

applications.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight.

B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation.

C. Adjust air-spring leveling mechanism.

D. Adjust active height of spring isolators.

E. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air-mounting systems.



230553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT For Construction December 14, 2017 Page 1 of 5

SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Equipment labels. 2. Warning signs and labels. 3. Pipe labels. 4. Valve tags. 5. Warning tags.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification material and device.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed content for each label.

D. Valve numbering scheme.

E. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Plastic Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

2. Letter Color: White. 3. Background Color: Black. 4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. 5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than

2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.



6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal lettering.

7. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), and the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number, and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules) and the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS

A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

B. Letter Color: Black.

C. Background Color: Yellow.

D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.

E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal lettering.

G. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

H. Label Content: Include caution and warning information plus emergency notification instructions.

2.3 PIPE LABELS

A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction according to ASME A13.1.

B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.



C. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings; also include pipe size and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.

2. Lettering Size: Size letters according to ASME A13.1 for piping .

2.4 VALVE TAGS

A. Description: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch numbers.

1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch or aluminum, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.

2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link chain or beaded chain or S-hook.

B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.

1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.5 WARNING TAGS

A. Description: Preprinted or partially preprinted accident-prevention tags of plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing.

1. Size: 3 by 5-1/4 inches minimum. 2. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire. 3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO

NOT OPERATE." 4. Color: Safety-yellow background with black lettering.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.


A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.



B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

3.3 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.4 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Stenciled Pipe Label Option: Stenciled labels may be provided instead of manufactured pipe labels, at Installer's option. Install stenciled pipe labels, complying with ASME A13.1, on each piping system.

1. Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background.

B. Pipe Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.

Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations and on both sides of through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible

enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed

piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in

areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.

C. Directional Flow Arrows: Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow in pipes, including pipes where flow is allowed in both directions.

D. Pipe Label Color Schedule:

1. Condenser-Water Piping: White letters on a safety-green background.

3.5 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves, valves within factory-fabricated equipment units, shutoff valves, faucets, convenience and lawn-watering hose connections, and HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.



B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:

1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape:

a. Condenser Water: 1-1/2 inches, round.

2. Valve-Tag Colors:

a. Potable and Other Water: White letters on a safety-green background.

3.6 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where required.



TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC For Construction December 14, 2017 Page 1 of 15

SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes testing, adjusting and balancing HVAC systems to provide design conditions as indicated by the associated drawings. This Section includes, but is not limited to the following:

1. Testing, adjusting and balancing of hydronic system fluid flow rates at the system and distribution system level to the indicated quantities according to tolerances specified herein. The following systems to be included:

a. Hydronic Piping Systems:

1) Constant-flow hydronic systems.

2. Measuring the electrical performance of HVAC equipment. 3. Verification that automatic control devices are functioning properly. 4. Measurement of sound levels as related to rotating mechanical equipment. 5. Vibration testing and analysis of all rotating equipment greater than or equal to 10 hp. 6. Reporting results of the activities and procedures specified in this Section.

B. The testing, adjusting and balancing of the hydronic systems shall be performed by an independent TAB contractor contracted directly by the Owner.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.

B. Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rates and air patterns at the system or terminal level. At the system level an example would be reducing fan speed; at the terminal level an example would be changing a damper position.

C. Balance: To proportion air or water flows within the distribution system, including submains, branches and terminals with respect to design quantities.

D. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors of high air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat is withdrawn from a person’s skin than is normally dissipated.

E. Independent: Not affiliated with or in employment of any Contractor.



F. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.

G. Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield repeatable results.

H. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order.

I. Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of measurement. In a closed system, static head is equal on both sides of the pump.

J. Suction Head: The height of fluid surface above the centerline of the pump on the suction side.

K. System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.

L. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance ratings of a fan when installed under conditions different from those presented when the fan was performance tested.

M. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

N. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.

O. TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work.

P. Testing, Adjusting and Balancing (TAB) Agent: The entity responsible for performing and reporting the TAB procedures.

Q. Terminal: A point where the controlled medium (fluid or energy) enters or leaves the distribution system.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3.

B. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 60 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed and prior to commencing work, submit TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article.

C. Certified TAB reports.

D. Sample report forms, other than those standard forms from AABC, NEBB or TABB.


A. Agent shall be an independent testing, adjusting and balancing professional services provider certified by AABC or NEBB and have a minimum of five years experience on projects of similar scope and complexity.



B. TAB Conference: Meet with OCCC on approval of the TAB strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Require the participation of the TAB field supervisor and technicians. Provide seven days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location.

1. Agenda Items:

a. The Contract Documents examination report. b. The TAB plan. c. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors. d. Coordination of documentation and communication flow.

C. Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following:

1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports.

2. Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification.

D. TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor's forms approved by OCCC.

E. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in ASHRAE 111, Section 5, "Instrumentation."

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire TAB period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times.

B. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.

C. Systems shall be fully operational prior to system balancing.

D. Construction Review: Provide onsite visit upon either completion of a commissioning program start-up phase or 100% controls completion and full system operability.

E. The mechanical contractor shall complete the installation and start all HVAC systems to ensure they are working properly, and shall perform all other items to assist the TAB contractor in performing the testing, adjusting, and balancing of the HVAC systems.

F. The mechanical contractor shall make any necessary changes to the impellers, motors, sheaves, belts, dampers as required by the TAB contractor at no additional cost to the owner. Adjustable pitch sheaves shall be replaced with fixed pitch sheaves after completing system balancing. Replaced sheaves and belts shall be disposed of by mechanical contractor.



G. The temperature control contractor shall complete the installation, and operate and test all control systems to ensure they are functioning properly as designed. The temperature control contractor shall assist the TAB contractor as needed to verify the operation and calibration of all temperature control systems.

H. If a commissioning program is in place, all start-up, testing and verification (STV) procedures shall be complete prior to initiation of TAB activities.

I. Demonstration of mechanical equipment shall be performed by the mechanical contractor, or by factory trained manufacturer's representative as specified.

J. Provide instruments and technicians as required to verify readings under direction of Commissioning Authority.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TEST EQUIPMENT

A. Instrumentation shall be provided as necessary and appropriate to perform the work. The instrument shall be factory calibrated, and shall be used with the factory-determined application factors. When reasonable doubt of accuracy exists, recalibration of any or all instrumentation shall be performed as requested by the Commissioning Authority.

B. Proprietary test equipment shall be provided by the manufacturer of the equipment. The manufacturer's representative shall provide the equipment, demonstrate use of the equipment, and assist the TAB contractor or Commissioning Authority in the testing process.

C. Make instruments available to the Commissioning Authority to facilitate spot checks during testing.

D. Test pressure taps, pressure gages, thermometers and wells shall be installed by the mechanical contractor as indicated or specified.

E. Flow measuring stations, flow-limiting devices and balancing valves shall be installed by the mechanical contractor as indicated or specified.

F. All manual volume dampers located above ceilings shall be outfitted with a ribbon of consistent color and type and installed by mechanical contractor for facilitation of locating dampers during TAB.

G. Any additional required pressure and flow taps, and thermometer wells in locations where permanent installation devices are not indicated or specified shall be provided by the mechanical contractor.



3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.

B. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are accessible.

C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.

D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.

E. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves.

1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.

2. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design." Compare results with the design data and installed conditions.

F. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing, cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.

G. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.

H. Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.

I. Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens are replaced by permanent screens with indicated perforations.

J. Examine three-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or mixing fluid flows.

K. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.

L. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.

M. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.



B. Procedure shall include a project specific approach which integrates general methods as set forth by the AABC as per National Standards for Total System Balance and/or NEBB as per Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems.

C. Complete system-readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following:

1. Permanent electrical-power wiring is complete. 2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air. 3. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. 4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. 5. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.

3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in AABC's "National Standards for Total System Balance", ASHRAE 111, NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems" or SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" and in this Section.

B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.

1. After testing and balancing, the mechanical contractor shall install test ports and duct

access doors. 2. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation,

coverings, vapor barrier, and finish.

C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.

D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.

3.5 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data, and number in sequence starting at pump to end of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against the approved pump flow rate. Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts.

C. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the general preparation procedures specified above:

1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow. 2. Check liquid level in expansion tank. 3. Check makeup water-station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent. 4. Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation, and set at indicated flow.



5. Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not set at fully closed position when pump is positive-displacement type unless several terminal valves are kept open.

6. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers. 7. Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing device so

motor nameplate rating is not exceeded. 8. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated.

3.6 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Measure water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures except for positive-displacement pumps:

1. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Read pressure differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage heights. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and verify that the pump has the intended impeller size.

a. If impeller sizes must be adjusted to achieve pump performance, obtain approval from Architect and comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Hydronic Pumps."

2. Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the pump and mark pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve. Adjust pump discharge valve until indicated water flow is achieved.

a. Monitor motor performance during procedures and do not operate motors in overload conditions.

3. Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for the system based on pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare calculated brake horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions where actual amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage.

4. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 10 percent of design.

B. Measure flow at all automatic flow control valves to verify that valves are functioning as designed.

C. Measure flow at all pressure-independent characterized control valves, with valves in fully open position, to verify that valves are functioning as designed.

D. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings.

E. Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance.

1. System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow-pressure-drop relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device.

F. Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow that is 5 percent greater than indicated flow.



G. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of indicated flow rate as follows:

1. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over indicated flow. 2. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage over

indicated flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over indicated flow.

3. Record settings and mark balancing devices.

H. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm, pump heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures including outdoor-air temperature.

I. Measure the differential-pressure-control-valve settings existing at the conclusion of balancing.

J. Check settings and operation of each safety valve. Record settings.

3.7 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS

A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:

1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number. 2. Motor horsepower rating. 3. Motor rpm. 4. Efficiency rating. 5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase. 6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase. 7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.

B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass of the controller to prove proper operation. Record observations including name of controller manufacturer, model number, serial number, and nameplate data.

3.8 PROCEDURES FOR CHILLERS

A. Balance water flow through each evaporator and condenser to within specified tolerances of indicated flow with all pumps operating. With only one chiller operating in a multiple chiller installation, do not exceed the flow for the maximum tube velocity recommended by the chiller manufacturer. Measure and record the following data with each chiller operating at design conditions:

1. Evaporator-water entering and leaving temperatures, pressure drop, and water flow. 2. For water-cooled chillers, condenser-water entering and leaving temperatures, pressure

drop, and water flow. 3. Evaporator and condenser refrigerant temperatures and pressures, using instruments

furnished by chiller manufacturer. 4. Power factor if factory-installed instrumentation is furnished for measuring kilowatts. 5. Kilowatt input if factory-installed instrumentation is furnished for measuring kilowatts.



6. Capacity: Calculate in tons of cooling. 7. For air-cooled chillers, verify condenser-fan rotation and record fan and motor data

including number of fans and entering- and leaving-air temperatures.

3.9 PROCEDURES FOR COOLING TOWERS

A. Shut off makeup water for the duration of the test, and verify that makeup and blowdown systems are fully operational after tests and before leaving the equipment. Perform the following tests and record the results:

1. Measure condenser-water flow to each cell of the cooling tower. 2. Measure entering- and leaving-water temperatures. 3. Measure wet- and dry-bulb temperatures of entering air. 4. Measure wet- and dry-bulb temperatures of leaving air. 5. Measure condenser-water flow rate recirculating through the cooling tower. 6. Measure cooling-tower spray pump discharge pressure. 7. Adjust water level and feed rate of makeup water system. 8. Measure flow through bypass.

3.10 PROCEDURES FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING EXISTING SYSTEMS

A. Perform a preconstruction inspection of existing equipment that is to remain and be reused.

1. Measure and record the operating speed, airflow, and static pressure of each fan. 2. Measure motor voltage and amperage. Compare the values to motor nameplate

information. 3. Check the refrigerant charge. 4. Check the condition of filters. 5. Check the condition of coils. 6. Check the operation of the drain pan and condensate-drain trap. 7. Check bearings and other lubricated parts for proper lubrication. 8. Report on the operating condition of the equipment and the results of the measurements

taken. Report deficiencies.

B. Before performing testing and balancing of existing systems, inspect existing equipment that is to remain and be reused to verify that existing equipment has been cleaned and refurbished. Verify the following:

1. New filters are installed. 2. Coils are clean and fins combed. 3. Drain pans are clean. 4. Fans are clean. 5. Bearings and other parts are properly lubricated. 6. Deficiencies noted in the preconstruction report are corrected.

C. Perform testing and balancing of existing systems to the extent that existing systems are affected by the renovation work.



1. Compare the indicated airflow of the renovated work to the measured fan airflows, and determine the new fan speed and the face velocity of filters and coils.

2. Verify that the indicated airflows of the renovated work result in filter and coil face velocities and fan speeds that are within the acceptable limits defined by equipment manufacturer.

3. If calculations increase or decrease the air flow rates and water flow rates by more than 5 percent, make equipment adjustments to achieve the calculated rates. If increase or decrease is 5 percent or less, equipment adjustments are not required.

4. Balance each air outlet.

3.11 VIBRATION ANALYSIS [ACCEPTANCE TESTING]

A. Measurements shall be taken on the bearing caps of the machine in the vertical, horizontal and axial directions or at the equipment mounting feet if bearings are concealed.

B. For all equipment 10 horsepower and above, the contractor shall provide printed FFT signatures of vibration amplitude versus frequency. The frequency range should be broad enough to include all frequencies characteristic of the equipment, and the frequency filter should not be greater than 10% of band width. At least one signature should be taken on each bearing cap in the radial axis with the highest velocity amplitude. Signatures are to include velocity (inches per second peak to peak) and a bearing condition analysis (acceleration in g’s, inches per second squared, under a high band pass filter).

C. If the self-excited vibration velocity exceeds the allowable maximum, the source of the vibration shall be determined by a qualified vibration consultant. After the source of vibration is determined, corrections shall be made by the Contractor to reduce the self-excited vibration velocity to a level below the allowable maximum.

D. All vibration measurements and analysis shall be made with instruments traceable to the National Bureau of Standards Criteria such as International Research and Development Corporation (IRD) Microprocessor Analyzer Balancer – Model 880, or approved equal.

E. Factory certification of vibration velocity of totally assembled unit will be acceptable in lieu of field measurements for packaged air conditioners, including through wall or window air conditioners, and equipment employing fractional horsepower electric motors.

F. The mechanical contractor shall complete the installation and start of all mechanical systems to ensure they are working properly prior to scheduling the vibration analysis provider.

G. The mechanical contractor shall be responsible for any necessary changes to fans, fan housings, pumps, pump bases, motors, pipe/duct hanger assemblies as required by the vibration analysis provider at no additional cost to the owner.

H. Approved vibration testing and analysis provider shall be considered from the following:

1. OCCC Approved Firm.



3.12 TOLERANCES

A. Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances: 1. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent.

B. Adjust pumps to within 10% of design GPM at design temperature. Excess pump pressure shall be eliminated by trimming the pump impeller by the Mechanical Contractor.

C. General rotating equipment maximum allowable self-excited, total unfiltered vibration velocity shall not exceed 0.15 inches per second peak to peak. Individual velocity amplitude peaks of filtered readings are not to exceed 0.10 inches per second peak to peak.

D. Direct drive pump maximum allowable self-excited, total unfiltered vibration velocity shall not exceed 0.10 inches per second peak to peak. Individual velocity amplitude peaks of filtered readings are not to exceed 0.05 inches per second peak to peak.

3.13 FINAL REPORT

A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections for tested systems and balanced systems.

1. Upon verification and approval of draft reports, submit 1 complete set of final reports certified by the TAB contractor for the Architect and 2 sets for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals. Bind report forms complete with schematic diagrams and data in reinforced, vinyl, 3-ring binder manuals.

2. As-built system schematic diagrams consistently referenced with all equipment and test points, and final test data.

3. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer.

4. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.

B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following:

1. Pump curves. 2. Fan curves. 3. Manufacturers' test data. 4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. 5. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and

product data.

C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:

1. Title page. 2. Name and address of the TAB contractor. 3. Project name. 4. Project location. 5. Engineer's name and address. 6. Contractor's name and address. 7. Report date. 8. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report.



9. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report. Number each page in the report.

10. Summary of contents including the following:

a. Indicated versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract

Documents.

11. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 12. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings. 13. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values. 14. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:

a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers. b. Conditions of filters. c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions. d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils. e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems. g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller. h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.

D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present each system with single-line diagram and include the following:

1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows. 2. Water and steam flow rates. 3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes. 4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations. 5. Terminal units. 6. Balancing stations. 7. Position of balancing devices.

8. Motor Data:

a. Motor make, and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. c. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full-load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore. f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm).

E. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:

1. Fan Data:

a. System identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and size.



e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Arrangement and class. g. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore. h. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm).

2. Motor Data:

a. Motor make, and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. c. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full-load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore. f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm). g. Number, make, and size of belts.

3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):

a. Total airflow rate in cfm (L/s). b. Total system static pressure in inches wg (Pa). c. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg (Pa). e. Suction static pressure in inches wg (Pa).

F. Pump Test Reports: Calculate impeller size by plotting the shutoff head on pump curves and include the following:

1. Unit Data:

a. Unit identification. b. Location. c. Service. d. Make and size. e. Model number and serial number. f. Water flow rate in gpm (L/s). g. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig (kPa). h. Required net positive suction head in feet of head or psig (kPa). i. Pump rpm. j. Impeller diameter in inches (mm). k. Motor make and frame size. l. Motor horsepower and rpm. m. Voltage at each connection. n. Amperage for each phase. o. Full-load amperage and service factor. p. Seal type.

2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):

a. Static head in feet of head or psig (kPa). b. Pump shutoff pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). c. Actual impeller size in inches (mm). d. Full-open flow rate in gpm (L/s).



e. Full-open pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). f. Final discharge pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). g. Final suction pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). h. Final total pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). i. Final water flow rate in gpm (L/s). j. Voltage at each connection. k. Amperage for each phase.

G. Instrument Calibration Reports:

1. Report Data:

a. Instrument type and make. b. Serial number. c. Application. d. Dates of use. e. Dates of calibration.

3.14 INSPECTIONS

A. Initial Inspection:

1. After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and balance readings documented in the final report.

2. Check the following for each system:

a. Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets. b. Measure water flow of at least 5 percent of terminals. c. Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor. Compare the

reading to the set point. d. Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position. e. Note deviations from the Contract Documents in the final report.

B. Final Inspection:

1. After initial inspection is complete and documentation by random checks verifies that testing and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report, request that a final inspection be made by Architect.

2. The TAB contractor's test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the presence of Architect.

3. Architect shall randomly select measurements, documented in the final report, to be rechecked. Rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements recorded or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8-hour business day.

4. If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as "FAILED."



5. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be considered incomplete and shall be rejected.

C. TAB Work will be considered defective if it does not pass final inspections. If TAB Work fails, proceed as follows:

1. Recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report and balancing device settings to include all changes; resubmit the final report and request a second final inspection.

2. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner may contract the services of another TAB contractor to complete TAB Work according to the Contract Documents and deduct the cost of the services from the original TAB contractor's final payment.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.15 ADDITIONAL TESTS

A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.

B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and winter conditions.



230719 HVAC PIPING INSULATION For Construction December 14, 2017 Page 1 of 13

SECTION 230719 - HVAC PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following HVAC piping systems: 1. Condenser water piping, indoors. 2. Condenser water piping, outdoors.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied if any).


A. Field quality-control reports.


A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less.

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less.


A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.



1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application. Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.

C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.

1.8 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.

B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Piping Insulation Schedule," and "Outdoor, Aboveground Piping Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795.

E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.

F. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:


a. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. b. Knauf Insulation. c. Manson Insulation Inc. d. Owens Corning.



2. Type I, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS

A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195.

2.3 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.

B. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.


a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries. c. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.

2. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

3. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

2.4 MASTICS

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.

1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services.


a. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Knauf Insulation. c. Vimasco Corporation.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film thickness.



3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight. 5. Color: White.

C. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above-ambient services.


a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries. c. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. d. Knauf Insulation. e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc. f. Vimasco Corporation.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 1.8 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film thickness. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 4. Solids Content: 60 percent by volume and 66 percent by weight. 5. Color: White.

2.5 SEALANTS

A. Joint Sealants:

1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 2. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F. 4. Color: White or gray. 5. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 6. Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California

Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

B. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products.

2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 5. Color: White. 6. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).



7. Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

2.6 FIELD-APPLIED FABRIC-REINFORCING MESH

A. Woven Polyester Fabric: Approximately 1 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 10 strands by 10 strands/sq. in., in a Leno weave, for pipe.


a. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Vimasco Corporation.

2.7 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal Jacket:


a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. ITW Insulation Systems; Illinois Tool Works, Inc. c. RPR Products, Inc.

2. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005, Temper H-14.

a. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing. b. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules. c. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 1-mil-thick, heat-bonded polyethylene

and kraft paper. d. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil-thick, heat-bonded polyethylene

and kraft paper. e. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers:

1) Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket. 2) Preformed 2-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius

elbows. 3) Tee covers. 4) Flange and union covers. 5) End caps. 6) Beveled collars. 7) Valve covers. 8) Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers are not

available.



2.8 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136.


a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division. b. Compac Corporation. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc,; an American Biltrite company. d. Knauf Insulation. e. Venture Tape.

2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Thickness: 11.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

B. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.


a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division. b. Compac Corporation. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc,; an American Biltrite company. d. Knauf Insulation. e. Venture Tape.

2. Width: 2 inches. 3. Thickness: 3.7 mils. 4. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 5 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch in width.

2.9 SECUREMENTS

A. Bands:

1. Aluminum: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch thick, 3/4 inch wide with wing seal.

2. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted to accept metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer for application.

B. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch-wide, stainless steel or Monel.

C. Wire: 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects. 2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.

B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows:

1. Stainless Steel: Coat 300 series stainless steel with an epoxy primer 5 mils thick and an epoxy finish 5 mils thick if operating in a temperature range between 140 and 300 deg F. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range.

2. Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature between 32 and 300 deg F with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range.

C. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.

D. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.


A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.



F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor

legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation

jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.

a. For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.

M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.

O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.



P. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Manholes. 5. Handholes. 6. Cleanouts.

3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface


3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing.

4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface


3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches.

4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

D. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.

E. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. 2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies.



3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated.

2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.

6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.

7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.

8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape.

9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union." Match size and color of pipe labels.

C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.



D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following:

1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation.

2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.

3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.

4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.

5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION

A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.

2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward-clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.


1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the


adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least

1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.





2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.



2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body.

3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.

3.7 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION

A. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints.

B. Where elastomeric jacketing is indicated, install jacketing per manufacturer’s installation instructions.

3.8 FINISHES

A. Indoor piping shall be painted green to match existing.

B. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.


A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers, two locations of welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three locations of flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article.

C. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements.



3.10 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:

1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces. 2. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.

3.11 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Condenser-Water Supply and Return:

1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1-1/2 inches thick.

3.12 OUTDOOR, ABOVEGROUND PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Condenser-Water Supply and Return:

1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 2 inches thick.

3.13 OUTDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE

A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.

B. Piping with Mineral-Fiber Insulation:

1. Aluminum, Smooth: 0.016 inch thick.



232113 HYDRONIC PIPING For Construction December 14, 2017 Page 1 of 7

SECTION 232113 - HYDRONIC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes pipe and fitting materials and joining methods for the following: 1. Condenser-water piping.


A. Product Data: For all products indicated: 1. Condenser-water piping.


A. Field quality-control reports.


A. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure and temperature unless otherwise indicated: 1. Condenser-Water Piping: 80 psig at 150 deg F.

2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel with plain ends; welded and seamless, Grade B, and wall thickness as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article.

B. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Classes 125 and 250 as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article.



C. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300 as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article.

D. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300 as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article.

E. Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Classes 25, 125, and 250; raised ground face, and bolt holes spot faced as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article.

F. Wrought Cast- and Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:

1. Material Group: 1.1. 2. End Connections: Butt welding. 3. Facings: Raised face.

G. Grooved-end Fittings are not allowed. Mechanical-Joint Fittings and Couplings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. Anvil International b. Grinnell Mechanical Products c. Victaulic

2. Joint Fittings: ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron; ASTM A 47/A 47M, Grade 32510 malleable iron; ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F, E, or S, Grade B fabricated steel; or ASTM A 106, Grade B steel fittings with grooves or shoulders constructed to accept grooved-end couplings; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings.

3. Couplings: Ductile- or malleable-iron housing and synthetic rubber gasket of central cavity pressure-responsive design; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings.

4. Gasket material for water service up to 200 deg F shall be EPDM rubber, grade E.

H. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of same materials and wall thicknesses as pipe in which they are installed.

2.3 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents.

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless otherwise indicated.

a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.

B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.



C. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

D. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled and working temperatures and pressures.


A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Dielectric Unions:


a. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company. b. Wilkins. c. Zurn Industries, LLC.

2. Description:

a. Standard: ASSE 1079. b. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Condenser-water piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be any of the following: 1. Schedule 80 steel pipe; Class 125, cast-iron fittings; cast-iron flanges and flange fittings;

and threaded joints.

B. Condenser-water piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, shall be any of the following: 1. Schedule 80 steel pipe.

C. Grooved Piping:

1. Grooved pipe connections may be used for services as specified within the building in accessible locations such as mechanical rooms. Mechanical chases and wall cavities are not considered accessible.

2. The use of mechanical grooved pipe connections will not relieve the Contractor from providing the vibration isolation as specified in Division 23 Section “Vibration Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment” and as indicated on drawings. Credit for the inherent flexibility of grooved pipe connections when used for expansion joints and flexible pipe connectors may be allowed upon specific application by the Contractor. Include proposed application and layout, and supporting calculations for the intended service.

3. Victaulic Flexible Couplings Style 77 installed per manufacturer’s recommendation may be used in lieu of metal hose flexible connectors.



3.2 PIPING INSTALLATIONS

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

F. Install piping at indicated slopes.

G. Install piping free of sags and bends.

H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

I. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

K. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves.

L. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage.

M. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow.

N. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.

O. Install branch connections to mains using mechanically formed tee fittings in main pipe, with the branch connected to the bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed risers, connect the branch to the top of the main pipe.

P. Install valves according to Section 230523 “General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping.

Q. Install unions in piping, NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

R. Install flanges in piping, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, at final connections of equipment and elsewhere as indicated.

S. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.



T. Comply with requirements in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for identifying piping.

U. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."

V. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."

3.3 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.

B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric unions.

C. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flange kits.

D. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 5 and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits.

3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for hanger, support, and anchor devices. Comply with the following requirements for maximum spacing of supports.

B. Install the following pipe attachments:

1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet long. 2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 20 feet or

longer. 3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer,

supported on a trapeze. 4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.

C. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 7 feet. 2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 7 feet. 3. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet. 4. NPS 2: Maximum span, 10 feet. 5. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 11 feet. 6. NPS 3 and Larger: Maximum span, 12 feet.

D. Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/4Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.



4. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 5. NPS 2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 6. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 7. NPS 3 and Larger: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

E. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 10-foot intervals between floors.

3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

C. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

D. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8/A5.8M.

E. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

3.6 CHEMICAL TREATMENT

A. Perform an analysis of makeup water to determine type and quantities of chemical treatment needed to keep system free of scale, corrosion, and fouling, and to sustain acceptable water characteristics for hydronic system equipment, components and ancillary devices.

B. Fill system with fresh water and add liquid alkaline compound with emulsifying agents and detergents to remove grease and petroleum products from piping. Circulate solution for a minimum of 24 hours, drain, clean strainer screens, and refill with fresh water.

C. Add initial chemical treatment and maintain water quality in ranges noted above for the first year of operation.

D. Chemical treatment to be done by OCCC approved contractor.




A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:

1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test. 2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test

pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing. 3. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace

strainer screens. 4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be

capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment.

5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test.

B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping:

1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be used.

2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release air. Use drains installed at low points for complete draining of test liquid.

3. Isolate expansion tanks and determine that hydronic system is full of water. 4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the

system's working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times the "SE" value in Appendix A in ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping."

5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.

6. Prepare written report of testing.

C. Perform the following before operating the system:

1. Open manual valves fully. 2. Inspect pumps for proper rotation. 3. Set makeup pressure-reducing valves for required system pressure. 4. Inspect air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating

freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type). 5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow. 6. Inspect and set operating temperatures of hydronic equipment, such as boilers, chillers,

cooling towers, to specified values. 7. Verify lubrication of motors and bearings.



232116 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES For Construction December 14, 2017 Page 1 of 4

SECTION 232116 - HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes special-duty valves and specialties for the following: 1. Condenser-water piping.


A. Product Data: For each type of the following:

1. Valves: Include flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for calibrated-orifice balancing valves and automatic flow-control valves.

2. Air-control devices. 3. Hydronic specialties.


A. Operation and maintenance data.


A. ASME Compliance: Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure and temperature unless otherwise indicated: 1. Condenser-Water Piping: 80 psig at 150 deg F.



2.2 VALVES

A. Globe, Check, Ball, and Butterfly Valves: Comply with requirements specified in Section 230523 “General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping."

B. Bronze, Calibrated-Orifice, Balancing Valves:


a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. b. Bell & Gossett; a Xylem brand. c. Flow Design, Inc. d. Griswold Controls.

2. Body: Bronze, ball or plug type with calibrated orifice or venturi. 3. Ball: Brass or stainless steel. 4. Plug: Resin. 5. Seat: PTFE. 6. End Connections: Threaded or socket. 7. Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter. 8. Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position. 9. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig. 10. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.

C. Diaphragm-Operated, Pressure-Reducing Valves: ASME labeled.


a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. b. Bell & Gossett; a Xylem brand. c. Conbraco Industries, Inc. d. Spence Engineering Company, Inc. e. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.

2. Body: Bronze or brass. 3. Disc: Glass and carbon-filled PTFE. 4. Seat: Brass. 5. Stem Seals: EPDM O-rings. 6. Diaphragm: EPT. 7. Low inlet-pressure check valve. 8. Inlet Strainer: , removable without system shutdown. 9. Valve Seat and Stem: Noncorrosive. 10. Valve Size, Capacity, and Operating Pressure: Selected to suit system in which installed,

with operating pressure and capacity factory set and field adjustable.

D. Diaphragm-Operated Safety Valves:




a. Amtrol, Inc. b. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries. c. Conbraco Industries, Inc. d. Spence Engineering Company, Inc. e. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Body: Bronze or brass. 3. Disc: Glass and carbon-filled PTFE. 4. Seat: Brass. 5. Stem Seals: EPDM O-rings. 6. Diaphragm: EPT. 7. Wetted, Internal Work Parts: Brass and rubber. 8. Inlet Strainer: Removable without system shutdown. 9. Valve Seat and Stem: Noncorrosive. 10. Valve Size, Capacity, and Operating Pressure: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code: Section IV, and selected to suit system in which installed, with operating pressure and capacity factory set and field adjustable.

E. Automatic Flow-Control Valves:


a. Flow Design Inc. b. Griswold Controls. c. Nexus Valve.

2. Body: Brass or ferrous metal. 3. Piston and Spring Assembly: Stainless steel tamper-proof, self cleaning, and removable. 4. Combination Assemblies: Include bonze or brass-alloy ball valve. 5. Identification Tag: Marked with zone identification, valve number, and flow rate. 6. Size: Same as pipe in which installed. 7. Performance: Maintain constant flow, plus or minus 5 percent over system pressure

fluctuations. 8. Minimum CWP Rating: 175 psig 9. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.

2.3 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Y-Pattern Strainers:

1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection. 2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2

and larger. 3. Strainer Screen: Stainless-steel, 40-mesh strainer, or perforated stainless-steel basket. 4. CWP Rating: 125 psig .

B. Stainless-Steel Bellow, Flexible Connectors:

1. Body: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing protective jacket.



2. End Connections: Threaded or flanged to match equipment connected. 3. Performance: Capable of 3/4-inch misalignment. 4. CWP Rating: 150 psig . 5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F .

C. Spherical, Rubber, Flexible Connectors:

1. Body: Fiber-reinforced rubber body. 2. End Connections: Steel flanges drilled to align with Classes 150 and 300 steel flanges. 3. Performance: Capable of misalignment. 4. CWP Rating: 150 psig. 5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Install shutoff-duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains and at supply connection to each piece of equipment.

B. Install throttling-duty valves at each branch connection to return main.

C. Install calibrated-orifice, balancing valves in the return pipe of each heating or cooling terminal.

D. Install check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow direction.



232123 HYDRONIC PUMPS For Construction December 14, 2017 Page 1 of 5

SECTION 232123 - HYDRONIC PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Horizontal, split case pump.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Buna-N: Nitrile rubber.

B. EPT: Ethylene propylene terpolymer.

C. HI: Hydraulic Institute


A. Product Data: For each type of pump. Include certified performance curves and rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, final impeller dimensions, and accessories for each type of product indicated. Indicate pump's operating point on curves.

B. Shop Drawings: For each pump.

1. Show pump layout and connections. 2. Include setting drawings with templates for installing foundation and anchor bolts and

other anchorages. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pumps to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.



1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Mechanical Seals: One mechanical seal(s) for each pump.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Pump motor shall be 1750 rpm maximum and sized for non-overloading service anywhere on the pump curve.

B. Pumps shall have stainless steel shafts and sleeves, bronze wear rings, and cast iron bases. Bases shall be designed for grouting in place.

C. Mechanical seals shall be John Crane Type XP662D1, with Viton bellows, tungsten carbide and carbon seal faces.

D. In special applications where packed pumps are used, packing shall be Chesterton 328 braided teflon, Crane, Durametallic or equal.

E. Pumps shall have Woods Dura-Flex or Rexnord Omega eslastomeric couplings.

F. Pumps, in general, shall have a grease lubricated, heavy duty, deep groove ball bearings with a certified rating design of 200,000 hours of average bearing life. Acceptable manufactures are S.K.F, Fafnir, and New Departure.

2.2 HORIZONTAL SPLIT CASE PUMP


1. Goulds. 2. Aurora Pump; Pentair Ltd. 3. Bell and Gossett. 4. Peerless 5. TACO Incorporated

B. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, centrifugal, impeller-between-bearings, separately coupled, double-suction pump as defined in HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3; designed for base mounting, with pump and motor shafts horizontal.

C. Pump Construction:

1. Casing: Horizontally split, cast iron, with replaceable bronze wear rings, threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet, drain plug at bottom and air vent at top of volute, and



ASME B16.1, Class 125 flanges. Casing supports shall allow removal and replacement of impeller without disconnecting piping.

2. Impeller: Cast stainless steel; statically and dynamically balanced, and keyed to shaft. For pumps not frequency-drive controlled, trim impeller to match specified performance.

3. Pump Shaft: Stainless steel. 4. Seal: Mechanical seal consisting of carbon rotating ring against a ceramic seat held by a

stainless-steel spring, and bellows and gasket. 5. Seal: Packing seal consisting of stuffing box with a minimum of four rings of graphite-

impregnated braided yarn with bronze lantern ring between center two graphite rings, and bronze packing gland.

6. Pump Bearings: Grease-lubricated ball bearings in cast-iron housing with grease fittings.

D. Shaft Coupling: Molded-rubber insert and interlocking spider capable of absorbing vibration. Couplings shall be drop-out type to allow disassembly and removal without removing pump shaft or motor.

E. Coupling Guard: Dual rated; ANSI B15.1, Section 8; OSHA 1910.219 approved; steel; removable; attached to mounting frame.

F. Mounting Frame: Welded-steel frame and cross members, factory fabricated from ASTM A 36/A 36M channels and angles. Fabricate to mount pump casing, coupling guard, and motor.

G. Motor: Single speed, secured to mounting frame, with adjustable alignment.

1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

2.3 PUMP SPECIALTY FITTINGS

A. Suction Diffuser:

1. Angle pattern. 2. 175-psig pressure rating, cast-iron body and end cap, pump-inlet fitting. 3. Bronze startup and bronze or stainless-steel permanent strainers. 4. Bronze or stainless-steel straightening vanes. 5. Drain plug. 6. Factory-fabricated support.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine equipment foundations and anchor-bolt locations for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before pump installation.

C. Examine foundations and inertia bases for suitable conditions where pumps are to be installed.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PUMP INSTALLATION

A. Comply with HI 1.4.

B. Install pumps to provide access for periodic maintenance including removing motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories.

C. Independently support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps and weight of pumps is not supported by piping.

D. Equipment Mounting:

1. Install base-mounted pumps on cast-in-place concrete equipment bases. Comply with requirements for equipment bases and foundations per Structural specifications.

2. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Section 230548 "Vibration Controls for HVAC."

3.3 ALIGNMENT

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform alignment service.

B. Comply with requirements in Hydronics Institute standards for alignment of pump and motor shaft. Add shims to the motor feet and bolt motor to base frame. Do not use grout between motor feet and base frame.

C. Comply with pump and coupling manufacturers' written instructions.

D. After alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly. Completely fill baseplate with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout while metal blocks and shims or wedges are in place. After grout has cured, fully tighten foundation bolts.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Where installing piping adjacent to pump, allow space for service and maintenance.



B. Connect piping to pumps. Install valves that are same size as piping connected to pumps.

C. Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles.

D. See plans for piping and valve requirements. Triple duty valves are not acceptable.

E. Install flexible connectors on suction and discharge sides of base-mounted pumps between pump casing and valves.

F. Ground equipment according to Electrical specifications.

G. Connect wiring according to Electrical specifications.

3.5 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Check piping connections for tightness. 3. Clean strainers on suction piping. 4. Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting:

a. Verify bearing lubrication. b. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot liquid is

free to rotate with pump hot and cold. If pump is bound or drags, do not operate until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.

c. Verify that pump is rotating in the correct direction.

5. Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump for operation.

6. Start motor. 7. Open discharge valve slowly.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain hydronic pumps.



236500 COOLING TOWERS For Construction December 14, 2017 Page 1 of 6

SECTION 236500 – COOLING TOWERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Cooling Towers: 1. Type: Open-circuit, forced-draft counterflow cooling towers.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A.

B. Section 232113 – Hydronic Piping.

C. Section 232116 – Hydronic Piping Specialties.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International (ASTM): ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

B. Cooling Technology Institute (CTI): CTI STD-201 - Certification Standard for Commercial Water-cooling Towers' Thermal Performance.

C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).

D. United Laboratories (UL).

E. National Electric Code (NEC).

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions as required by OCCC.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for each model indicated, including, provide rated capacities at design conditions, physical dimensions, required clearances, weights, sizes, locations of field connections, electrical requirements, and accessories. 1. Component sizes and rough-in requirements. 2. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 4. Installation methods. 5. Operation and maintenance data. 6. Lift rigging recommendations.

C. Reports: Startup service reports.

D. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's shop drawings, including elevations, sections, and details, indicating dimensions, materials, and fabrication of doors, frames, sidelites, operator, motion/presence sensor control device, anchors, hardware, finish, options, and accessories. 1. Wiring Diagrams: Showing internal tower wiring and required field



connections by others.

E. Job Specific Submittals: kW/Ton design conditions and part load conditions. 1. Standard Display:

a. Tower Performance Analysis: Showing hot water flow in gallons per minute.

b. Tower Inlet and Outlet Temperatures: In degrees Fahrenheit. c. Wet Bulb Temperatures: In degrees Fahrenheit. d. Required Motor Power: in HP.

2. Drawings showing plan and elevation views with critical dimensions, tower weight (dry and operating), design operating conditions, and motor data.

3. Dimensioned fabrication drawings of tower support structure accompanied by manufacturers engineering load calculations confirming design.

4. Wiring diagrams showing internal tower wiring and required field connections by others.

5. Drawing of tower "lift rigging" recommendations showing proper sizing of spreader bar, locations of pre-installed lifting brackets, and final leveling instructions.

6. Wiring diagrams and installation drawings shall also be provided for optional equipment (motor control panel, variable-speed drive, basin heaters, ultrasonic level control) when applicable.

7. Copy of manufacturers' written warranty regarding materials and labor, along with the conditions under which warranty is subject.


A. Electrical components, devices and accessories: UL-listed components and labeled per UL and NEC requirements.

B. Cooling Technology Institute (CTI) Certification: Cooling tower thermal performance at design conditions according to CTI STD-201 - Certification Standard for Commercial Water-cooling Towers' Thermal Performance.

C. ASHRAE: 90.1 Compliant.


A. Deliver, store and handle materials and products in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and industry standards. Store materials within absolute limits for temperature and humidity recommended by manufacturer. Protect from damage. 1. Upon arrival of cooling tower modules (prior to any lifting operation), the

tower modules shall be inspected on the flatbed trailer by owner's representative for general acceptance. Any items of concern related to damage or lifting operations shall be documented and reported (in writing) to the manufacturer's representative or the manufacturer. The owner's representative or his crane operator shall inspect corner lifting brackets and their attachment bolting to the tower.

B. Cooling tower module shall arrive as single, fully assembled and wired component, on a flatbed trailer. The substructure legs, sump, and sump hardware shall be shipped on a separate pallet on the same trailer. When supplied, motor control panel and/or



basin heater control panel shall also ship on separate pallet on same trailer. 1. Store products in manufacturer's labeled packaging until ready for installation.

C. Should tower need to be temporarily placed on the ground prior to its final positioning, the tower shall be stored on sound and level surface in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Prior to lifting tower, excess water should be removed from basin.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Provide cooling tower manufacturer's standard material and labor warranty, in accordance with conditions specified within written warranty. Towers not covered by a warranty of this scope will not be accepted. 1. External Shell: Fifteen years from date of shipment from factory. Excludes

normal wear and tear and cosmetic and superficial damage. 2. Internal Components and Fans: Five years from date of shipment from factory. 3. Fill Media and Drift Eliminators: Five years from date of shipment from

factory. 4. Cold Water Basin and Tower Casing: Fifteen years from date of shipment from

factory. 5. Motors, Sump, Water Collection Devices, Fans: Five years from date of

shipment from factory. 6. Labor: One year from date of shipment from factory.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Refer to schedule.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Do not proceed with installation until substrates have been properly prepared and deviations from manufacturer's recommended tolerances are corrected. Commencement of installation constitutes acceptance of conditions.

B. Prepare substrates using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. Verify substrate and framing is acceptable for product installation.

C. If preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect in writing of deviations from manufacturer's recommended installation tolerances and conditions.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

E. Before cooling tower installation, examine roughing-in for tower support,



anchor-bolt sizes and locations, piping, and electrical connections to verify actual locations, sizes, and other conditions affecting tower performance, maintenance, and operation. 1. Cooling tower locations indicated on Drawings are approximate. Determine exact locations before roughing-in for piping and electrical connections.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install cooling towers on support structure indicated.

B. Equipment Mounting: Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Section 230548 “Vibration Controls for HVAC”.

C. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

D. Maintain manufacturer’s recommended clearances for service and maintenance.

E. Loose Components: Install electrical components, devices, and accessories that are not factory mounted.

F. Install cooling towers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Install in accordance with project engineering drawings and manufacturer's

installation, operation, and maintenance manuals. 2. Provide required supports, attachments devices, and accessories needed to

insure quiet operation. 3. Provide representative of manufacturer for installation supervision and start up. 4. Owner training shall be provided by manufacturer's representative.

3.3 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain cooling towers and controls including: 1. Starting and stopping of fan motors. 2. Sequence of operation. 3. Troubleshooting and servicing. 4. Routine maintenance. 5. Schedule training with owner, through Engineer or Construction Manager.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to cooling towers to allow service and maintenance.

C. Install flexible pipe connectors at pipe connections of cooling towers mounted on vibration isolators.

D. Provide drain piping with valve at cooling tower drain connections and at low points in piping. Refer to drawings for drain piping locations.



E. Connect cooling tower overflows and drains, and piping drains to sanitary sewage system.

F. Domestic Water Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in specifications. Connect to water-level control with shutoff valve and union, flange, or mechanical coupling at each connection. Provide for freeze protection via self-regulated heat trace and insulation in areas subject to freeze.

G. Supply and Return Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 232113 “Hydronic Piping” and Section 232116 “Hydronic Piping Specialties”. Connect to entering cooling tower connections with shutoff valve, thermometer, plugged tee with pressure gage, and drain connection with valve. Connect to leaving cooling tower connection with shutoff valve. Make connections to cooling tower with an union.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Manufacturer’s Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform field tests and inspections.

C. Tests and Inspections: Comply with CTI ATC 105, “Acceptance Test Code for Water Cooling Towers”.

D. Cooling towers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.6 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

B. Inspect field-assembled components, equipment installation, and piping and electrical connections for proper assemblies, installations, and connections.

C. Obtain performance data from manufacturer. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer’s written

instructions and perform the following: a. Clean entire unit including basins. b. Verify that accessories are properly installed. c. Verify clearances for airflow and for cooling tower servicing. d. Check for vibration isolation and structural support. e. Lubricate bearings. f. Verify fan rotation for correct direction and for vibration or binding and

correct problems. g. Adjust belts to proper alignment and tension. h. Adjust variable-speed fans through entire operating range and check for

harmonic vibration imbalance. Set motor controller to skip speeds resulting in abnormal vibration.

i. Check vibration switch setting. Verify operation. j. Verify water level in tower basin. Fill to proper startup level. Check

makeup water-level control and valve.



k. Verify operation of basin heater and control. l. Verify that cooling tower air discharge is not recirculating air into tower

or HVAC air intakes. Recommend corrective action. m. Replace defective and malfunctioning units.

D. Start cooling tower and associated water pumps. Follow manufacturer’s written starting procedures.

E. Prepare a written startup report that records the results of tests and inspections.

3.7 ADJUSTING

A. Set and balance water flow to each tower inlet.

B. Adjust water-level control for proper operating level.

3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Protect installed products from damage by subsequent construction activities.

C. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 236500

ISSUE/ REVISIONS

PROJECT INFORMATION

A:

COOLING TOWERREPLACEMENT

FOR:

OKLAHOMA CITYCOMMUNITY

COLLEGE

DRAWN BY CHECKED BY

PROJECT NO.

PROJECT ADDRESS:

DATE

OCCC130001001

12/14/2017

7777 S. MAY AVE.

OKLAHOMA CITY, OK 73159

MA

IN B

UIL

DIN

G C

OO

LIN

G T

OW

ER

RE

PL

AC

EM

EN

TO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

CO

MM

UN

ITY

CO

LL

EG

EO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

, OK

PL

OT

TE

D B

Y: R

ach

el S

pitle

r D

AT

E: 1

2/1

4/2

01

7 9

:4

8:0

7 A

M D

WG

N

AM

E: V

:\O

CC

C\C

oo

lin

g T

ow

er R

ep

la

ce

me

nt\D

ra

win

gs\G

00

1.d

wg

LA

ST

S

AV

ED

B

Y: R

sp

itle

r D

AT

E: 1

2/1

3/2

01

7 1

1:1

3:1

6 A

M

810 S. CINCINNATI, 2ND FLOOR TULSA, OK 74119

918.877.6000 918.877.4000 FAX

CYNTERGYARCHITECTURE - ENGINEERING - CONSTRUCTION

11/14/201795% REVIEW SET

12/14/2017 FOR CONSTRUCTION

OKLAHOMA CITYCOMMUNITY COLLEGE

Main Building Cooling Tower Replacement

Oklahoma City, Oklahoma

FOR CONSTRUCTION SET

12/14/2017

G001

COVER SHEET

ISSUE/ REVISIONS

JEFFERY DON FERGUSON, P.E.

ENGINEER OF RECORD

PROJECT INFORMATION

A:


FOR:


COLLEGE

DRAWN BY CHECKED BY

PROJECT NO.

PROJECT ADDRESS:

DATE

MJR JDF

OCCC130001001

12/14/2017

7777 S. MAY AVE.


MA

IN B

UIL

DIN

G C

OO

LIN

G T

OW

ER

RE

PL

AC

EM

EN

TO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

CO

MM

UN

ITY

CO

LL

EG

EO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

, OK

PL

OT

TE

D B

Y: R

ach

el S

pitle

r D

AT

E: 1

2/1

4/2

01

7 9

:4

7:5

0 A

M D

WG

N

AM

E: V

:\O

CC

C\C

oo

lin

g T

ow

er R

ep

la

ce

me

nt\D

ra

win

gs\G

00

2.d

wg

LA

ST

S

AV

ED

B

Y: M

ru

tko

wski D

AT

E: 1

2/1

4/2

01

7 8

:1

4:4

1 A

M


918.877.6000 918.877.4000 FAX


11/14/201795% REVIEW SET

CYNTERGY ENGINEERING, PLLC

CA # 3537

EXPIRES 6/30/2018

L

I

C

EN

S

E

D

P

R

O

F

E

SS

IO

N

A

L

E

N

G

IN

E

E

R

O

K

L

AH

O

M

A

JEFFERYDON

FERGUSON19755


N

G002

INDEX / CODE

INFORMATION SHEET

CAMPUS LOCATIONPROJECT LOCATION

ISSUE/ REVISIONS

LARRY L. VORBA, P.E.

ENGINEER OF RECORD

PROJECT INFORMATION

A:


FOR:


COLLEGE

DRAWN BY CHECKED BY

PROJECT NO.

PROJECT ADDRESS:

DATE

DAL LLV

OCCC130001001

12/14/2017

7777 S. MAY AVE.


MA

IN B

UIL

DIN

G C

OO

LIN

G T

OW

ER

RE

PL

AC

EM

EN

TO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

CO

MM

UN

ITY

CO

LL

EG

EO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

, OK

PL

OT

TE

D B

Y: K

atie

W

ilcze

k D

AT

E: 1

2/1

3/2

01

7 3

:3

6:5

8 P

M D

WG

N

AM

E: V

:\O

CC

C\C

oo

lin

g T

ow

er R

ep

la

ce

me

nt\D

ra

win

gs\S

00

1.d

wg

LA

ST

S

AV

ED

B

Y: K

wilcze

k D

AT

E: 1

2/1

3/2

01

7 3

:2

1:4

0 P

M


918.877.6000 918.877.4000 FAX


11/14/201795% REVIEW SET

LARRY LEEVORBA11654

L

I

C

EN

S

E

D

P

R

O

F

E

SS

IO

N

A

L

E

N

G

IN

E

E

R

O

K

L

AH

O

M

A


CA # 3537

EXPIRES 6/30/2018


S001

NOTES

GENERAL STRUCTURAL

STEEL INSPECTIONS REQUIRED

HOOK

d O

R

1"C

LR

.

TYP. LAP SPLICE

d

90° BEND

STIRRUP OR TIE

d

12d

6d OR

4" MIN.

R= 4d FOR #8 BARS OR SMALLER

R= 5d FOR #9, #10 AND #11 BARS

R= 6d FOR #14 AND #18 BARS

CONCRETE RE: SCHED

48d MASONRY

4d

2

1

2

" MIN.

EMBED

RE: SCHED

FACE

OF

CONC

SIZE TYP LAP OTHER LAP MIN. EMBEDMENT FOR

LENGTH(IN) LENGTH(IN)* STD. 90 DEG HOOK(IN)

#3 22 32 9

#4 29 43 11

#5 36 54 14

#6 43 64 17

#7 63 94 20

#8 72 107 22

* REFERS TO REINFORCING WITHOUT ADEQUATE COVER OR

PLACED CLOSER TOGETHER THAN 2 BAR DIAMETERS.

3000 PSI CONCRETE REINFORCING LAP SPLICE AND 90

DEGREE HOOK LENGTHS SCHEDULE:

R

R

R

=

2

d

2

S101

4

S101

HI

10

10.4

11

9

8

7.9

J H.6 H.1 H

REFERENCE POINT

3

S101

LO

18" DIA. X 4'-0" DEEP PIPE SUPPORT FOUNDATION. PROVIDE

(8) #5 VERT REINFORCING AND #3 TIES AT 10" O.C. PROVIDE

(3) #3 TIES IN TOP 5". PROVIDE 3" CLR TO REINF., TYP.

COORDINATE WITH MECHANICAL FOR LOCATION

AND PIPE SUPPORT, BY OTHERS

W12x2

6

W12x2

6

W12x26

W12x26

11'-9

3

4

" +/-

13'-4

" +

/-

5

S-101

5" STD PIPE

(TYP OF 4)

EDGE OF

UNIT)

1

1 4

"

5" STD PIPE

(TYP OF 4)

5" STD PIPE

(TYP OF 4)

COORDINATE

DIMS WITH

TOWER MFR.

5" STD PIPE

(TYP OF 4)

W1

2x2

6

W1

2x2

6

6

S-101

W1

2x2

6

W12x26

W12x26

W12x26

1'-9

1 2

" +

/-

(F

.V

.)

4'-0

" (F

.V

.)

4'-0

" (F

.V

.)

2'-0

" +

/-

(F

.V

.)

5

1

4

" (F.V.)

6'-10" (F.V.)

9

S-101

W12x26

W12x26

EXISTING PIPE COL.

(TYP 12 PLCS)

W12x26

W12x26

W12x26

5'-10" (F.V.)

5

1

4

" (F.V.)

EDGE OF UNIT

PROVIDE 3/8"

STIFFENER PLATE

ON FAR SIDE OF

W12X65, TYP.

7

S-101

3'-7

1 2

" (F

.V

.)

7'-7

1

2

" (F.V.)

EXISTING

WALL

RE: PLAN

W12 FRAMING, RE:

PLAN

3/8" SHEAR PL

WITH (3) 3/4" DIA.

THRU BOLTS

FULL PEN TOP AND

BOTTOM WITH

BACKING BARS

3 1/2"

ALL STEEL SHALL

BE HOT-DIP GALV.

FIELD WELDS SHALL

BE TOUCHED UP WITH

ZINC RICH PAINT.

5" STD PIPE COL.

EDGE OF

UNIT

ALL STEEL SHALL

BE HOT-DIP GALV.

FIELD WELDS SHALL

BE TOUCHED UP WITH

ZINC RICH PAINT.

4"x9"x3/8" PL

WITH (3) 3/4" DIA.

A325 THRU-BOLTS

1/4" CAP PL

TYP.

3/16"

3/16"

TYP.

3"

3"

1 1

/2

"

2"

18" DIA PIER WITH 9 #6

VERT AND #3 TIES AT 12"

O.C. PROVIDE 3 TIES IN

TOP 5" EXTEND VERTICALS

INTO PIER CAP AND

OFFSET TO CLEAR BOLTS.

RE:S001 PIER NOTES

3'-6

"

3"

TYP

2'-0"x2'-0"x3'-6" PIER CAP

WITH (4) #5 U-BARS TOP

AND BOT. EA DIRECTION

1

1

2

" NON-SHRINK

GROUT

1

1

4

"x12"x12"

BASE PLATE

(4)

3

4

" DIA F1554 GR

36 ANCHOR BOLTS

AT 9" GAGE

4"P

RO

J F

OR

3

4

" D

IA

B

OL

T

6" P

RO

J F

OR

1" D

IA

B

OL

T

36

"

MIN

2"

TOP OF

FOOTING

FIN GRADE

T.O.S

5'-0" A.F.G.

ABOVE FINISHED ROOF

5'-0"

CLEAN EXISTING COLUMN TO

SOUND METAL. IF COLUMN

EXHIBITS MORE THAN 10%

SECTION LOSS, CONTACT EOR.

EDGE OF

UNIT

6"x6"x1/2" PL

ALL STEEL SHALL

BE HOT-DIP GALV.

FIELD WELDS SHALL

BE TOUCHED UP WITH

ZINC RICH PAINT.

4"x9"x3/8" PL

WITH (3) 3/4" DIA.

A325 THRU-BOLTS

1/4" CAP PL

3/16"

TYP.

3/16"

3/16"

2"

TYP.

1 1/2"

3"

3"

6"

UNO

EQUIPMENT BASE6"

UNO

4"

UN

O

3"

3

1 2

"

18"

1/2" CHAMFER (TYP)

ALL EXPOSED

EDGES OF

CONCRETE

#3 AT 24" MAX OC

EACH WAY AT MID

DEPTH OF PAD

#3 DOWELS AT EACH

CORNER. EMBED 3"

WITH HILTI HIT-HY

200 SAFE SET

ADHESIVE SYSTEM,

TYP.

INTERIOR EQUIPMENT PAD

FINISH FLOOR

RE: MECH FOR

LOCATION

3" STD PIPE COL.

EDGE OF

UNIT

ALL STEEL SHALL

BE HOT-DIP GALV.

FIELD WELDS SHALL

BE TOUCHED UP WITH

ZINC RICH PAINT.

4"x9"x3/8" PL

WITH (3) 3/4" DIA.

A325 THRU-BOLTS

5/8" x 8" x 1'-2" CAP PL

TYP.

3/16"

3/16"

TYP.

3"

3"

1 1

/2

"

2"

1

1

2

"1

1

2

"

2

1 4

"2

1 4

"

1

1 2

"

1

1 2

"

11'-9

3

4

" +/-

13

'-4

" +

/-

5

S-101

49

'-3

" +

/-

TO

R

EF

P

OIN

T

18'-1" +/-

TO REF POINT

18" DIA PIER, TYP

COORDINATE

WITH ANY

UTILITIES ETC IN

THE VICINITY

ISSUE/ REVISIONS


ENGINEER OF RECORD

PROJECT INFORMATION

A:


FOR:


COLLEGE

DRAWN BY CHECKED BY

PROJECT NO.

PROJECT ADDRESS:

DATE

DAL LLV

OCCC130001001

12/14/2017

7777 S. MAY AVE.


MA

IN B

UIL

DIN

G C

OO

LIN

G T

OW

ER

RE

PL

AC

EM

EN

TO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

CO

MM

UN

ITY

CO

LL

EG

EO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

, OK

PL

OT

TE

D B

Y: K

atie

W

ilcze

k D

AT

E: 1

2/1

3/2

01

7 3

:3

6:5

9 P

M D

WG

N

AM

E: V

:\O

CC

C\C

oo

lin

g T

ow

er R

ep

la

ce

me

nt\D

ra

win

gs\S

10

1.d

wg

LA

ST

S

AV

ED

B

Y: K

wilcze

k D

AT

E: 1

2/1

3/2

01

7 3

:3

6:4

7 P

M


918.877.6000 918.877.4000 FAX


11/14/201795% REVIEW SET

LARRY LEEVORBA11654

L

I

C

EN

S

E

D

P

R

O

F

E

SS

IO

N

A

L

E

N

G

IN

E

E

R

O

K

L

AH

O

M

A


CA # 3537

EXPIRES 6/30/2018


S101

FRAMING PLAN

COOLING TOWER

N

ISSUE/ REVISIONS


ENGINEER OF RECORD

PROJECT INFORMATION

A:


FOR:


COLLEGE

DRAWN BY CHECKED BY

PROJECT NO.

PROJECT ADDRESS:

DATE

MJR JDF

OCCC130001001

12/14/2017

7777 S. MAY AVE.


MA

IN B

UIL

DIN

G C

OO

LIN

G T

OW

ER

RE

PL

AC

EM

EN

TO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

CO

MM

UN

ITY

CO

LL

EG

EO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

, OK

PL

OT

TE

D B

Y: R

ach

el S

pitle

r D

AT

E: 1

2/1

4/2

01

7 9

:4

7:2

4 A

M D

WG

N

AM

E: V

:\O

CC

C\C

oo

lin

g T

ow

er R

ep

la

ce

me

nt\D

ra

win

gs\M

00

1.d

wg

LA

ST

S

AV

ED

B

Y: R

sp

itle

r D

AT

E: 1

2/1

3/2

01

7 3

:5

7:3

1 P

M


918.877.6000 918.877.4000 FAX


11/14/201795% REVIEW SET


CA # 3537

EXPIRES 6/30/2018

L

I

C

EN

S

E

D

P

R

O

F

E

SS

IO

N

A

L

E

N

G

IN

E

E

R

O

K

L

AH

O

M

A

JEFFERYDON

FERGUSON19755


M001

ABBREVIATIONS

NOTES, AND

MECHANICAL SYMBOLS,

DUCT SECTION, EXHAUST

DUCTWORK TOE-HEEL TAP

(SQUARE TO SQUARE)

RETURN GRILLE

EXHAUST GRILLE

DUCTWORK CONICAL TAP

(SQUARE TO ROUND)

5'-0" MAX LENGTH FOR FLEX DUCT

RIGID ELBOW, FLEXIBLE

ELBOWS NOT ALLOWED

RIGID SUPPLY DUCTWORK

90° RECTANGULAR ELBOW WITH SINGLE

THICKNESS TURNING VANES

90° ROUND ELBOW,

RADIUS/DIAMETER=1.5

45° RECTANGULAR BEND,

RADIUS/DIAMETER=1.5

45° ROUND BEND,

RADIUS/DIAMETER=1.5


(ROUND-TO-ROUND)

F=FALL IN DUCT ELEV R=RISE IN DUCT ELEV

NOTE: AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES ARE

ARE DENOTED AS ILLUSTRATED BELOW:

90° RECTANGULAR ELBOW DOWN WITH

SINGLE THICKNESS TURNING VANES

90° RECTANGULAR ELBOW UP WITH SINGLE


LINEAR DIFFUSER, NO ARROWS

INDICATE 2-WAY AIR PATTERN

SIDEWALL SUPPLY REGISTER OR GRILLE

CEILING DIFFUSER SQUARE

PATTERN. NO ARROWS INDICATE

4-WAY AIR PATTERN

DUCT SECTION, RETURN

MVD

SUPPLY DIFFUSER

MAIN DUCTWORK

DIFFUSER

NOTE: SINGLE LINE DUCT TAP SYMBOLS ARE DENOTED

AS ILLUSTRATED BELOW:

RECTANGULAR TO RECTANGULAR

ROUND TO ROUND

RECTANGULAR TO ROUND

DUCT SIZE TRANSITION

CEILING DIFFUSER ROUND PATTERN.

NO ARROWS INDICATE 4-WAY AIR

PATTERN

DUCT SECTION, SUPPLY

90° ROUND ELBOW DOWN

90° ROUND ELBOW UP

SUPPLY DIFFUSER WITH FACTORY INSTALLED

QUADRANT BLANKS. PROVIDE BLANKS AS

SHOWN ON DRAWINGS.

FIRE/SMOKE DAMPER

DEFINITION OF LINEWEIGHTS AND LINETYPES:

OUTLINE OF NEW EQUIPMENT INSTALLED

ABOVE THE FLOOR SHOWN (I.E., ROOF)

XXX-X

EQUIPMENT TAG

EQUIPMENT NUMBER

BFW

CHWS

CHWR

BA

CA

CD

CP

LPC

MPC

HPC

CWS

CWR

HWS

HWR

S

MPS

HPS

RG

RL

RS REFRIGERANT SUCTION

REFRIGERANT LIQUID

REFRIGERANT GAS

STEAM, HIGH PRESS 125 PSI & ABOVE

STEAM, MED PRESS 16-124 PSI

STEAM, LOW PRESS 0-15 PSI

HEATING WATER RETURN

HEATING WATER SUPPLY

CONDENSER WATER RETURN

CONDENSER WATER SUPPLY

CONDENSATE, HIGH PRESS 125 PSI & ABOVE

CONDENSATE, MED PRESS 16-124 PSI

CONDENSATE, LOW PRESS 0-15 PSI

CONDENSATE, PUMPED

CONDENSATE, DRAIN

COMPRESSED AIR

COMPRESSED AIR, BREATHING AIR

CHILLED WATER RETURN

CHILLED WATER SUPPLY

BOILER FEED WATER

PIPE LABEL DESCRIPTION

SYMBOL DESCRIPTIONSYMBOL DESCRIPTION

AUTOMATIC AIR VENT

BACKFLOW PREVENTER

BALL VALVE

BASKET STEAM TRAP

BLIND FLANGE

BUTTERFLY VALVE

CAP

CHECK VALVE

CHECK VALVE, SILENT

CIRCUIT SETTER

COMPRESSED AIR CONNECTION

CONTROL VALVE, 2-WAY


FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR

GATE VALVE

GATE VALVE, ANGLE

GENERAL VALVE, SEE SPECS

GLOBE VALVE

GLOBE VALVE, ANGLE

PLUG VALVE

PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE RELIEF

PRESSURE REDUCING STATION, STEAM

PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE

RELIEF VALVE, ASME

SOLENOID VALVE

STRAINER

SUCTION DIFFUSER

THERMOSTAT, HUMIDISTAT

TRIPLE DUTY VALVE

UNION

VENTURI

RISER DOWN (ELBOW)

RISER UP (ELBOW)

RISE OR DROP

TEE DOWN

TEE UP

TOP CONNECTION

BOTTOM CONNECTION

SIDE CONNECTION

FLOW IN DIRECTION OF ARROW

PIPE SLOPE IN DIRECTION OF ARROW

TIE-IN TO EXISTING AT THIS POINT

REMOVE EXISTING TO THIS POINT

PUMP

DEVICE TYPE, REFER TO SCHEDULE

CFM

NECK SIZE

XXxXX

XXX

NEW CONSTRUCTION

EXISTING TO REMAIN

DEMOLITION

PRS

PSD

T H

45° RECTANGULAR BEND

END CAP

F

AAV

TYPICAL RUNOUT

S

TEMPERATURE, HUMIDITY & CO2 SENSOR

FIRE DAMPER

SMOKE DAMPER

DAMPER SYMBOLS:

MOTORIZED DAMPER

MECHANICAL SYMBOLS LEGEND

DUCTWORK SPIN-IN TAP

(SQUARE TO ROUND)

R REFRIGERANT

DUCTWORK 45° LATERAL TAP

(ROUND-TO-ROUND)

DUCTWORK 90° TAP

(ROUND-TO-ROUND)

SMOKE DETECTOR

A

AC AIR COMPRESSOR

ACC AIR COOLED CHILLER

ACFM ACTUAL CUBIC FEET PER MINUTE

ADD ADDENDUM

ADJ ADJUSTABLE

AFF ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR

AHU AIR HANDLING UNIT

AFUE ANNUAL FUEL UTILIZATION EFFICIENCY

APD AIR PRESSURE DROP

AR AIR RECEIVER

AV ACID VENT

AVTR ACID VENT THRU THE ROOF

AW ACID WASTE

B

BA BREATHING AIR, COMPRESSED

BAC BREATHING AIR COMPRESSOR

BCU BLOWER COIL UNIT

BFPD BACK FLOW PREVENTION DEVICE

BFW BOILER FEED WATER

BTUH BRITISH THERMAL UNIT PER HOUR

C

CA COMPRESSED AIR

CC COOLING COIL

CD CONDENSATE DRAIN

CF CEILING FAN

CFM CUBIC FEET PER MINUTE

CH CHILLER (WATER COOLED)

CHWP CHILLED WATER PUMP

CHWS CHILLED WATER SUPPLY

CHWR CHILLED WATER RETURN

CL CENTER LINE

CO CLEANOUT

CONT CONTINUATION

CP PUMPED CONDENSATE

CT COOLING TOWER

CU CONDENSING UNIT

CWP CONDENSER WATER PUMP

CWS CONDENSER WATER SUPPLY

CWR CONDENSER WATER RETURN

D

DCW DOMESTIC COLD WATER

DF DRINKING FOUNTAIN

DHW DOMESTIC HOT WATER

DI DEIONIZED WATER

DN DOWN

DOAU DEDICATED OUTDOOR AIR UNIT

DP DEWPOINT

DS DISTILLED WATER

DWG DRAWING

DWV DRAIN WASTE AND VENT

E

E/A EXHAUST AIR

EAG EXHAUST AIR GRILLE

EAT ENTERING AIR TEMPERATURE

EDB ENTERING DRY BULB

EEW EMERGENCY EYE WASH

EF EXHAUST FAN

ENGR ENGINEER

EPO EMERGENCY POWER OFF

ESP EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE

EQUIP EQUIPMENT

EWB ENTERING WET BULB

EWC ELECTRIC WATER COOLER

EWH ELECTRIC WATER HEATER

EWT ENTERING WATER TEMPERATURE

EXT EXPANSION TANK

F

F FAHRENHEIT

FCO FLOOR CLEANOUT

FCU FAN COIL UNIT

FD FLOOR DRAIN

FH FUME HOOD

FLR FLOOR

FP FIRE PROTECTION

FPM FEET PER MINUTE

FPWH FREEZE PROOF WALL HYDRANT

FS FLOOR SINK

FT FOOT, FEET

G

G NATURAL GAS, LOW PRESSURE

GAL GALLON, GALLONS

GPH GALLONS PER HOUR

GPM GALLONS PER MINUTE

GCO GRADE CLEAN OUT

GW GREASE WASTE

GWH GAS WATER HEATER

H

HB HOSE BIBB

HD HEAD

HP HORSEPOWER

HPC HIGH PRESSURE CONDENSATE

HPG NATURAL GAS, HIGH PRESSURE

HPS HIGH PRESSURE STEAM

HWR HEATING WATER RETURN

HWS HEATING WATER SUPPLY

HEX HEAT EXCHANGER

I

IDU INDOOR UNIT

IH INTAKE HOOD

IN INCH, INCHES

INV INVERT

INWC INCHES OF WATER COLUMN

IW IRRIGATION WATER

K

KW KILOWATT

K THOUSAND

L

L LOUVER

LAT LEAVING AIR TEMPERATURE

LB POUND, POUNDS

LDB LEAVING DRY BULB

LPC LOW PRESSURE CONDENSATE

LPS LOW PRESSURE STEAM

LWB LEAVING WET BULB

LWT LEAVING WATER TEMPERATURE

M

M THOUSAND

MBH THOUSAND BTUH

MFG MANUFACTURER

MPG NATURAL GAS, MEDIUM PRESSURE

MIN MINIMUM

MISC MISCELLANEOUS

MPC MEDIUM PRESSURE CONDENSATE

MPS MEDIUM PRESSURE STEAM

MSB MOP SINK BASIN

MVD MANUAL VOLUME DAMPER

N

NC NORMALLY CLOSED

NIC NOT IN CONTRACT

NO NORMALLY OPEN or NUMBER

NOM NOMINAL

NTS NOT TO SCALE

O

O/A OUTSIDE AIR

ODU OUTDOOR UNIT

P

PH PHASE

PPRD PRIMARY ROOF DRAIN

PRV PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE

PSI POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH

PSIA POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH

ABSOLUTE

PSIG POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH GAGE

R

R REFRIGERANT

R/A RETURN AIR

RAD REFRIGERATED AIR DRYER

RAG RETURN AIR GRILLE

RD ROOF DRAIN

RE REFER TO

RG REFRIGERANT GAS

RH RELATIVE HUMIDITY

RL REFRIGERANT LIQUID

RL/A RELIEF AIR

RM ROOM

RPM REVOLUTIONS PER MINUTE

RPS REVOLUTIONS PER SECOND


RTU ROOFTOP UNIT

RV RELIEF VALVE

Ø ROUND, DIAMETER

S

S/A SUPPLY AIR

SAG SUPPLY AIR GRILLE

SCFM STANDARD CUBIC FEET PER MINUTE

SD STORM DRAIN

SF SUPPLY FAN

SP STATIC PRESSURE

SRD SECONDARY ROOF DRAIN

SS SANITARY SEWER or STAINLESS

STEEL

STM STEAM

SQIN SQUARE INCH/INCHES

SQFT SQUARE FOOT/FEET

T

T/A TRANSFER AIR

TAG TRANSFER AIR GRILLE

TDH TOTAL DYNAMIC HEAD

TEMP TEMPERATURE

THRU THROUGH

TMV THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE

TSP TOTAL STATIC PRESSURE

TSTAT THERMOSTAT

TYP TYPICAL

U

UH UNIT HEATER

UL UNDERWRITER'S LABORATORIES

UNO UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE

UR URINAL

V

V VENT or VOLT

VAC VACUUM

VFD VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE

VRF VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW

VTR VENT THRU THE ROOF

VTW VENT THRU THE WALL

W

W WATT

WAG WATER AND GAS

WB WET BULB or WASHER BOX

WC WATER CLOSET

WHA WATER HAMMER ARRESTOR

Y

YH YARD HYDRANT

MECHANICAL ABBREVIATIONS

1. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL VISIT THE SITE BEFORE BIDDING AND SHALL BECOME FULLY INFORMED AS

TO THE EXTENT AND CHARACTER OF THE WORK REQUIRED AND ITS RELATION TO OTHER WORK.

FAILURE TO VISIT SITE SHALL NOT CONSTITUTE A BASIS FOR FUTURE CLAIMS.

2. DEMOLISH EXISTING AS REQUIRED FOR NEW CONSTRUCTION AS NOTED ON DRAWINGS. AVOID

DISRUPTION OF SERVICES DURING NORMAL BUSINESS HOURS. ALL SYSTEM SHUT-DOWNS AND

DISRUPTION OF BUILDING SERVICES SHALL BE COORDINATED WITH OWNER AND SCHEDULED AFTER

NORMAL BUILDING HOURS OR AS OTHERWISE APPROVED BY OWNER.

3. PRIOR TO DEMOLITION FIELD VERIFY AND IDENTIFY ANY EXISTING EQUIPMENT TO REMAIN IN

SERVICE THAT IS SERVED BY SYSTEMS TO BE DEMOLISHED. NOTIFY ENGINEER OF ANY SUCH

CONDITIONS AND REMOVE AND/OR RELOCATE THE SERVICES AS DIRECTED.

4. FIELD VERIFY EXISTING SYSTEM PRESSURES AND TEMPERATURES PRIOR TO ANY SYSTEM TIE-INS.

ALL NEW MATERIALS SHALL MEET OR EXCEED PERFORMANCE OF MATERIALS USED ON EXISTING

SYSTEMS.

5. MEET WITH OWNER PRIOR TO DEMOLITION TO IDENTIFY WHETHER EXISTING MATERIALS SYSTEMS,

EQUIPMENT, ETC. ARE CONSIDERED SALVAGE OR DEBRIS. REMOVE DEBRIS FROM SITE AND

DISPOSE OF IN AN APPROVED MANNER. RETURN SALVAGE TO OWNER IN A LOCATION AND MANNER

AS DIRECTED BY OWNER.

6. TERMINATE DEMOLISHED SYSTEM SERVICES IN A CONCEALED LOCATION IN AN APPROVED MANNER.

COORDINATE WITH NEW AND EXISTING CONSTRUCTION.

7. FIELD VERIFY EXISTING PIPING LOCATIONS PRIOR TO WORK.

8. WHERE REQUIRED, COORDINATE EQUIPMENT ELECTRICAL TERMINATION REQUIREMENTS WITH

ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR.

9. THE CONTRACTOR TO FIELD VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS AND EXACT LOCATION OF ALL

EQUIPMENT, DUCTWORK, AND PIPING, INCLUDING SYSTEM TIE-INS. NOTIFY ENGINEER OF ANY

MODIFICATIONS REQUIRED FROM THE PLANS TO FACILITATE INSTALLATION PRIOR TO INSTALLATION.

10. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE AND SCHEDULE ALL CONSTRUCTION WITH BUILDING

OCCUPANTS LOCATED IN THE WORK AREA.

11. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE ALL PATCH AND REPAIR OF WALLS AND FLOORS WHEN

DISTURBED BY NEW CONSTRUCTION.

12. WHERE SYSTEM TIE-INS ARE MADE AND AT ALL LOCATIONS WHERE DAMAGE OCCURRED FROM NEW

CONSTRUCTION, PATCH AND REPAIR DAMAGED INSULATION WITH INSULATION TYPE AND

THICKNESS TO MATCH EXISTING.

13. TEST AND BALANCE EXISTING HVAC SYSTEMS AS REQUIRED TO ACCOMMODATE SYSTEM

MODIFICATIONS AND ADDITIONS. MAINTAIN ACCEPTABLE COMFORT LEVELS DURING TEST AND

BALANCE AS REQUIRED. ENSURE THE INTEGRITY OF THE EXISTING SYSTEM BALANCE.

14. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE WORK WITH EXISTING FIRE PROTECTION PIPING. ANY WORK

ASSOCIATED WITH MODIFYING THESE SYSTEMS SHALL BE PERFORMED BY A LICENSED AND

APPROVED CONTRACTOR. FIRE PROTECTION CONTRACTOR SHALL INFORM THE BUILDING SECURITY

OFFICE EVERY DAY WHEN A SHUTDOWN OF SPRINKLER SYSTEM IS REQUIRED FOR CONSTRUCTION.

THE CONTRACTOR SHALL RECONNECT AND FILL THE SPRINKLER SYSTEM INTO WORKING

CONDITION AT THE END OF EACH WORKING DAY TO ASSURE PROTECTION DURING UNOCCUPIED

PERIODS.

15. ALL CEILING TILE REMOVED FOR INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT AND PIPING SHALL BE REINSTALLED

AND REPLACED AS REQUIRED TO MATCH PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONDITION.

DEMOLITION AND RENOVATION NOTES

1. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE TO COMPLY WITH CURRENT APPLICABLE LOCAL, STATE AND

FEDERAL CODES AND ORDINANCES AND IS RESPONSIBLE TO COMPLY WITH ALL REGULATIONS OF

REGULATORY AGENCIES HAVING JURISDICTION. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ALSO CONFORM TO THE

REQUIREMENTS OF THE OWNER'S INSURANCE CARRIER. NOTIFY THE ENGINEER OF ANY CONFLICTS

PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. CODES, ORDINANCES AND REGULATIONS SHALL HAVE PRECEDENCE OVER

SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS WHERE THERE IS A CONFLICT.

2. PAY ALL LAWFUL FEES, PERMITS OR LICENSES REQUIRED TO ACCOMPLISH WORK. OBTAIN AND PAY

FOR ALL NECESSARY CERTIFICATES OF APPROVAL.

3. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE TO PROVIDE ALL LABOR, MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, SERVICE AND

ANYTHING REASONABLY INCIDENTAL TO COMPLETE ALL WORK INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS AND

AS SPECIFIED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE INTENT OF THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS.

4. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE TO VISIT AND EXAMINE THE JOB SITE AND BECOME FAMILIAR

WITH ALL EXISTING CONDITIONS PERTINENT TO THE WORK TO BE PERFORMED.

5. INCORPORATE ALL CODE AND ORDINANCE REQUIREMENTS INTO THE BID AND INSTALLATION OF

WORK. NO ADDITIONAL FUNDS WILL BE ALLOCATED FOR WORK REQUIRED TO CONFORM TO

REGULATIONS AND REQUIREMENT AND/OR TO OBTAIN APPROVAL OF WORK.

6. THE DRAWINGS ARE DIAGRAMMATIC AND ARE ONLY INTENDED TO DEFINE THE BASIC FUNCTIONS

REQUIRED. THE DRAWINGS SHALL BE FOLLOWED AS CLOSELY AS ACTUAL CONSTRUCTION

CONDITIONS AND COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES WILL ALLOW. MINOR DEVIATIONS FROM THE

DESIGN LAYOUT ARE ANTICIPATED AND ARE A PART OF THE WORK INCLUDED; HOWEVER, CHANGES

THAT ALTER THE CHARACTER OF THE WORK ARE NOT PERMITTED. APPROVAL OF ARCHITECT AND

ENGINEER SHALL BE OBTAINED BEFORE DEVIATIONS FROM THESE PLANS ARE MADE.

7. PLUMBING AND MECHANICAL SYSTEMS ARE NOT DIMENSIONED. DO NOT SCALE FROM DRAWING(S).

THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE WITH OTHER TRADES AND ENSURE THERE IS AVAILABLE

SPACE FOR INSTALLATION BEFORE ORDERING EQUIPMENT AND FABRICATING PIPING AND/OR

DUCTWORK.

8. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL STUDY THE STRUCTURAL, MECHANICAL, AND ELECTRICAL PLANS TO

INSURE ALL MECHANICAL SYSTEMS WILL FIT WITH SUFFICIENT CLEARANCES FOR INSTALLATION,

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE. NOTIFY THE ENGINEER OF ANY CONFLICTS PRIOR TO INSTALLATION.

9. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COMPLY WITH SPECIFICATIONS AND INDUSTRY STANDARDS FOR ALL

INSTALLATIONS.

10. ALL VALVES, FITTINGS AND PIPING SHALL BE SUITABLE FOR INTENDED SERVICE AND SYSTEM

TEMPERATURES AND PRESSURES.

11. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED, CONTRACTOR SHALL REFER TO MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR

MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS. REFER TO PLUMBING DRAWINGS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT.

12. SEAL ALL PENETRATIONS WATER TIGHT. SEAL AROUND ALL WALL PENETRATIONS. PROVIDE

ESCUTCHEONS ON ALL PIPING ON EXTERIOR AND EXPOSED LOCATIONS. CAULK WITH REQUIRED

THICKNESS 3M BRAND FIRE BARRIER CAULK CP-25 (OR OTHER APPROVED METHOD) TO MAINTAIN

FIRE RESISTANCE RATING OF FIRE RATED ASSEMBLIES.

13. ALL CUTTING AND PATCHING OF STRUCTURE SHALL BE APPROVED BY THE OWNER PRIOR TO

PERFORMING WORK. CONSULT THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER IF REQUIRED.

14. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE ALL ROUTING AND MOUNTING OF EQUIPMENT, DUCTWORK,

PIPING, ETC (ALL WORK) WITH ALL OTHER TRADES.

15. ROUTE PIPING ABOVE CEILING EQUIPMENT AS HIGH AS POSSIBLE ABOVE FINISHED CEILING TO

AVOID CONFLICT WITH LIGHTS.

16. INSTALL ALL PIPING PARALLEL AND PERPENDICULAR TO BUILDING WALLS AND PARTITIONS UNLESS

DISTINCTLY SHOWN OR NOTED OTHERWISE.

17. ROUTE PIPING LOCATED NEAR EACH OTHER PARALLEL IN ALL PLANES AND WITH SUFFICIENT

CLEARANCE.

18. ALL PIPING SHALL BE INSTALLED SO THAT IT MAY EXPAND AND CONTRACT FREELY WITHOUT

DAMAGES TO EQUIPMENT, OTHER WORK, OR INJURY TO PIPING SYSTEM, ALL NECESSARY SWING

JOINTS, EXPANSION JOINTS, OR OFFSETS TO PROTECT PIPING, ETC. SHALL BE INSTALLED WHETHER

INDICATED OR NOT.

19. PROPERLY SUPPORT ALL PIPING. PROVIDE ALL REQUIRED ANCHORS, GUIDES AND EXPANSION

DEVICES.

20. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL TAKE ALL NECESSARY PRECAUTIONS TO PROTECT ALL MATERIAL,

EQUIPMENT, APPARATUS AND WORK FROM DAMAGE. FAILURE TO DO SO TO THE SATISFACTION OF

THE OWNER WILL BE SUFFICIENT CAUSE FOR THE REJECTION OF THE MATERIAL, EQUIPMENT,

APPARATUS AND WORK IN QUESTION.

21. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL GUARANTEE ALL EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP FOR A

PERIOD OF 1 YEAR FOLLOWING THE DATE OF ACCEPTANCE. THE CONTRACTOR'S GUARANTEE

INCLUDES EQUIPMENT CAPACITY, PERFORMANCE RATINGS AND NOISE RATINGS. ANY DEFICIENCIES

SHALL BE PROMPTLY CORRECTED. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE SHALL NOT BE INCLUDED.

22. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL CLEAN ALL FIXTURES, PIPES, EQUIPMENT AND EXPOSED WORK AFTER

COMPLETION OF FINAL TESTING AND BEFORE ACCEPTANCE.

23. ALTERNATE MANUFACTURERS LISTED IN THE SCHEDULE OR SPECIFICATIONS ARE APPROVED TO

BID; HOWEVER, THE SUBMITTED PRODUCT MUST MEET THE GENERAL DESIGN, PERFORMANCE,

DIMENSIONS, WEIGHT, AND QUALITY OF THE SCHEDULED PRODUCT. EACH MANUFACTURER WILL

HAVE DIFFERENCES IN INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS. IF THE CONTRACTOR ELECTS TO GO WITH A

NON-BASIS OF DESIGN MANUFACTURER, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE TO INCLUDE

THE COST FOR ENGINEERING TIME, AS REQUIRED, TO ADJUST THE DESIGN TO THOSE DIFFERENCES

IN THEIR BID, IF THE BASIS OF DESIGN IS NOT BID. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE TO IDENTIFY

THE DIFFERENCES IN THE INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS BETWEEN THE BASIS OF DESIGN AND THE

SUBMITTED MANUFACTURER DURING THE SUBMITTAL PHASE.

24. WHERE “OR APPROVED EQUAL” IS INDICATED, OTHER PRODUCTS SIMILAR IN DESIGN AND OF EQUAL

QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE, AND COMPLYING WITH THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS MAY BE

APPROVED IF FOUND ACCEPTABLE BY THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER. THE CONTRACTOR MUST SUBMIT

TO THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER A LINE-BY-LINE COMPARISON BETWEEN SCHEDULED MANUFACTURER

AND "OR APPROVED EQUAL" MANUFACTURER 10 DAYS PRIOR TO BID.

25. ALL MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, ETC., INSTALLED UNDER THIS CONTRACT SHALL CONFORM TO ALL

RULES, CODES, ETC., AS RECOMMENDED OR ADAPTED BY THE NATIONAL ASSOCIATION GOVERNING

THE MANUFACTURER, RATING AND TESTING OF SUCH MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, ETC., ALL

ELECTRICALLY OPERATED EQUIPMENT SHALL BE U.L. APPROVED FOR THE USE INTENDED.

26. MOTORS SHALL CONFORM TO THE RULES OF THE N.E.M.A. FOR THE SERVICE INTENDED AND TO

THEIR STANDARDIZED FORM SIZES.

27. SHOP DRAWINGS, CATALOG CUTSHEETS AND PERFORMANCE DATA PERTAINING TO ALL MATERIALS

AND EQUIPMENT PROPOSED FOR USE SHALL BE SUBMITTED.

28. JOINTS BETWEEN DISSIMILAR METALS SHALL BE MADE WITH DIELECTRIC NIPPLES DOWNSTREAM OF

A VALVE.

29. ALL MATERIALS EXPOSED IN A RETURN AIR PLENUM SHALL COMPLY WITH NFPA 90A FLAME SPREAD

UNDER 25 AND SMOKE DEVELOPED AND FUEL CONTRIBUTED UNDER 50.

30. ALL LOW PRESSURE RECTANGULAR DUCTS TO BE SHEET METAL. DUCTBOARD OR LINED DUCTWORK

IS NOT ALLOWED UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. METAL DUCTWORK SHALL BE GALVANIZED STEEL OR

ALUMINUM. CONSTRUCTION DETAILS AND GAUGES SHALL BE ACCORDING TO NFPA BULLETIN 90A

AND SMACNA DUCT MANUAL.

31. THE DISCHARGE OF SAFETY VALVES, BLOWOFF PIPES AND OTHER OUTLETS SHALL BE LOCATED

AND SUPPORTED SO AS TO PREVENT INJURY TO PERSONNEL.

32. MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT SHOWN ON THE PLANS HAVE A SPECIFIC WEIGHT AND LOCATION. SHOULD

THE CONTRACTOR INSTALL EQUIPMENT WITH DIFFERENT WEIGHTS OR LOCATIONS AS SHOWN,

CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE THIS INFORMATION TO THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER FOR APPROVAL,

PRIOR TO PURCHASING, CLEARLY INDICATING THE DIFFERENCES IN SIZE, WEIGHT AND LOCATION.

THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER SHALL NOT BEAR THE COSTS OF SUCH REVIEWS OR REDESIGNS.

33. DO NOT ROUTE PIPING OVER ELECTRICAL OR COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT. THIS INCLUDES

HYDRONICS, STEAM, DOMESTIC WATER, SANITARY SEWER AND VENTS, CONDENSATE, ROOF

DRAINS, ETC.

34. THE MECHANICAL PIPING, ELECTRICAL, AND STRUCTURAL STEEL PLANS ARE BASED ON THE BASIS

OF DESIGN COOLING TOWER; REFERENCE DRAWING M601. THE CONTRACTOR WILL BE

RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY MODIFICATIONS TO THESE PLANS IF AN ALTERNATE APPROVED COOLING

TOWER IS USED; THESE RESPONSIBILITIES INCLUDE THE DOCUMENTATION AND SUBMITTAL OF ALL

MODIFICATIONS NEEDED FOR THE ALTERNATE COOLING TOWER. THESE MODIFICATIONS WOULD

INCLUDE ANY PIPING AND ELECTRICAL; ANY MODIFICATIONS REQUIRED FOR THE COOLING TOWER

SUPPORT AND/OR CONNECTION OF THE CATWALK TO THE TOWER WILL REQUIRE SIGNED/SEALED

DRAWINGS FROM A REGISTERED OKLAHOMA ENGINEER. THE CONTRACTOR SHOULD INCLUDE THE

COST OF ANY MODIFICATIONS IN THEIR BID PRICE.

GENERAL NOTES

G NATURAL GAS

HH.1J H.6

11

10

10.4

9

8

7.9

EXISTING MAKE UP AIR UNIT TO REMAIN

EXISTING CT-1 TO REMAIN

REMOVE AIR INTAKE HOOD

EXISTING TRANSFORMERS AND ELECTRICAL TO REMAIN

EXISTING GENERATOR TO REMAIN

EXISTING BOILER FLUES TO REMAIN


REMOVE EXISTING CWR PIPING

BACK TO ROOF PENETRATION

AND CAP AND PREPARE FOR

CONNECTION TO NEW

CONDENSER WATER PIPING.

REMOVE EXISTING CWS

PIPING BACK TO ROOF

PENETRATION AND CAP

AND PREPARE FOR

CONNECTION TO NEW

CONDENSER WATER

PIPING.

REMOVE EXISTING

NATATORIUM CWR PIPING

AND SUPPORTS BACK TO

WALL PENETRATION. CAP

PIPE INSIDE BUILDING.

SEAL AND REPAIR WALL.

EXISTING AIR INTAKE TO REMAIN

OWNER SHALL REMOVE EXISTING FENCE;

OWNER WILL PROVIDE ANY REQUIRED

FENCING AND LANDSCAPING.

REMOVE COOLING TOWER AND

SUPPORTS

REMOVE COOLING TOWER , SUPPORT,

AND ALL RELATED CONCRETE

FOOTINGS AND CONDENSER WATER

PIPING. CAP AND SEAL PIPING BELOW

GRADE AND ABANDON IN PLACE.

REMOVE ABOVE GRADE CWR PIPING

AND SUPPORTS THROUGH BUILDING.

SEAL BUILDING PENETRATION. RE:

MD102 FOR CONTINUATION.

EXISTING RELIEF HOODS TO REMAIN

EXISTING SIDEWALK TO REMAIN


EXISTING EXHAUST FANS TO REMAIN (TYP)






EXISTING SCREEN WALL TO REMAIN. CONTRACTOR

SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY REQUIRED

MODIFICATIONS, TEMPORARY REMOVAL, OR

DAMAGE TO EXISTING SCREEN WALL RESULTING

FROM WORK ASSOCIATED WITH REMOVAL AND

REINSTALLATION OF COOLING TOWERS AND

ASSOCIATED PIPING. SCREEN WALL SHALL BE

RETURNED TO ORIGINAL CONDITION AND INTEGRITY

IF ANY MODIFICATIONS ARE REQUIRED OR IF

DAMAGE OCCURS.

EXISTING GAS PIPING ON ROOF TO REMAIN.

COORDINATE DEMO AND NEW WORK WITH

EXISTING ROOF GAS PIPING SO AS TO

AVOID ANY DAMAGE.

EXISTING ROOF

DRAINS TO

REMAIN (TYP)

EXISTING SATELLITE

DISH TO REMAIN

GG

G

REMOVE ABOVE GRADE CWR PIPING TO

BUILDING. RE: MD102 FOR CONTINUATION.

ISSUE/ REVISIONS


ENGINEER OF RECORD

PROJECT INFORMATION

A:


FOR:


COLLEGE

DRAWN BY CHECKED BY

PROJECT NO.

PROJECT ADDRESS:

DATE

MJR JDF

OCCC130001001

12/14/2017

7777 S. MAY AVE.


MA

IN B

UIL

DIN

G C

OO

LIN

G T

OW

ER

RE

PL

AC

EM

EN

TO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

CO

MM

UN

ITY

CO

LL

EG

EO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

, OK

PL

OT

TE

D B

Y: R

ach

el S

pitle

r D

AT

E: 1

2/1

4/2

01

7 9

:4

7:0

3 A

M D

WG

N

AM

E: V

:\O

CC

C\C

oo

lin

g T

ow

er R

ep

la

ce

me

nt\D

ra

win

gs\M

D1

01

.d

wg

LA

ST

S

AV

ED

B

Y: R

sp

itle

r D

AT

E: 1

2/1

3/2

01

7 3

:5

4:1

6 P

M


918.877.6000 918.877.4000 FAX


11/14/201795% REVIEW SET


CA # 3537

EXPIRES 6/30/2018

L

I

C

EN

S

E

D

P

R

O

F

E

SS

IO

N

A

L

E

N

G

IN

E

E

R

O

K

L

AH

O

M

A

JEFFERYDON

FERGUSON19755


MD101

DEMOLITION PLAN

MECHANICAL ROOF

1. LOCATION, SIZE AND ORIENTATION OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT,

PIPING AND DUCTWORK HAVE BEEN TAKEN FROM EXISTING

AS-BUILTS AND ARE APPROXIMATE. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL

COORDINATE NEW CONSTRUCTION WITH EXISTING

CONDITIONS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL VISIT THE SITE PRIOR

TO BID.

2. CONTRACTOR TO WORK AROUND AND NOT DAMAGE EXISTING

ROOF DRAINS AND ROOF-MOUNTED SATELLITE DISH.

GENERAL NOTES

N

EXISTING HX TO REMAIN

EXISTING CH-3 TO REMAIN

EXISTING CDWP-4 TO REMAIN

REMOVE CDWP-3 AND CAP

OPENING WATERTIGHT


18" CWS

8" CWS

14" CWS

14" CWS

8" CWS

8" CWS

8" CWR

8" CWR

8" CWR

8" CWR

8" CWS

8" CWR

8" CWR

16" C

WS

8" C

WS

8" C

WS

8" C

WR

14" CWR

EXISTING CH-2

TO REMAIN

EXISTING CH-1

TO REMAIN

(E) CWR UP TO ROOF

(E) CWS DN. FROM ROOF

8" CWS

4" CWS

8" C

WR

8" C

WS


EXISTING CDWP-6 TO

BE ABANDONED IN

PLACE.

10" C

WS

EXISTING 3800 GALLON CONDENSER

WATER SUMP TO REMAIN

REMOVE CWR PIPING. RE: MD101 FOR CONTINUATION

(E) CWS DN. FROM CT-2 ON ROOF

(E) CWR UP TO CT-2 ON ROOF

EXISTING IN-GROUND SUMP. CAP AND SEAL PIPING

PENETRATIONS FROM EXISTING GROUND MOUNTED

COOLING TOWERS. EXISTING UNDERGROUND

PIPING SHALL BE GROUTED AND END SEALED WITH

STEEL PLATE. AFTER CAPPING AND SEALING

PENETRATIONS, CONTRACTOR SHALL FULLY DRAIN

AND CLEAN SUMP OF SILT AND DEBRIS, INCLUDING

POSSIBLE EXISTING FORMING MATERIALS.

SCHEDULE WITH OWNER.

REMOVE CWR PIPING BACK

TO POINT INDICATED.

CTS-2 (E)

CTS-1 (E)

8" C

WS

(E) PUMP

(E) PUMP

(E) PUMP

(E) PUMP

(E) PUMP

EXISTING CDWP-5

TO REMAIN

(E) PUMP

TO EXISTING SIDE STREAM

FILTRATION SYSTEM

REMOVE PIPING

FROM CDWP-3 TO

POINT INDICATED

REMOVE PIPING TO

POINT INDICATED

REMOVE PIPING AND

CONTROL VALVE

AND CAP AT FLANGE

EXISTING FLOOR

DRAIN TO REMAIN

REMOVE PIPING AND

CONTROL VALVE

AND CAP AT FLANGE

REMOVE PIPING AND

CONTROL VALVE

REMOVE PIPING TO

POINTS INDICATED

ISSUE/ REVISIONS


ENGINEER OF RECORD

PROJECT INFORMATION

A:


FOR:


COLLEGE

DRAWN BY CHECKED BY

PROJECT NO.

PROJECT ADDRESS:

DATE

MJR JDF

OCCC130001001

12/14/2017

7777 S. MAY AVE.


MA

IN B

UIL

DIN

G C

OO

LIN

G T

OW

ER

RE

PL

AC

EM

EN

TO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

CO

MM

UN

ITY

CO

LL

EG

EO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

, OK

PL

OT

TE

D B

Y: R

ach

el S

pitle

r D

AT

E: 1

2/1

4/2

01

7 9

:4

6:4

1 A

M D

WG

N

AM

E: V

:\O

CC

C\C

oo

lin

g T

ow

er R

ep

la

ce

me

nt\D

ra

win

gs\M

D1

02

.d

wg

LA

ST

S

AV

ED

B

Y: R

sp

itle

r D

AT

E: 1

2/1

3/2

01

7 4

:1

0:2

6 P

M


918.877.6000 918.877.4000 FAX


11/14/201795% REVIEW SET


CA # 3537

EXPIRES 6/30/2018

L

I

C

EN

S

E

D

P

R

O

F

E

SS

IO

N

A

L

E

N

G

IN

E

E

R

O

K

L

AH

O

M

A

JEFFERYDON

FERGUSON19755


MD102

DEMOLITION PLAN

MECHANICAL

GROUND FLOOR






TO BID.

2. EXISTING MAKEUP WATER SYSTEM TO REMAIN.

3. EXISTING FILTRATION AND WATER TREATMENT SYSTEMS TO

REMAIN.

GENERAL NOTES

N

11

10

10.4

9

EXISTING MAKE UP AIR UNIT


NEW CT-2

EXISTING TRANSFORMERS AND ELECTRICAL

EXISTING GENERATOR

EXISTING BOILER FLUE

EXISTING AIR INTAKE

FLEX CONNECTION, TYP

CONNECT TO EXISTING 8" CWS

PIPING AT ROOF PENETRATION

CONNECT TO EXISTING 8" CWR


EXTEND EXISTING BOILER

FLUE TO MATCH OTHER

EXISTING FLUE

PROVIDE BASE ELBOW SUPPORT, TYP

RE: STRUCTURAL FOR EXACT

MOUNTING LOCATION

EXISTING SCREEN WALL

TO REMAIN.

EXISTING GAS PIPING ON ROOF TO

REMAIN. COORDINATE DEMO AND NEW

WORK WITH EXISTING ROOF GAS

PIPING SO AS TO AVOID ANY DAMAGE.

EXISTING ROOF DRAINS

TO REMAIN (TYP)

EXISTING SATELLITE

DISH TO REMAIN

G

1

GG

G

EXISTING RELIEF HOODS

HIGH ROOF

LOW ROOF

APPROXIMATE LIMIT

OF FUTURE COOLING

TOWER

NEW CT-3

RE: M102 FOR CONTINUATION

NEW FENCING & ASSOCIATED

LANDSCAPING BY OWNER


MOUNTING LOCATION AND

SUPPORT

MAINTAIN CT-3 OUTLET

ELEVATION, RE: 2/M101.

4" DRAIN LINE

PIPE STAND, RE: STRUCTURAL (TYP)

2" INSULATED MAKEUP

WATER LINE

6" OVERFLOW DRAIN LINE

2" INSULATED

DRAIN LINE

PROVIDE INSULATION, INSULATION

COVER, AND SELF-REGULATING

HEAT TRACE AT ALL AREAS PIPE IS

SUBJECT TO FREEZE (TYP)

CT-3 CLEARANCES

3

2

HH.1J H.6

ISSUE/ REVISIONS


ENGINEER OF RECORD

PROJECT INFORMATION

A:


FOR:


COLLEGE

DRAWN BY CHECKED BY

PROJECT NO.

PROJECT ADDRESS:

DATE

MJR JDF

OCCC130001001

12/14/2017

7777 S. MAY AVE.


MA

IN B

UIL

DIN

G C

OO

LIN

G T

OW

ER

RE

PL

AC

EM

EN

TO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

CO

MM

UN

ITY

CO

LL

EG

EO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

, OK

PL

OT

TE

D B

Y: R

ach

el S

pitle

r D

AT

E: 1

2/1

4/2

01

7 1

1:0

5:3

7 A

M D

WG

N

AM

E: V

:\O

CC

C\C

oo

lin

g T

ow

er R

ep

la

ce

me

nt\D

ra

win

gs\M

10

1.d

wg

LA

ST

S

AV

ED

B

Y: R

sp

itle

r D

AT

E: 1

2/1

4/2

01

7 1

1:0

5:3

1 A

M


918.877.6000 918.877.4000 FAX


11/14/201795% REVIEW SET


CA # 3537

EXPIRES 6/30/2018

L

I

C

EN

S

E

D

P

R

O

F

E

SS

IO

N

A

L

E

N

G

IN

E

E

R

O

K

L

AH

O

M

A

JEFFERYDON

FERGUSON19755


M101

PLAN

MECHANICAL ROOF






TO BID.

2. PATCH AND REPAIR ROOF WATER TIGHT. CONTRACTOR

SHALL COORDINATE WITH OWNER AND OWNER'S ROOFING

CONTRACTOR IN REGARDS TO ANY ROOF WARRANTIES. ALL

NEW WORK SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE

REQUIREMENTS OF CURRENT ROOF WARRANTIES THAT ARE

IN EFFECT. ROOF WARRANTY CONTACT IS OKLAHOMA

ROOFING, (405) 670-1429.

3. ALL PIPING SHALL BE ADEQUATELY SUPPORTED AND BRACED

INDEPENDENTLY OF THE COOLING TOWER TO AVOID STRAIN

ON THE UNIT. PIPING TO BE INSTALLED SO THAT FLANGED

CONNECTIONS NEAREST COOLING TOWER CAN BE DETACHED

WITHOUT NOTICEABLE CHANGE IN PIPING ALIGNMENT.

4. COOLING TOWER ISOLATION PER ASHRAE HVAC

APPLICATIONS 2015, CHAPTER 48. ISOLATOR TYPE 4, BASE

TYPE A, MINIMUM DEFLECTION OF 2.5 INCH. INSTALLATION

SHALL BE PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS.


ROOF DRAINS, ROOF-MOUNTED SATELLITE DISH, AND ALL

OTHER EXISTING ITEMS.

6. DO NOT PENETRATE STRUCTURAL MEMBERS WITH PIPING.

ROOF PENETRATIONS FOR PIPING TO BE 6 INCHES AWAY

FROM STRUCTURAL MEMBERS.

7. CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE WITH OWNER'S WATER

TREATMENT CONTRACTOR FOR COOLING TOWER STARTUP.

OWNER WILL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL CHEMICAL

TREATMENT.

8. PROVIDE PT TEST PLUGS AT ALL PRESSURE AND

TEMPERATURE GAGES AND TRANSMITTERS.

9. PROVIDE ISOLATION VALVES AT ALL PRESSURE GAGES AND

TRANSMITTERS.

10. PROVIDE THERMOWELLS FOR ALL TEMPERATURE GAGES AND

TRANSMITTERS.

11. PROVIDE AUTO AIR VENTS IN HIGH POINTS IN PIPE THAT

COULD TRAP AIR.

12. PROVIDE MANUAL DRAIN VALVES IN LOW POINTS IN PIPE THAT

COULD TRAP WATER WHEN THE SYSTEM IS DRAINED.

13. PROVIDE CONDENSER WATER INLET AND OUTLET

TEMPERATURE SENSORS, RE: M701.

14. NEW CONDENSER WATER PIPING TO BE FLUSHED AND

CLEANED PRIOR TO CONNECTION TO EXISTING SYSTEM.

15. MATCH EXISTING FOR PIPE LABELING AND DIRECTIONAL

ARROWS FOR WATER FLOW.

16. REFER TO SHEET M701 FOR ALL CONTROL VALVES.

GENERAL NOTES

N

1. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY REQUIRED

MODIFICATIONS, TEMPORARY REMOVAL, OR DAMAGE TO

EXISTING SCREEN WALL RESULTING FROM WORK

ASSOCIATED WITH REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION OF

COOLING TOWERS AND ASSOCIATED PIPING. SCREEN WALL

SHALL BE RETURNED TO ORIGINAL CONDITION AND INTEGRITY

IF ANY MODIFICATIONS ARE REQUIRED OR IF DAMAGE

OCCURS.

2. PROVIDE NEW HEAT TRACE; RAYCHEM 8BTV1-CT, 8 WATT PER

FOOT, 120 VOLT WITH AMC-F5 AMBIENT SENSING

THERMOSTAT AND RAYCLIC-PC POWER KIT. HEAT TRACE TO

EXTEND FROM COOLING TOWER CONNECTIONS BACK TO

WALL PENETRATION. FIELD VERIFY ELECTRICAL

REQUIREMENTS WITH ELECTRICAL.




EXTEND FROM COOLING TOWER CONNECTION BACK TO WALL

PENETRATION. FIELD VERIFY ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

WITH ELECTRICAL.

KEYNOTES

CONTRACTOR TO FIELD-VERIFY

FINAL PIPE ELEVATIONS.

NEW WALL PENETRATIONS. SEAL

WATERTIGHT.

8" CWR & 8" CWS BEYOND

6" OVERFLOW & 4" DRAIN

LINE BEYOND

2" MAKEUP WATER NOT SHOWN

PIPE SUPPORT, RE:

STRUCTURAL

EXISTING HX

EXISTING CH-3

EXISTING CDWP-4

EXISTING CDWP-1

(E) 18" CWS

(E) 14" CWS

(E) 14" CWS

(E) 8" CWS

(E) 8" CWS

(E) 8" CWR

(E) 8" CWS

(E) 8" CWR

(E) 8" CWR

(E

) 16" C

WS

(E

) 8" C

WS

(E

) 8" C

WS

(E

) 8" C

WR

(E) 14" CWR

EXISTING CH-2

EXISTING CH-1

UP TO ROOF

UP TO ROOF

(E) 8" CWS

(E

) 8" C

WR

(E

) 8" C

WS

(E) CDWP-2

(E

) 10" C

WS


WATER SUMP

(E) CWS UP TO CT-2 ROOF, RE: 1/M101

(E) CWR UP TO CT-2 ROOF, RE: 1/M101

CONNECT TO EXISTING

8" CWR PIPING

EXISTING BYPASS

LINE TO ALLOW

CWR TO DRAIN

DOWN

CTS-2 (E)

CTS-1 (E)

(E) PUMP ABANDONED

IN PLACE.

(E) CDWP-5

(E) PUMP

(E) PUMP

(E) PUMP

(E) PUMP

(E) PUMP

(E) PUMP


FILTRATION SYSTEM

PROVIDE NEW ELECTRONIC

LEVEL SENSORS, RE: M701



8" CWR

8" CWS

CONNECT TO EXISTING 8" CWR PIPING

CONNECT TO EXISTING

8" CWS PIPING

UP FROM CDWP-3

CAPPED AND SEALED

1 2

3

EXISTING

FLOOR DRAIN

160 GPM LAKOS SIDE

STREAM FILTRATION,

CS-1

(ADD. ALTERNATE)

4

RE: 1/M101 FOR

CONTINUATION

4" INSULATED DRAIN LINE FROM CT-3

TO EXISTING FLOOR DRAIN

5

5

2" MAKEUP WATER TO NEAREST

MAKEUP WATER LINE 2" OR LARGER

8" CWR

8" CWS

6

7

PROVIDE MAKEUP WATER RUNOUT

WITH BACKFLOW PREVENTER

6" OVERFLOW DRAIN TO

EXISTING FLOOR DRAIN

CDWP-3, RE: 1/M501

3/4" DRAIN LINE TO


CAPPED AND SEALED

8

8

9

10

2

CONNECT TO EXISTING

CWS PIPING

THREE-WAY

BYPASS VALVE

ISSUE/ REVISIONS


ENGINEER OF RECORD

PROJECT INFORMATION

A:


FOR:


COLLEGE

DRAWN BY CHECKED BY

PROJECT NO.

PROJECT ADDRESS:

DATE

MJR JDF

OCCC130001001

12/14/2017

7777 S. MAY AVE.


MA

IN B

UIL

DIN

G C

OO

LIN

G T

OW

ER

RE

PL

AC

EM

EN

TO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

CO

MM

UN

ITY

CO

LL

EG

EO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

, OK

PL

OT

TE

D B

Y: R

ach

el S

pitle

r D

AT

E: 1

2/1

4/2

01

7 9

:5

9:1

3 A

M D

WG

N

AM

E: V

:\O

CC

C\C

oo

lin

g T

ow

er R

ep

la

ce

me

nt\D

ra

win

gs\M

10

2.d

wg

LA

ST

S

AV

ED

B

Y: R

sp

itle

r D

AT

E: 1

2/1

4/2

01

7 9

:5

7:5

1 A

M


918.877.6000 918.877.4000 FAX


11/14/201795% REVIEW SET


CA # 3537

EXPIRES 6/30/2018

L

I

C

EN

S

E

D

P

R

O

F

E

SS

IO

N

A

L

E

N

G

IN

E

E

R

O

K

L

AH

O

M

A

JEFFERYDON

FERGUSON19755


M102

PLAN

MECHANICAL

GROUND FLOOR






TO BID.

2. RELOCATE EXISTING PIPING, LIGHTS, CONDUIT, ETC AS

NECESSARY TO INSTALL NEW HYDRONIC PIPING.

3. PAINT ALL NEW EXPOSED, INSULATED CONDENSER WATER

PIPING GREEN TO MATCH EXISTING CONDENSER WATER

PIPING.

4. DO NOT ROUTE PIPING OVER ELECTRICAL OR

COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT. THIS INCLUDES HYDRONICS,

STEAM, DOMESTIC WATER, SANITARY SEWER AND VENTS,

CONDENSATE, ROOF DRAINS, ETC.



REMAIN.






TRANSMITTERS.


TRANSMITTERS.


COULD TRAP AIR.








GENERAL NOTES

N

1. THREE-WAY TOWER BYPASS VALVE.

2. PROVIDE ACCESS FOR INSPECTION AND SERVICING.

3. EXISTING SOLENOID VALVE, OPEN WHEN CDWP-2 IS OFF,

CLOSED WHEN CDWP-2 IS ON.

4. CONNECT TO EXISTING 8" CWS PIPING.

5. NEW WALL PENETRATION. SEAL WATERTIGHT.

6. TAKE-OFF PIPING FOR SUPPLY AND RETURN SENSOR LINES

FOR WATER TREATMENT.

7. TIE CT-3 BLEED-DOWN LINE BACK TO EXISTING WATER

TREATMENT LINE.

8. HOUSEKEEPING PAD, RE: STRUCTURAL

9. TOWER BYPASS LINE (FULL SIZE)

10. PIPE ENTRY RE: 5/M501 AND 8/M501.

KEYNOTES

DESIGN ENGINEERING NOTES

1. SIDE STREAM FILTRATION SELECTION AND DESIGN IS STILL IN

PROGRESS.

2. CT-3 BYPASS LINE DESIGN IS STILL IN PROGRESS.

ISSUE/ REVISIONS


ENGINEER OF RECORD

PROJECT INFORMATION

A:


FOR:


COLLEGE

DRAWN BY CHECKED BY

PROJECT NO.

PROJECT ADDRESS:

DATE

MJR JDF

OCCC130001001

12/14/2017

7777 S. MAY AVE.


MA

IN B

UIL

DIN

G C

OO

LIN

G T

OW

ER

RE

PL

AC

EM

EN

TO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

CO

MM

UN

ITY

CO

LL

EG

EO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

, OK

PL

OT

TE

D B

Y: R

ach

el S

pitle

r D

AT

E: 1

2/1

4/2

01

7 9

:4

1:4

9 A

M D

WG

N

AM

E: V

:\O

CC

C\C

oo

lin

g T

ow

er R

ep

la

ce

me

nt\D

ra

win

gs\M

50

1.d

wg

LA

ST

S

AV

ED

B

Y: R

sp

itle

r D

AT

E: 1

2/1

3/2

01

7 5

:1

6:4

3 P

M


918.877.6000 918.877.4000 FAX


11/14/201795% REVIEW SET


CA # 3537

EXPIRES 6/30/2018

L

I

C

EN

S

E

D

P

R

O

F

E

SS

IO

N

A

L

E

N

G

IN

E

E

R

O

K

L

AH

O

M

A

JEFFERYDON

FERGUSON19755


M501

DETAILS

MECHANICAL

DETAIL NOTES:

1. FOR INSULATED PIPING SIZE SLEEVE ACCORDINGLY.

2. PROVIDE ESCUTCHEONS OR ANGLED STRIPS WHERE

PENETRATIONS ARE EXPOSED TO VIEW.

CONCRETE OR

MASONRY WALL

FIRE-RATED SEALANT FOR RATED

WALLS (SEE ARCHITECTURAL

DRAWINGS FOR LOCATIONS)

PIPE SLEEVE FOR ALL MASONRY WALLS

AND RATED WALLS (SEE ARCHITECTURAL


STUD WALL

PACK WITH FIBROUS

MATERIAL AND CAULK

ALL AROUND

DUCT, PIPE OR

CONDUIT

ISSUE/ REVISIONS


ENGINEER OF RECORD

PROJECT INFORMATION

A:


FOR:


COLLEGE

DRAWN BY CHECKED BY

PROJECT NO.

PROJECT ADDRESS:

DATE

MJR JDF

OCCC130001001

12/14/2017

7777 S. MAY AVE.


MA

IN B

UIL

DIN

G C

OO

LIN

G T

OW

ER

RE

PL

AC

EM

EN

TO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

CO

MM

UN

ITY

CO

LL

EG

EO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

, OK

PL

OT

TE

D B

Y: R

ach

el S

pitle

r D

AT

E: 1

2/1

4/2

01

7 9

:4

8:2

9 A

M D

WG

N

AM

E: V

:\O

CC

C\C

oo

lin

g T

ow

er R

ep

la

ce

me

nt\D

ra

win

gs\M

60

1.d

wg

LA

ST

S

AV

ED

B

Y: R

sp

itle

r D

AT

E: 1

2/1

4/2

01

7 9

:0

9:2

6 A

M


918.877.6000 918.877.4000 FAX


11/14/201795% REVIEW SET


CA # 3537

EXPIRES 6/30/2018

L

I

C

EN

S

E

D

P

R

O

F

E

SS

IO

N

A

L

E

N

G

IN

E

E

R

O

K

L

AH

O

M

A

JEFFERYDON

FERGUSON19755


M601

SCHEDULES

MECHANICAL

PUMP SCHEDULE

MARK SERVICE

MANUFACTURER/

MODEL NO.

GPM

TDH

(FT)

TYPE

MOTOR

REMARKS

HP RPM V/PH/HZ

CDWP-3 CONDENSER WATER

TACO

TA1230

1050 100

SPLIT

CASE

40 1760 460/3/60 1-8

REMARKS:

1. COORDINATE ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS WITH ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR.

2. REFERENCE DETAILS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONTROLS AND PIPING REQUIREMENTS.

3. STANDARD CAST IRON/BRONZE FITTED MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION.

4. 8" - 125# ANSI CLASS DISCHARGE FLANGE

5. 1.15 SF, PREMIUM EFFICIENCY MOTOR

6. STANDARD MESH SCREEN

7. APPROVED EQUAL UNITS BY GOULDS, BELL & GOSSET, AURORA, AND PEERLESS ARE ACCEPTABLE.

8. INSTALLATION SHALL BE PER MANUFACTURER RECOMMENDATIONS.

COOLING TOWER SCHEDULE

DESIGNATION

CT-2 CT-3

QUANTITY1 1

LOCATION

ROOF GROUND

OPERATING WEIGHT (LBS) 13758 13758

MANUFACTURER

TOWER TECH TOWER TECH

MODEL NO.

TTXR-041950 (2)

GENERAL DATA:

TYPE

FORCED DRAFT

COUNTERFLOW

FORCED DRAFT

COUNTERFLOW

AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE (°F W.B.) 79 79

WATER FLOW (GPM) 1050 1050

WATER TEMPERATURE (°F) 95/85 95/85

MINIMUM RATED CAPACITY (TONS) 350 350

NUMBER OF CELLS

1 1

MOTOR:

TYPE

TEAO TEAO

QUANTITY4 4

HORSEPOWER (EACH) 5 5

FULL LOAD AMPS (EACH) 8.3 8.3

ELECTRICAL SERVICE AVAILABLE

460/3/60 460/3/60

STARTER TYPE

VFD VFD

FAN:

TYPE

AXIAL

PROPELLER

AXIAL

PROPELLER

POWER DRIVE UNIT TYPE

DIRECT DRIVE DIRECT DRIVE

TOTAL AIR FLOW (CFM)77,387 77,387

REMARKS

1-5 1-5

REMARKS:

1. VFD FURNISHED BY MANUFACTURER AND INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR. SINGLE VFD PER TOWER SHALL

CONTROL ALL MOTORS. MOTORS SHALL HAVE INDIVIDUAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION. VFD TO BE EQUIPPED

WITH LONWORKS COMMUNICATION INTERFACE AND COMMUNICATE WITH BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM.

VFD SUPPLIER TO COORDINATE THE COMPLETION OF THE INTERFACE WITH THE BUILDING AUTOMATION

CONTRACTOR.

2. PROVIDE MANUFACTURER'S SIX (6) FOOT SUB-STRUCTURE KIT.

3. PROVIDE SIDE CONDENSER WATER SUPPLY AND INLET CONFIGURATION.

4. COORDINATE OTHER ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS WITH ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR.

5. INSTALL PER MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS.

CENTRIFUGAL SEPARATOR SCHEDULE (ADD. ALTERNATE)

CS-1 CT WATER LAKOS 160

REMARKS

1. PROVIDE 3/4" AUTOMATIC PURGE VALVE, PIPE DISCHARGE TO FLOOR DRAIN. COORDINATE WITH ELECTRICAL

CONTRACTOR. REFERENCE CONTROLS FOR SEQUENCE OF OPERATION RE: M701

2. CARBON STEEL CONSTRUCTION

3. PROVIDE MOUNTING KIT INCLUDING 3 LEG PIPE STAND AND CLAMP

4. PROVIDE 5 HP 460V CIRCULATION PUMP (CP-1). COORDINATE INSTALLATION WITH ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR.

5. PROVIDE OPTIONAL ZERO LIQUID LOSS COLLECTION VESSEL

6. PROVIDE CIRCUIT SETTER (B&G CB-3F) IN DISCHARGE LINE. ALLOW 15" STRAIGHT PIPE UPSTREAM AND 6"

DOWNSTREAM OF CIRCUIT SETTER. DURING T&B, OPEN CIRCUIT SETTER COMPLETELY AND REPORT FLOW RATE.

1-6

MARK SERVICE MANUF. MODEL NO. GPM REMARK

TBX-0200 5

PUMP HP

7.6

FLA

460/3

POWER

(V/PH)

PUMP SCHEDULE (ADD. ALTERNATE)

MARK SERVICE

MANUFACTURER/

MODEL NO.

GPM

TDH

(FT)

TYPE

MOTOR

REMARKS

HP RPM V/PH/HZ


TACO

TA1230

1210 100

SPLIT

CASE

50 1760 460/3/60 1-8

REMARKS:









ISSUE/ REVISIONS


ENGINEER OF RECORD

PROJECT INFORMATION

A:


FOR:


COLLEGE

DRAWN BY CHECKED BY

PROJECT NO.

PROJECT ADDRESS:

DATE

MJR JDF

OCCC130001001

12/14/2017

7777 S. MAY AVE.


MA

IN B

UIL

DIN

G C

OO

LIN

G T

OW

ER

RE

PL

AC

EM

EN

TO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

CO

MM

UN

ITY

CO

LL

EG

EO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

, OK

PL

OT

TE

D B

Y: R

ach

el S

pitle

r D

AT

E: 1

2/1

4/2

01

7 9

:4

4:3

9 A

M D

WG

N

AM

E: V

:\O

CC

C\C

oo

lin

g T

ow

er R

ep

la

ce

me

nt\D

ra

win

gs\M

70

1.d

wg

LA

ST

S

AV

ED

B

Y: R

sp

itle

r D

AT

E: 1

2/1

4/2

01

7 9

:4

0:5

8 A

M


918.877.6000 918.877.4000 FAX


11/14/201795% REVIEW SET


CA # 3537

EXPIRES 6/30/2018

L

I

C

EN

S

E

D

P

R

O

F

E

SS

IO

N

A

L

E

N

G

IN

E

E

R

O

K

L

AH

O

M

A

JEFFERYDON

FERGUSON19755


M701

CONTROLS

MECHANICAL

COORDINATE ALL CONTROLS WORK WITH TONY ARANGO

(405-834-7984) OR CHAD MARAZAS (918-317-3151) AT THE TRANE

COMPANY.

GENERAL NOTES

OCCC TOWER

COOLING TOWER CONTROLLER MP581 - 1

SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS

SYSTEM GENERAL DESCRIPTION:

THE CONDENSER WATER SYSTEM CONSISTS OF THE FOLLOWING:

THREE (3) CHILLERS - DEDICATED CONDENSER WATER PUMPS

THREE (3) COOLING TOWERS

THE BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM

(BAS) CONTROLLER PROVIDES STAND-ALONE CONTROL OR

CONTROL FROM A HIGHER LEVEL BAS OF THE CONDENSER WATER

SETPOINT (ADJ.) BY MODULATING THE TOWER FAN SPEEDS AND THE

TOWER BYPASS VALVE POSITION SIGNAL INPUT.

CONDENSER WATER SYSTEM ENABLE/DISABLE:

THE CONDENSER WATER SYSTEM SHALL BE ENABLED ON A CONTACT

CLOSURE FROM THE CHILLER.

WHEN ENABLED, THE BAS CONTROLLER OR CHILLER SHALL START THE

DEDICATED CONDENSER WATER PUMP WHEN THE PUMP STATUS IS

CONFIRMED, CONTROL THE COOLING TOWER FANS AND TOWER

BYPASS VALVE TO MAINTAIN THE CONDENSER WATER SETPOINT (ADJ.).

WHEN THE CONDENSER WATER SYSTEM IS DISABLED, THE CONDENSER

WATER PUMP AND COOLING TOWER FAN SHALL BE OFF.

CONDENSER PUMP START/STOP:

THE BAS CONTROLLER SHALL START A CONDENSER PUMP THROUGH A

CONTACT CLOSURE OF THE PUMPS MOTOR STARTER ENABLE CONTACTS.

CONDENSER PUMP STATUS:

THE BAS CONTROLLER SHALL DETECT CONDENSER PUMP RUN STATUS BY

A CURRENT SWITCH.

CONDENSER PUMP FAILURE:

IF THE LEAD START/STOP RELAY IS ENABLED AND THE CURRENT SWITCH

STATUS IS OFF FOR MORE THAN 30 SECONDS (ADJ.), THE BAS CONTROLLER

SHALL ANNUNCIATE A CONDENSER WATER PUMP FAILURE ALARM TO THE

BAS.

CHILLER-3 TOWER BYPASS CONTROL:

WHEN THE CONDENSER WATER SYSTEM IS ENABLED, THE COOLING

TOWER SHALL MAINTAIN THE ENTERING CONDENSER WATER

TEMPERATURE BY FIRST MODULATING THE NORMALLY OPEN BYPASS

VALVE. WHEN THE VALVE IS IN FULL TOWER BYPASS AND THE ENTERING

CONDENSER WATER TEMPERATURE IS GREATER THAN THE ENTERING

CONDENSER WATER TEMPERATURE SETPOINT MINUS 2.0 DEG. F (ADJ.), THE

BYPASS VALVE SHALL BEGIN TO CLOSE SENDING WATER TO THE COOLING

TOWER. THE BYPASS VALVE SHALL CONTINUE TO MODULATE CLOSED TO

MAINTAIN THE ENTERING CONDENSER WATER TEMPERATURE SETPOINT

WITHOUT THE TOWER FANS. WHEN THE BYPASS VALVE IS FULLY CLOSED

AND THE ENTERING CONDENSER WATER TEMPERATURE REACHES

CONDENSER WATER TEMPERATURE SETPOINT PLUS 2.0 DEG. F (ADJ.) THE

CONDENSER WATER TEMPERATURE SHALL BE MAINTAINED BY OPERATING

THE COOLING TOWER FANS TO MAINTAIN THE ENTERING CONDENSER

WATER TEMPERATURE SETPOINT.

CHILLER-3 FREE COOLING CONTROL:

CHILLER-3 IS CONFIGURED AS A DECOUPLED LOOP WITH "SIDECAR" FREE

COOLING HEAT EXCHANGER. IF OUTSIDE AIR CONDITIONS PERMIT, THE

FREE COOLING HEAT SYSTEM WILL BE ENABLED. THE FREE COOLING HEAT

SYSTEM UTILIZES CHILLER 3'S CONDENSER PUMP AND COOLING TOWER. IF

FREE COOLING IS ENABLED, THE HEAT EXCHANGER BYPASS VALVE WILL BE

OPENED TO THE HEAT EXCHANGER AND CHILLER-3 DISABLED. THE

BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS) CONTROLLER PROVIDES

STAND-ALONE CONTROL OR CONTROL FROM A HIGHER LEVEL BAS OF THE

CONDENSER WATER SETPOINT OF 40°(ADJ.) BY MODULATING THE TOWER

FAN SPEEDS AND THE TOWER BYPASS VALVE POSITION SIGNAL TO

MAINTAIN THE HEAT EXCHANGER LEAVING WATER TEMPERATURE. WHEN

OUTSIDE AIR CONDITIONS ARE NOT FAVORABLE, FREE COOLING WILL BE

DISABLED AND THE CONDENSER WATER SETPOINT WILL BE RESET UP.

SLOWLY OPEN THE HEAT EXCHANGER VALVE TO THE CHILLER.

TOWER FAN CONTROL:

WHEN A CHILLER IS OPERATING AND THE COOLING TOWER BASIN

TEMPERATURE RISES 2.0 DEG. F ABOVE THE CURRENT TOWER LEAVING

WATER SETPOINT THE COOLING TOWER LEAD TOWER FAN SHALL BE

TURNED ON AT MINIMUM SPEED AND MODULATED TO MAINTAIN THE

TOWER LEAVING WATER SETPOINT. WHEN A CHILLER IS OPERATING AND

THE COOLING TOWER LEAVING WATER TEMPERATURE DROPS BELOW 1.0

DEG. F. BELOW THE CURRENT TOWER LEAVING WATER SETPOINT AND THE

COOLING TOWER FAN IS RUNNING AT MINIMUM SPEED, THE FAN SHALL BE

DISABLED.

TOWER FAN START/STOP:

THE BAS CONTROLLER SHALL START A TOWER FAN THROUGH A CONTACT

CLOSURE OF THE FANS STARTER ENABLE CONTACTS.

TOWER FAN STATUS:

THE BAS CONTROLLER SHALL DETECT TOWER FAN RUN STATUS BY A

CURRENT SWITCH.

TOWER FAN FAILURE:

IF THE LEAD TOWER FAN START/STOP RELAY IS ENABLED AND THE

CURRENT SWITCH STATUS IS OFF FOR MORE THAN 15 SECONDS (ADJ.), THE

BAS CONTROLLER SHALL ANNUNCIATE A TOWER FAN FAILURE ALARM TO

THE BAS.

THIS PROJECT REQUIRES THE EXPANSION OF AN EXISTING INTEGRATED AUTOMATION SYSTEM CONSTRUCTED USING A TRANETRACER SUMMIT PLATFORM WITH TRANE LONWORKS FIELD LEVEL DEVICES. THE NEW IAS SHALL UTILIZE A SINGLE TRANE BCUNETWORK CONTROLLER, NETWORKED WITH A TRACER SUMMIT FRONT-END AND TRANE FULLY PROGRAMMABLE LONWORKS FIELDCONTROL DEVICES.

A. FURNISH AND INSTALL INTO EXISTING TRACER SUMMIT PLATFORM NEW LONWORKS FULLY PROGRAMMABLE ANDAPPLICATION SPECIFIC DDC CONTROLLERS FOR THE EQUIPMENT IDENTIFIED IN THE DRAWINGS, INCLUDING COOLING TOWERS,AND CONDENSER WATER PUMPS.

B. INTEGRATION OF NEW LONWORKS DDC CONTROLLERS WITH EXISTING TRANE BCU. CONTRACTOR TO CONFIRM ACTUALLOCATION AND CAPACITY OF EXISTING TRANE BCU.

C. PROVIDE GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE DEVELOPMENT FOR ALL OF THE DEVICES IDENTIFIED ABOVE AND ILLUSTRATED WITHINTHE IAS DRAWINGS. GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE DEVELOPMENT MUST MATCH EXISTING GRAPHICS, TOOL SETS ANDFEATURES.

D. IT IS THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO REVIEW ALL OF THE DESIGN DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS AND REPORT ANYDISCREPANCIES TO THE OWNER.

CONTROLS DESCRIPTIONA. FURNISH ALL MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND TECHNICAL LABOR NECESSARY FOR A COMPLETE AND OPERATING CONTROL

SYSTEM UTILIZING DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS AS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS, SEQUENCE OF OPERATION, POINTS LIST AND ASDESCRIBED HEREIN. THIS SHALL INCLUDE, BUT IS NOT LIMITED TO, CONTROLLERS, SENSORS, POWER SUPPLIES, CABLE, ETC.

B. CONTROLLER SOFTWARE: PROVIDE ALL SOFTWARE AND COMMUNICATION ACCESSORIES REQUIRED TO PROGRAM ANDCOMMISSION THE CONTROLS PROVIDED. THE CONTROLLER SOFTWARE MUST HAVE THE CAPABILITY TO BE INSTALLED ANDOPERATED ON A MINIMUM OF (5) COMPUTERS.

1. NOT REQUIRED IF OCCC IS ALREADY IN POSSESSION OF THE SOFTWARE AND COMMUNICATION ACCESSORIES REQUIRED TOPROGRAM AND COMMISSION THE CONTROLS PROVIDED.

C. COMPATIBILITY: THE SYSTEM MUST UTILIZE THE LATEST FIELD PROVEN TECHNOLOGIES INCLUDING SURFACE MOUNTTECHNOLOGY AND PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATION. THE TEMPERATURE CONTROLS CONTRACTOR SHALL ONLY PROVIDEDEVICE LEVEL DDC CONTROLLERS WHICH USE THE LONTALK PROTOCOL FOR COMMUNICATION. ONLY FULLY PROGRAMMABLECONTROLLERS FOR DIRECT CONNECTION OF ALL MECHANICAL AND MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT, SENSORS AND CONTROLSSHALL BE PROVIDED.

D. THE TEMPERATURE CONTROLS CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE REQUIRED TO ALLOWCOMMUNICATION AND FULL FUNCTIONALITY TO THE EXISTING OCCC TRANE TRACER SUMMIT FRONT-END.

WARRANTYA. THE TEMPERATURE CONTROL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE A ONE YEAR WARRANTY ON ALL HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE

THAT WILL COMMENCE FROM THE POINT OF PROJECT ACCEPTANCE BY THE OWNER. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL ALSO ASSUMERESPONSIBILITY FOR ALL SYSTEM UPGRADES AND PATCHES FROM THE MANUFACTURER DURING THE TERM OF THEWARRANTY.

B. THE CONTRACTOR'S OFFICE SHALL BE WITHIN A 5O MILE RADIUS OF THE JOBSITE.

QUALITY ASSURANCEA. ELECTRICAL STANDARDS: PROVIDE ELECTRICAL PRODUCTS WHICH HAVE BEEN TESTED, LISTED AND LABELED BY

UNDERWRITERS' LABORATORIES (UL) AND COMPLY WITH NEMA STANDARDS.

OWNER'S INSTRUCTIONSA. THE CONTROLS CONTRACTOR FURNISHING THE DDC CONTROLLERS AND OR DEVICES SHALL PROVIDE THE OWNER AND

ENGINEER WITH DETAILS OF THE PROPOSED INTERFACE INCLUDING PROTOCOL IMPLEMENTATION CONFORMANCESTATEMENT (PICS) FOR LONTALK EQUIPMENT, HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE IDENTIFIERS FOR THE INTERFACE POINTS,NETWORK IDENTIFIERS, WIRING REQUIREMENTS, COMMUNICATION SPEEDS, AND REQUIRED NETWORK ACCESSORIES. THECONTROLS CONTRACTOR SHALL INSURE THERE ARE NO UNRESOLVED ISSUES REGARDING THE INTEGRATION OF THESEPRODUCTS INTO THE DDC NETWORK.

HARDWARE SUPPORTA. THE TEMPERATURE CONTROLS CONTRACTOR SHALL MAINTAIN A MAINTENANCE SUPPORT FACILITY COMPLETE WITH SYSTEM

TECHNICIANS, DIAGNOSTIC AND TEST EQUIPMENT AND ROUTINES, AND NEW SPARE DIGITAL CONTROLLERS, CONTROLCOMPONENTS (INCLUDING ALL SPECIALTY CONTROL DEVICES), AND OPERATOR'S TERMINAL.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLLERSA. CONTROLLERS SHALL BE A FULLY PROGRAMMABLE DDC CONTROLLER UTILIZING THE LONTALK PROTOCOL FOR

COMMUNICATION IN A PEER-TO-PEER TOPOLOGY. CONTROLLERS SHALL USE FTT-10 TRANSCEIVERS. ALL COMMUNICATIONSHALL BE WITH THE USE OF LONMARK-APPROVED SNVTs

B. THE CONTROLLERS AND SOFTWARE SHALL ALLOW FOR COMPLETE FUNCTIONALITY TO THE EXISTING OCCC TRANE TRACERSUMMIT FRONTEND.

C. THE GRAPHICS SHALL DISPLAY THE STATUS OF ANY EQUIPMENT OR ZONE TO THE EXISTING OCCC TRANE TRACER SUMMITFRONT END AS A PRE-DEFINED COLOR.

D. THE FOLLOWING PERFORMANCE SHALL BE REQUIRED.

THE INSTALLED CONTROLLERS SHALL HAVE THE FUNCTIONALITY THROUGH THE USE OF THE EXISTING TRANE TRACER SUMMITFRONTEND. OPERATOR INTERFACE SHALL ALLOW EACH AUTHORIZED OPERATOR TO EXECUTE THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS AS AMINIMUM:

1. LOG-IN AND LOG-OUT - SYSTEM SHALL REQUIRE USER NAME AND PASSWORD TO LOG-IN TO OPERATOR INTERFACE.

2. POINT-AND-CLICK NAVIGATION - OPERATOR INTERFACE SHALL BE GRAPHICALLY BASED AND SHALL ALLOW OPERATORS TOACCESS GRAPHICS FOR EQUIPMENT AND GEOGRAPHIC AREAS USING POINT-AND-CLICK NAVIGATION.

3. VIEW AND ADJUST EQUIPMENT PROPERTIES - OPERATORS SHALL BE ABLE TO VIEW CONTROLLED EQUIPMENT STATUS AND TOADJUST OPERATING PARAMETERS SUCH AS SETPOINTS, PID GAINS, ON AND OFF CONTROLS, AND SENSOR CALIBRATION.

4. VIEW AND ADJUST OPERATING SCHEDULES - OPERATORS SHALL BE ABLE TO VIEW SCHEDULED OPERATING HOURS OF EACHSCHEDULABLE PIECE OF EQUIPMENT ON A WEEKLY OR MONTHLY CALENDAR-BASED GRAPHICAL SCHEDULE DISPLAY, TO SELECTAND ADJUST EACH SCHEDULE AND TIME PERIOD, AND TO SIMULTANEOUSLY SCHEDULE RELATED EQUIPMENT. SYSTEM SHALLCLEARLY SHOW EXCEPTION SCHEDULES AND HOLIDAYS ON THE SCHEDULE DISPLAY.

5. VIEW AND RESPOND TO ALARMS. OPERATORS SHALL BE ABLE TO VIEW A LIST OF CURRENTLY ACTIVE SYSTEM ALARMS, TOACKNOWLEDGE EACH ALARM, AND TO CLEAR (DELETE) UNNEEDED ALARMS.

6. VIEW AND CONFIGURE TRENDS - OPERATORS SHALL BE ABLE TO VIEW A TREND GRAPH OF EACH TRENDED POINT AND BE ABLETO EDIT GRAPH CONFIGURATION TO DISPLAY A SPECIFIC TIME PERIOD OR DATA RANGE. OPERATOR SHALL BE ABLE TO CREATECUSTOM TREND GRAPHS TO DISPLAY DATA FROM MULTIPLE TRENDED POINTS ON THE SAME PAGE.

7. VIEW AND CONFIGURE REPORTS - OPERATORS SHALL BE ABLE TO RUN PRECONFIGURED REPORTS, TO VIEW REPORT RESULTS,AND TO CUSTOMIZE REPORT CONFIGURATION TO SHOW DATA OF INTEREST.

8. MANAGE CONTROL SYSTEM HARDWARE - OPERATORS SHALL BE ABLE TO VIEW CONTROLLER STATUS, TO RESTART (REBOOT)EACH CONTROLLER, AND TO DOWNLOAD NEW CONTROL SOFTWARE TO EACH CONTROLLER.

9. MANAGE OPERATOR ACCESS - TYPICALLY, ONLY A FEW OPERATORS ARE AUTHORIZED TO MANAGE OPERATOR ACCESS.AUTHORIZED OPERATORS SHALL BE ABLE TO VIEW A LIST OF OPERATORS WITH SYSTEM ACCESS AND OF FUNCTIONS THEY CANPERFORM WHILE LOGGED IN. OPERATORS SHALL BE ABLE TO ADD OPERATORS, TO DELETE OPERATORS, AND TO EDITOPERATOR FUNCTION AUTHORIZATION. OPERATOR SHALL BE ABLE TO AUTHORIZE EACH OPERATOR FUNCTION SEPARATELY.

E. EASY FIRMWARE UPGRADES USING REMOTE DOWNLOADING - (CHIP REPLACEMENT NOT ACCEPTABLE)

CONTROLS PERFORMANCE


1. FINAL SEQUENCE OF OPERATION, POINTS LIST, AND CONTROL

DIAGRAMS AND PERFORMANCE ARE IN PROGRESS.

BMTX - 1EXISTING HVAC CONTROLS

120 VACEXIST

LOC

CW SYSTEM MP-581EXISTING CW SYSTEM

CH - 3CW SYSTEM

120 VACEXIST

EX2 - 1CW SYSTEM

120 VACEXIST

EX2 - 2CW SYSTEM

120 VACBY ESC

EX2 - 3CW SYSTEM

120 VACBY ESC

EX2 - 4CW SYSTEM

CH - 1CW SYSTEM

CH - 2CW SYSTEM

X XXCH-1 COND SUPPLY TEMPERATURE X AI NOTE 1XXCH-1 CW ENTERING WATER TEMPERATURE X AIXXCH-1 REF PRESSURE X AI NOTE 1X XXCH-1 SUMP LEVEL X AIXXCH-2 CW LEAVING WATER TEMPERATURE X AIXXCH-2 REF PRESSURE AI NOTE 1

CH-3 BYPASS VALVE POSITION FEEDBACK X AIXXCH-3 CW LEAVING WATER TEMPERATURE AIX XXCH-3 CW SUPPLY TEMPERATURE X AIXXHX-1 ENTERING TEMPERATURE X AI NOTE 1X XXHX-1 LEAVING TEMPERATURE X AI NOTE 1X XXREF PRESSURE X AI NOTE 1XXTOWER 2 LEAVING WATER TEMPERATURE X AIX XXTOWER 3 LEAVING WATER TEMPERATURE X AI

XCDWP-1 STATUS X BI NOTE 1XCDWP-2 STATUS X BI NOTE 1XCDWP-3 STATUS X BI

CH-3 BYPASS VALVE POSITION CLOSE BICH-3 BYPASS VALVE POSITION OPEN BI

XCHILLER 1 CONDENSER WATER FLOW STATUS OPEN BI NOTE 1CHILLER 2 CONDENSER WATER FLOW STATUS OPEN BI NOTE 1CHILLER 2 CONDENSER WATER FLOW STATUS OPEN BI NOTE 1

XFREE COOLING VALVE POSITION CLOSE X BI NOTE 1HX PUMP STATUS BI NOTE 1

XLRG SUMP ALARM X BI NOTE 1XSML SUMP ALARM X BI NOTE 1XTOWER 1 FAN STATUS STATUS X BI NOTE 1

TOWER 2 FAN STATUS STATUS BITOWER 2 VIBRATION ALARM BI

XTOWER 3 FAN STATUS STATUS X BITOWER 3 VIBRATION DETECTION ALARM BI

CH-1 HEAD PRESSURE VALVE X AO NOTE 1CH-2 HEAD PRESSURE VALVE AO NOTE 1CH-3 HEAD PRESSURE VALVE X AO NOTE 1CH-3 TOWER BYPASS VALVE AO

TOWER 1 FAN SPEED X AO NOTE 1TOWER 2 FAN SPEED AOTOWER 3 FAN SPEED X AOCDWP-2 START STOP BO NOTE 1CDWP-3 START STOP X BO

CH-2 TOWER BYPASS VALVE X BO NOTE 1CHILLER 1 CONDENSER WATER PUMP 1 START

STOP OUTPUTBO NOTE 1

CT-1 DUMP VALVE X BO NOTE 1FREE COOLING CHANGEOVER VALVE X BO NOTE 1

HX PUMP START STOP BO NOTE 1TOWER 1 FAN ENABLE COMMAND X BO NOTE 1TOWER 2 FAN ENABLE COMMAND BOTOWER 3 FAN ENABLE COMMAND X BO

CONTROLLER SPARE HARDWARE POINTSANALOG INPUT(S) 1

UNIVERSAL INPUT(S) 8ANALOG OUTPUT(S) 15

BINARY OUTPUT(S) 14

GENERAL NOTES1. EXISTING

CW SYSTEM MP581 - 1 FLOW - SYSTEM POINTS LISTCONTROLLER: MP581 POINT TYPE ALARMSSYSTEM POINT DESCRIPTION

GRA

PHIC

HARD

WAR

E IN

PUT

HARD

WAR

E O

UTP

UT

SOFT

WAR

E PO

INT

HARD

WAR

E IN

TERL

OCK

WIR

ELES

S

NET

WO

RK

DEFA

ULT

VAL

UE

HIG

H AN

ALO

G L

IMIT

LOW

AN

ALO

G L

IMIT

BIN

ARY

LATC

H DI

AGN

OST

IC

SEN

SOR

FAIL

DIAGNOSTICS NOTESCOM

MU

NIC

ATIO

N F

AIL

LAKOSFILTER

LARGESUMP

TREATMENTALARM

SMALLSUMP

TREATMENTALARM

(EXISTING CW SYSTEM)

CH - 1OPEN

BICHR 1 CW FLOW

CH - 2OPEN

BICHR 2 CW FLOW

CDWP - 1

BOCH-2 TOWER BYPASS VALVE

AI

CW SUPPLY

AI

TWR2S TEMP

AICH-1 CW ENTERING TEMP

CDWP - 2

THERMAL PASTE

CWR

BO

BI

S/S

STS

CDWP - 1

BO

BI

S/S

STS

CDWP - 2

(EXISTING) CT - 1

(NEW) CT - 2

COOLING TOWER 1

A

BOTOWER 1 FAN ENABLE

CMD

BITOWER 1 FAN STATUS

STS

CW PITAI

CH-1 SUMP LEVEL

CWR

(EXISTING) CTS-2

CHR - 3OPEN

BICHR 3 CW FLOW

AO

BYPASS

AI

TWR3S TEMP

CDWP - 3

BO

BI

S/S

STS

CDWP - 3

(NEW) CT - 3

CWR

HX - 1

P - X

BO

BI

S/S

STS

P-X

COOLING TOWER 2

B


STS


CMD BIVIBRATION ALARM

VIB ALM

COOLING TOWER 3

B


STS



VIB ALM

AOTOWER 1 FAN SPEED

SPD AOTOWER 2 FAN SPEED


SPD

AOCH-3 HEAD PRESSURE VALVE



AI REF PRESSURE

AI REF PRESSURE

AI REF PRESSURE

BOFC VALVE

AICH-3 CW TEMP

AICH-2 CW TEMP

BOCT DUMP VAL

AI

CW SUPPLY

AIHX TEMP

AIHX TEMP

FDBKAI

VALVE POSITION

SUMP TREATMENT ALARMS

A

BI BI

CLOSEBI

POSITION

(ADD. ALTERNATE)

ISSUE/ REVISIONS

MATTHEW RUTKOWSKI, P.E.

ENGINEER OF RECORD

PROJECT INFORMATION

A:


FOR:


COLLEGE

DRAWN BY CHECKED BY

PROJECT NO.

PROJECT ADDRESS:

DATE

MJR CAH

OCCC130001001

12/14/2017

7777 S. MAY AVE.


MA

IN B

UIL

DIN

G C

OO

LIN

G T

OW

ER

RE

PL

AC

EM

EN

TO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

CO

MM

UN

ITY

CO

LL

EG

EO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

, OK

PL

OT

TE

D B

Y: M

att R

utko

wski D

AT

E: 1

2/1

4/2

01

7 5

:5

8:3

5 P

M D

WG

N

AM

E: V

:\O

CC

C\C

oo

lin

g T

ow

er R

ep

la

ce

me

nt\D

ra

win

gs\E

00

1.d

wg

LA

ST

S

AV

ED

B

Y: M

ru

tko

wski D

AT

E: 1

1/1

4/2

01

7 3

:4

8:1

4 P

M


918.877.6000 918.877.4000 FAX


11/14/201795% REVIEW SET


CA # 3537

EXPIRES 6/30/2018

MATTHEWRUTKOWSKI

28077

L

I

C

EN

S

E

D

P

R

O

F

E

SS

IO

N

A

L

E

N

G

IN

E

E

R

O

K

L

AH

O

M

A


E001

SPECIFICATIONS

ELECTRICAL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS:

A. FURNISH ALL LABOR, MATERIAL, EQUIPMENT, TOOLS AND TEMPORARY POWER REQUIRED TO

COMPLETE THE INSTALLATION OF THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.

B. OBTAIN ALL PERMITS, INSPECTIONS AND APPROVALS AS REQUIRED BY THE LOCAL AUTHORITIES

HAVING JURISDICTION (AHJ). ALL ASSOCIATED FEES SHALL BE PAID BY THE CONTRACTOR

AND/OR CONSTRUCTION MANAGER. COORDINATE WITH THE CONSTRUCTION MANAGER.

C. ALL MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEM APPURTENANCES OF THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

NECESSARY FOR ITS PROPER OPERATION AND INSTALLATION, BUT NOT NECESSARILY STATED

OR SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS SHALL BE PROVIDED BY THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR AND BE

INCLUDED IN THEIR SCOPE OF WORK AND BID.

D. THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL FULFILL ALL REQUIREMENTS OF THE CONTRACT

DOCUMENTS AND SHALL COMPLETE THE IMPROVEMENTS SHOWN IN THE CONTRACT

DOCUMENTS. ALL SYSTEMS SHALL BE PROVIDED AND PROVEN TO BE FULLY OPERATIONAL AND

FUNCTIONAL.

E. WORK SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH ALL OF THE FOLLOWING MINIMUM APPLICABLE

REQUIREMENTS OF THE LATEST GOVERNING CODES. FINAL APPROVAL OF ALL WORK SHALL BE

IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION. WHERE THERE ARE CONFLICTS

WITH CODES AND OR AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION, THE MOST STRINGENT SHALL APPLY

AND BE IMPLEMENTED.

1. NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE (NEC)

2. INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE (IBC)

3. INTERNATIONAL MECHANICAL CODE (IMC)

4. NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)

5. AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES ACT (ADA)

6. LOCAL CODES AND AMENDMENTS

7. NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION (NECA)

8. OWNER'S CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS

9. BUILDING STANDARDS

F. MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT SHALL BE NEW AND SHALL CONFORM TO THE FOLLOWING CURRENT

APPLICABLE INDUSTRY STANDARDS:

1. NEMA (NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURER'S ASSOCIATION)

2. ANSI (AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE)

3. UL (UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES)

4. IEEE (INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC ENGINEERS)

5. IPCEA (INSULATED POWER CABLE ENGINEERS ASSOCIATION)

G. CONTRACTOR SHALL REVIEW ALL DOCUMENTS, PRIOR TO SUBMITTING BID PROPOSAL,

INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, MECHANICAL DRAWINGS, AND MECHANICAL SCHEDULES.

REQUIREMENTS AND INFORMATION NECESSARY FOR THE ELECTRICAL MAY BE FOUND IN OTHER

DISCIPLINE'S DOCUMENTS.

H. COORDINATE AND VERIFY ALL WORK SHOWN ON THESE DOCUMENTS WITH ALL OTHER

DISCIPLINE'S CONTRACT DOCUMENTS DRAWINGS AND EXISTING CONDITIONS. IT IS THE

RESPONSIBILITY OF THIS CONTRACTOR TO NOTIFY THE ENGINEER IN WRITING OF

DISCREPANCIES FOUND.

I. COORDINATE WITH THE WORK OF ALL OTHER TRADES INVOLVED IN THIS PROJECT. IT IS THE

RESPONSIBILITY OF THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY THE ACTUAL LOCATION OF THE

EQUIPMENT, DUCTWORK, PIPING, STRUCTURE, ETC., AND COORDINATE THE INSTALLATION

ACCORDINGLY.

J. CONTRACTOR SHALL SURVEY SITE DURING BIDDING PROCESS AND FULLY FAMILIARIZE

THEMSELVES WITH ALL CONDITIONS THAT AFFECT THE WORK OR COST THEREOF. PROVIDE

REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION, AS REQUIRED AND IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CONTRACT

DOCUMENTS.

K. THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS ARE DIAGRAMMATIC. EXACT LOCATION

OF EQUIPMENT SHALL BE COORDINATED WITH OTHER TRADES AND FIELD CONDITIONS.

L. CONDUIT RUNS SHOWN ARE DIAGRAMMATIC IN NATURE. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR

SIZING AND LOCATING PULL BOXES PER NEC AND FOR COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES.

M. DO NOT SCALE OR DIMENSION LOCATIONS FROM THESE DRAWINGS.

N. SUBMITTALS: THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT INFORMATION FOR ENGINEER

REVIEW, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ALL OF THE FOLLOWING EQUIPMENT: CONDUIT, BOXES,

DISCONNECT SWITCHES, CONDUCTORS, VFDS, MOTOR CONTROL CENTER BUCKETS., ETC.

SUBMITTALS SHALL BE NEATLY BOUND WITH EXACT MODEL NUMBER PROVIDED AND CLEARLY

MARKED. SUBMITTALS SHALL INCLUDE, BUT NOT BE LIMITED TO: PHYSICAL SIZE, LISTINGS,

PERFORMANCE INFORMATION, AND FABRICATION MATERIALS.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1. MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, AND DEVICES SHALL BE LISTED AND LABELED BY A NATIONALLY

RECOGNIZED AND APPROVED TESTING AGENCY AS OUTLINED IN THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL

CODE.

2.2. FIRESTOPPING MATERIAL SHALL BE MANUFACTURED BY 3M OR ENGINEER APPROVED EQUAL.

2.3. CONDUIT RACEWAYS:

A. CONDUIT SIZES SHOWN ON DRAWINGS ARE BASED ON THHN/THWN INSULATION AND EMT.

CONTRACTOR SHALL ADJUST CONDUIT SIZE FOR CONDUCTORS OF DIFFERENT INSULATION AND

CONDUIT OTHER THAN EMT.

B. CONDUIT TYPES PERMITTED:

1. RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC)-EXTERIOR ABOVE GRADE, DAMP OR WET LOCATIONS, OR

WHERE SUBJECT TO MECHANICAL DAMAGE.

2. ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)-INTERIOR.

3. FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT: CONNECTION TO VIBRATING EQUIPMENT (INCLUDING COOLING

TOWER, MOTORS). USE LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT IN DAMP OR WET LOCATIONS.

NOT TO EXCEED 6'-0".

4. INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT (IMC)-USES PERMITTED BY NEC.

5. PVC - BELOW GRADE.

ALL CONDUITS NOT SPECIFICALLY LISTED ABOVE SHALL NOT BE ALLOWED.

C. MINIMUM INTERIOR CONDUIT SIZE SHALL BE 1/2”, MINIMUM EXTERIOR CONDUIT SIZE SHALL BE

3/4".

2.1. OUTLET BOXES AND CONDUIT FITTINGS:

A. FURNISH OUTLETS AND BOXES WHERE REQUIRED BY DOCUMENTS, EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS,

OR CODE. ALL OUTLET AND SWITCH BOXES SHALL BE SIZED TO PROVIDE SPACE FOR WIRING

DEVICES, CONDUCTORS, AND GROUNDING CONDUCTORS. NON-METALLIC OUTLET BOXES ARE

NOT ACCEPTABLE.

B. PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES ARE NOT COMPLETELY SHOWN ON DRAWINGS. THEY SHALL BE

INSTALLED WHERE REQUIRED, IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE NEC. ALL BOXES SHALL BE

CONSTRUCTED OF #14 GAUGE MINIMUM HOT DIPPED GALVANIZED STEEL, CAST OR SHEET

ALUMINUM WITH SCREWED OR HINGED COVER. FASTENERS SHALL BE BRASS OR ZINC COATED

SCREWS. WHERE EXPOSED TO WEATHER, MOISTURE-TIGHT GASKET SHALL BE PROVIDED.

ELECTRICAL BOXES WITH UNUSED KNOCKOUTS SHALL BE PLUGGED. ALL BOXES SHALL BE OF

ADEQUATE SIZE WITHOUT THE USE OF EXTENSION RINGS.

C. CONDUIT CONNECTORS:

1. ALL FITTINGS FOR RIGID METAL CONDUITS SHALL BE THREADED TYPE UNLESS NOTED

OTHERWISE.

2. DIE CAST FITTINGS ARE PROHIBITED.

3. INDOOR EXPOSED EMT FITTINGS SHALL BE STEEL COMPRESSION TYPE.

4. OUTDOOR RMC OR IMC CONNECTIONS INTO SHEET METAL BOXES SHALL BE MADE WITH

MEYERS SEAL-TIGHT HUBS WHERE ENTERING FROM THE SIDE OR TOP OF BOX.

THREADLESS RMC OR IMC FITTINGS SHALL NOT BE USED. INDOOR RMC OR IMC

CONNECTIONS SHALL BE MADE WITH DOUBLE LOCK NUTS AND BUSHINGS.

D. COMPLY WITH NECA FOR INSTALLATION OF HANGERS, AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL

EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS EXCEPT IF REQUIREMENTS IN THIS SECTION ARE MORE STRINGENT.

2.5 SUPPORTING DEVICES:

A. ANCHORS AND FASTENERS

1. STEEL STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS: USE BEAM CLAMPS. WELDED FASTENERS MAY BE USED

WITH APPROVAL FROM STRUCTURAL ENGINEER.

2. CONCRETE SURFACES: USE SELF-DRILLING ANCHORS AND EXPANSION ANCHORS.

3. MASONRY, PLASTER, AND GYPSUM BOARD: USE TOGGLE BOLTS AND HOLLOW WALL

FASTENERS.

4. SOLID MASONRY WALLS: USE EXPANSION ANCHORS.

5. SHEET METAL: USE SHEET METAL SCREWS.

B. INSTALLATION

1. INSTALL PRODUCTS IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS.

2. DO NOT FASTEN SUPPORTS TO PIPES, DUCTS, MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT, AND CONDUIT.

3. DO NOT USE SPRING STEEL CLIPS AND CLAMPS.

4. DO NOT DRILL OR CUT STRUCTURAL MEMBERS.

5. PROVIDE SUPPORTS LOCATED PER NEC CODE.

6. NO RACEWAYS SHALL BE SUPPORTED FROM CEILING, CEILING GRID SUPPORTS OR OTHER

TYPE OF SUPPORT WIRE.

C. COMPLY WITH NECA FOR INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND

SYSTEMS EXCEPT IF REQUIREMENTS IN THIS SECTION ARE STRICTER.

2.6 CONDUCTORS:

A. CONDUCTORS AS INDICATED AND REQUIRED BY THE DRAWINGS SHALL BEAR THE UL LABEL AND

STAMPING INDICATING CONDUCTOR SIZE, TYPE, VOLTAGE, AND GRADE, AND SHALL MEET THE

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS AND TEST ESTABLISHED FOR SUCH MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION

BY ASTM, NEMA, ANSI, AND IPCEA WHERE APPLICABLE.

B. CONDUCTOR SHALL BE CODE GAUGE, SOFT COPPER, NOT LESS THAN 98% CONDUCTIVITY AND

OF THE 600 VOLT INSULATION UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.

C. COLOR CODE CONDUCTORS IN ACCORDANCE WITH NEC, LOCAL CODES, AND THE FOLLOWING:

1. 120/208 VOLT

PHASE A BLACK

PHASE B RED

PHASE C BLUE

NEUTRAL WHITE

GROUND GREEN

2. 277/480 VOLT

PHASE A BROWN

PHASE B ORANGE

PHASE C YELLOW

NEUTRAL GRAY

GROUND GREEN

D. #10 AWG AND SMALLER CONDUCTORS SHALL BE COLOR CODED BY A CONTINUOUS OUTER

COVERING. CONDUCTORS LARGER THAN #10 AWG MAY BE COLOR CODED BY TAPE OR

CONTINUOUS OUTER COVERING.

E. BRANCH CIRCUITS: TYPE THHN-THWN, SINGLE CONDUCTORS IN RACEWAY.

F. BRANCH CIRCUIT AND FEEDER CONDUCTORS SIZE #10 AWG AND SMALLER SHALL BE SOLID.

BRANCH CIRCUIT AND FEEDER CONDUCTORS SIZE #8 AWG AND LARGER SHALL BE STRANDED.

2.7 CONDUCTOR CONNECTIONS AND DEVICES:

A. MAKE SPLICES IN #8 AWG AND SMALLER WITH INSULATED TWIST-ON WIRE CONNECTORS. MAKE

SPLICES IN #6 AWG AND LARGER WITH CU/AL LISTED COMPRESSION CONNECTORS.

B. DO NOT INSTALL MORE THAN THREE PHASE, ONE NEUTRAL, ONE INSULATED EQUIPMENT

GROUNDING CONDUCTOR AND/OR ISOLATED GROUND CONDUCTORS IN ANY ONE CONDUIT,

UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. ALL CONDUITS SHALL CONTAIN A SEPARATE INSULATED EQUIPMENT

GROUNDING CONDUCTOR.

C. RECEPTACLE DEVICES SHALL BE GROUNDING TYPE COMMERCIAL GRADE AS FOLLOWS:

1. DUPLEX RECEPTACLE 20A 125V, NEMA 5-20R

2. BACK AND SIDE WIRED

3. EXTERIOR DUPLEX 20A 125V, NEMA 5-20R WEATHER RESISTANT GFCI PROTECTED

4. GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER 20A 125V, NEMA 5-20R

D. SWITCHES SHALL BE COMMERCIAL GRADE, BACK AND SIDE WIRED, 120/277V AND 20A RATED.

E. COVER PLATES:

1. WEATHERPROOF WHILE IN USE COVER PLATES SHALL BE CAST METAL. PLASTIC

WEATHERPROOF COVER PLATES WILL NOT BE ALLOWED.

G. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:

1. WIRING DEVICES AND PLATES AS MANUFACTURED BY ARROW HART, P&S, BRYANT, HUBBELL,

LEVITON, GE OR APPROVED EQUALS.

2. DEVICES OR PLATES FOUND NOT TO BE AS SPECIFIED SHALL BE REMOVED AND REPLACED

WITH SPECIFIED DEVICE AT CONTRACTOR'S EXPENSE.

2.8 SAFETY SWITCHES:

A. MANUFACTURERS: SUBJECT TO COMPLIANCE WITH REQUIREMENTS, PROVIDE SWITCHES BY ONE

OF THE FOLLOWING:

1. EATON ELECTRICAL INC.; CUTLER-HAMMER PRODUCTS

2. GENERAL ELECTRIC

3. SIEMENS

4. SQUARE D

B. FURNISH FUSIBLE OR NON-FUSIBLE SWITCHES AS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS. SWITCHES SHALL

BE HORSEPOWER-RATED. INDOOR SWITCHES SHALL BE NEMA 1; OUTDOOR SWITCHES SHALL BE

NEMA 3R, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. SWITCHES SHALL BE RATED FOR THE CONNECTED

SYSTEM VOLTAGE. SWITCHES SHALL BE HEAVY DUTY QUICK MAKE, QUICK BREAK. FURNISH

REJECTION TYPE FUSE HOLDERS AND TYPE R FUSES UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.

2.9 IDENTIFICATION:

A. PROVIDE ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION FOR EACH MOTOR CONTROL CENTER BUCKET, STARTER,

VFD, AND DISCONNECT. MECHANICALLY CONNECT NAMEPLATE WITH STAINLESS-STEEL SCREWS

OR STAINLESS-STEEL MACHINE SCREWS WITH NUTS, FLAT WASHERS, AND LOCK WASHERS.

B. NAMEPLATES

1. NAMEPLATES SHALL BE 4"X1"X1/8" MINIMUM WITH WHITE CORE, BLACK FACE, ACRYLIC OR

MELAMINE WITH ENGRAVED 3/8” MINIMUM LETTERS.

C. PROVIDE PANEL DESIGNATION AND CIRCUIT NUMBER FOR ALL ELECTRICAL JUNCTION BOX

COVERS. PROVIDE SELF-ADHESIVE VINYL LABELS: PREPRINTED, FLEXIBLE LABEL LAMINATED

WITH A CLEAR, WEATHER-AND CHEMICAL-RESISTANT COATING. PERMANENT MARKER IS

ACCEPTABLE FOR ALL JUNCTION BOXES LOCATED ABOVE CEILINGS.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION:

A. COORDINATE:

1. COORDINATE THE INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL WITH THE SCHEDULE AND WORK OF OTHER

TRADES TO PREVENT UNNECESSARY DELAYS AND OR COSTS IN THE TOTAL WORK.

2. COORDINATE WITH MECHANICAL AND OR CONTROLS CONTACTOR FOR TEMPERATURE

CONTROL AND INTERLOCK WIRING REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO SUBMITTING BID PROPOSAL.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS:

A. SECURELY AND RIGIDLY SUPPORT CONDUITS TO SUPER STRUCTURE THROUGHOUT THE WORK.

B. INSTALL RACEWAYS PARALLEL AND PERPENDICULAR TO SURFACES OF STRUCTURAL MEMBERS.

FOLLOW SURFACE CONTOURS, WHERE POSSIBLE, IN EXPOSED AREAS.

C. COMPLY WITH ALL APPLICABLE NECA STANDARDS FOR INSTALLATION OF HANGERS, SUPPORTS

AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS.

D. USE FLEXIBLE METALLIC CONDUIT ONLY FOR SHORT MOTOR CONNECTIONS, OR WHERE SUBJECT

TO VIBRATION.

E. CONDUITS THROUGH PERIMETER BUILDING WALLS SHALL HAVE INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL SEALS.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS:

A. NO CONDUCTOR SHALL BE SMALLER THAN #12 AWG, EXCEPT THAT WIRING FOR SIGNAL AND

PILOT CONTROL CIRCUITS MAY BE #14 AWG, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE.


A. ALL ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS SHALL BE MADE IN ACCORDANCE WITH ARTICLE 110 OF THE NEC.

3.6 IDENTIFICATION AT PANELS:

A. PANEL DIRECTORIES SHALL BE TYPED AND FILLED OUT BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR AFTER

TESTING AND CHECKOUT AND BE MOUNTED IN DIRECTORY FRAME INSIDE OF PANEL DOOR.

PROVIDE ACCURATE TYPED PANELBOARD SCHEDULES IN ALL NEW AND EXISTING PANELS.

MOUNT DIRECTORY BEHIND PLASTIC ON THE INSIDE OF EACH PANEL DOOR. PROVIDE CIRCUIT

NUMBER AND COMPLETE DESCRIPTION OF ALL LOADS ON EACH CIRCUIT.

B. PROVIDE NAMEPLATE ON THE PANELBOARD WITH THE PANEL DESIGNATION, VOLTAGE, PHASE,

AND POWER SOURCE.

3.7 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT:

A. ALL MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT SHALL BE NEW, OF THE SAME TYPE AND MANUFACTURER, AND

SHALL BE FREE FROM DEFECTS. DEFECTIVE AND OR DAMAGED EQUIPMENT SHALL BE REMOVED

FROM THE SITE AND REPLACED WITH NEW AT CONTRACTOR'S EXPENSE.

B. MAKE FINAL ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS TO NEW AND ANY RELOCATED EQUIPMENT.

3.8 GROUNDING:

A. A SEPARATE GREEN INSULATED EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR SHALL BE INSTALLED

WITH THE CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS, WHETHER INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS OR NOT. METAL

RACEWAY, CABLE ARMOR OR SHEATH SHALL NOT BE USED AS THE PREFERRED EQUIPMENT

GROUNDING CONDUCTOR. RACEWAY SYSTEMS SHALL BE MECHANICALLY AND ELECTRICALLY

CONTINUOUS AND SHALL BE BONDED AT ALL POINTS TO THE INSULATED EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

CONDUCTOR IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE APPLICABLE PROVISIONS OF NEC ARTICLE 250.


A. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE A HEAVY DUTY DISCONNECT FOR ALL MOTORS WHICH ARE NOT

PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WITH A UL LISTED DISCONNECT. WHERE NO INTERNAL

OVERLOAD PROTECTION IS PROVIDED, PROVIDE A STARTER (IF REMOTELY CONTROLLED) OR

MOTOR STARTING SWITCH AS REQUIRED. PROVIDE MELTING ALLOY OR ELECTRONIC TRIP

MOTOR OVERLOAD PROTECTION SIZED PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS.

3.10 CUTTING AND PATCHING:

A. THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR CUTTING AND PENETRATING ALL

FLOORS, WALLS, PARTITIONS, CEILINGS OR OTHER CONSTRUCTION REQUIRED FOR PROPER

INSTALLATION OF THEIR WORK. CUTTING AND PENETRATING SHALL COMPLY WITH BUILDING

CODE REQUIREMENTS. NO CUTTING OR PENETRATIONS SHALL BE DONE WITHOUT PRIOR

APPROVAL OF THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER. ALL CUTTING AND PENETRATIONS SHALL BE

PERFORMED AS DIRECTED BY THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER.

B. PROVIDE FIRESTOPPING FOR ALL FIRE RATED WALL, FLOOR AND CEILING PENETRATIONS.

FIRESTOPPING SHALL BE PRODUCED AND INSTALLED TO RESIST SPREAD OF FIRE ACCORDING TO

ASTME OR UL REQUIREMENTS, RESIST PASSAGE OF SMOKE AND OTHER GASES, AND MAINTAIN

ORIGINAL FIRE-RESISTANCE RATING OF CONSTRUCTION PENETRATED.

C. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR PATCHING, PAINTING AND REPAIRING ALL

WALLS, FLOORS AND CEILINGS DAMAGED DURING CONSTRUCTION TO MATCH EXISTING

CONDITIONS.

3.11 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS:

A. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS REQUIRED FOR PROPER

INSTALLATION OF ALL ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.

B. PROVIDE ALL DISCONNECTS AND SAFETY SWITCHES FOR MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING

EQUIPMENT. OVERCURRENT DEVICES FOR HEATING, REFRIGERATION OR AIR CONDITIONING

EQUIPMENT SHALL BE FUSES OR “HACR” RATED CIRCUIT BREAKERS.

C. COMPLY WITH NECA INSTALLATION RECOMMENDATIONS FOR ALL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

INSTALLATIONS.

3.12 TESTS:

A. PERFORM CIRCUIT CONTINUITY TESTS FOR CIRCUITS.

B. TEST MOTORS FOR CORRECT ROTATION.

C. ALL EGRESS AND EXIT FIXTURES SHALL BE TESTED FOR PROPER OPERATION.

D. ANY FAILURE OR UNSATISFACTORY RESULT OF TESTS SHALL BE CORRECTED AND RETESTED, AT

CONTRACTOR'S EXPENSE. REPAIR AND RETEST UNTIL A SATISFACTORY RESULT IS ACHIEVED.

E. ALL TEST RESULTS SHALL BE TYPE-WRITTEN AND INCLUDED WITH THE PROJECT CLOSE OUT

DOCUMENTS.

3.13 PROJECT COMPLETION:

A. UPON COMPLETION OF THE WORK OF THIS SECTION, THOROUGHLY CLEAN ALL EXPOSED

PORTIONS OF THE ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION, REMOVING ALL TRACES OF SOIL, LABELS,

FINGERPRINTS, GREASE, PAINT, DRYWALL COMPOUND, OIL, AND OTHER FOREIGN MATERIAL, AND

USING ONLY THE TYPE CLEANER RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER OF THE ITEM BEING

CLEANED. CLEAN INTERIORS OF ALL PANELBOARDS, TRANSFORMERS, DISCONNECTS AND

OTHER ENCLOSURES. CLEAN ALL LIGHT FIXTURE APERTURES, REFLECTORS, LENSES, EXIT SIGN

FACES, AND ANY OTHER SOILED PORTIONS OF THE LIGHT FIXTURES.

B. THOROUGHLY INDOCTRINATE THE OWNER'S OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL IN THE

CONTENTS OF THE OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL REQUIRED TO BE SUBMITTED BY

THESE DOCUMENTS.

C. PROVIDE A COMPLETE, NEATLY BOUND SET OF AS-BUILT DRAWINGS AND OPERATIONS AND

MAINTENANCE MANUALS TO THE OWNER AND ENGINEER. SUBMIT DOCUMENTS IN ACCORDANCE

WITH THE GENERAL CONDITIONS AND THE FOLLOWING. AS-BUILT DRAWINGS SHALL INDICATE

INSTALLED EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS (DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT, LIGHT FIXTURES, OUTLETS,

SWITCHES, ETC.), INSTALLED WIRING CONNECTIONS (FEEDERS, REVISED CIRCUIT NUMBERS,

ETC.), UPDATED PANEL SCHEDULES, REVISED FIXTURE SCHEDULE INDICATING MODEL NUMBERS

OF INSTALLED FIXTURES INFORMATION, ETC.. AS-BUILTS SHALL BE CREATED BY QUALIFIED

DRAFTING PERSONNEL.

END OF SPECIFICATIONS

ISSUE/ REVISIONS


ENGINEER OF RECORD

PROJECT INFORMATION

A:


FOR:


COLLEGE

DRAWN BY CHECKED BY

PROJECT NO.

PROJECT ADDRESS:

DATE

MJR CAH

OCCC130001001

12/14/2017

7777 S. MAY AVE.


MA

IN B

UIL

DIN

G C

OO

LIN

G T

OW

ER

RE

PL

AC

EM

EN

TO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

CO

MM

UN

ITY

CO

LL

EG

EO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

, OK

PL

OT

TE

D B

Y: M

att R

utko

wski D

AT

E: 1

2/1

4/2

01

7 5

:5

8:3

8 P

M D

WG

N

AM

E: V

:\O

CC

C\C

oo

lin

g T

ow

er R

ep

la

ce

me

nt\D

ra

win

gs\E

00

2.d

wg

LA

ST

S

AV

ED

B

Y: M

ru

tko

wski D

AT

E: 9

/2

5/2

01

7 3

:1

2:1

5 P

M


918.877.6000 918.877.4000 FAX


11/14/201795% REVIEW SET


CA # 3537

EXPIRES 6/30/2018

MATTHEWRUTKOWSKI

28077

L

I

C

EN

S

E

D

P

R

O

F

E

SS

IO

N

A

L

E

N

G

IN

E

E

R

O

K

L

AH

O

M

A


E002

SPECIFICATIONS

ELECTRICAL VFD

SECTION 262923 - VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS OF THE CONTRACT, INCLUDING GENERAL AND SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS

AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SPECIFICATION SECTIONS, APPLY TO THIS SECTION.

1.2 SUMMARY

B. SECTION INCLUDES SEPARATELY ENCLOSED, PREASSEMBLED, COMBINATION VFCS, RATED 600 V AND LESS, FOR SPEED

CONTROL OF THREE-PHASE, SQUIRREL-CAGE INDUCTION MOTORS.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

C. CE: CONFORMITE EUROPEENE (EUROPEAN COMPLIANCE).

D. CPT: CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMER.

E. DDC: DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL.

F. EMI: ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE.

G. LED: LIGHT-EMITTING DIODE.

H. NC: NORMALLY CLOSED.

I. NO: NORMALLY OPEN.

J. OCPD: OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE.

K. PID: CONTROL ACTION, PROPORTIONAL PLUS INTEGRAL PLUS DERIVATIVE.

L. RFI: RADIO-FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE.

M. VFC: VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLER.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. PRODUCT DATA: FOR EACH TYPE AND RATING OF VFC INDICATED.

1. INCLUDE DIMENSIONS AND FINISHES FOR VFCS.

2. INCLUDE RATED CAPACITIES, OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS, ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS, AND FURNISHED

SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES.


A. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA: FOR VFCS TO INCLUDE IN EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS.

1. INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING:

a. MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS FOR TESTING AND ADJUSTING THERMAL-MAGNETIC CIRCUIT

BREAKER AND MOTOR-CIRCUIT PROTECTOR TRIP SETTINGS.

b. MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS FOR SETTING FIELD-ADJUSTABLE OVERLOAD RELAYS.

c. MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND REPROGRAMMING

MICROPROCESSOR CONTROL MODULES.

d. MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS FOR SETTING FIELD-ADJUSTABLE TIMERS, CONTROLS, AND STATUS

AND ALARM POINTS.


A. ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS, DEVICES, AND ACCESSORIES: LISTED AND LABELED AS DEFINED IN NFPA 70, BY A QUALIFIED

TESTING AGENCY, AND MARKED FOR INTENDED LOCATION AND APPLICATION.

B. COMPLY WITH NFPA 70.

1.7 WARRANTY

C. SPECIAL WARRANTY: MANUFACTURER AGREES TO REPAIR OR REPLACE VFCS THAT FAIL IN MATERIALS OR

WORKMANSHIP WITHIN SPECIFIED WARRANTY PERIOD.

2. WARRANTY PERIOD: ONE YEARS FROM DATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. BASIS-OF-DESIGN PRODUCT: SUBJECT TO COMPLIANCE WITH REQUIREMENTS, PROVIDE PRODUCT BY ONE OF THE

FOLLOWING:

1. YASKAWA ELECTRIC AMERICA, INC; DRIVES DIVISION.

2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VFCS:

1. VFCS AND ACCESSORIES: LISTED AND LABELED AS DEFINED IN NFPA 70, BY A QUALIFIED TESTING AGENCY, AND

MARKED FOR INTENDED LOCATION AND APPLICATION.

2. COMPLY WITH NEMA ICS 7, NEMA ICS 61800-2, AND UL 508C

B. APPLICATION: VARIABLE TORQUE

C. VFC DESCRIPTION: VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLER, CONSISTING OF POWER CONVERTER THAT EMPLOYS

PULSE-WIDTH-MODULATED INVERTER, FACTORY BUILT AND TESTED IN AN ENCLOSURE, WITH INTEGRAL DISCONNECTING

MEANS AND OVERCURRENT AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION; LISTED AND LABELED BY AN NRTL AS A COMPLETE UNIT;

ARRANGED TO PROVIDE SELF-PROTECTION, PROTECTION, AND VARIABLE-SPEED CONTROL OF ONE OR MORE

THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS BY ADJUSTING OUTPUT VOLTAGE AND FREQUENCY.

1. UNITS SUITABLE FOR OPERATION OF NEMA MG 1, DESIGN A AND DESIGN B MOTORS, AS DEFINED BY NEMA MG 1,

SECTION IV, PART 30, "APPLICATION CONSIDERATIONS FOR CONSTANT SPEED MOTORS USED ON A SINUSOIDAL BUS

WITH HARMONIC CONTENT AND GENERAL PURPOSE MOTORS USED WITH ADJUSTABLE-VOLTAGE OR

ADJUSTABLE-FREQUENCY CONTROLS OR BOTH."

2. UNITS SUITABLE FOR OPERATION OF INVERTER-DUTY MOTORS AS DEFINED BY NEMA MG 1, SECTION IV, PART 31,

"DEFINITE-PURPOSE INVERTER-FED POLYPHASE MOTORS."

3. LISTED AND LABELED FOR INTEGRATED SHORT-CIRCUIT CURRENT (WITHSTAND) RATING BY AN NRTL ACCEPTABLE TO

AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION.

D. DESIGN AND RATING: MATCH LOAD TYPE, SUCH AS FANS, BLOWERS, AND PUMPS; AND TYPE OF CONNECTION USED

BETWEEN MOTOR AND LOAD SUCH AS DIRECT OR THROUGH A POWER-TRANSMISSION CONNECTION.

E. OUTPUT RATING: THREE PHASE; 10 TO 60 HZ, WITH VOLTAGE PROPORTIONAL TO FREQUENCY THROUGHOUT VOLTAGE

RANGE; MAXIMUM VOLTAGE EQUALS INPUT VOLTAGE.

F. UNIT OPERATING REQUIREMENTS:

1. INPUT AC VOLTAGE TOLERANCE: PLUS 10 AND MINUS 10 PERCENT OF VFC INPUT VOLTAGE RATING.

2. INPUT AC VOLTAGE UNBALANCE: NOT EXCEEDING 3 PERCENT.

3. INPUT FREQUENCY TOLERANCE: PLUS OR MINUS 3 PERCENT OF VFC FREQUENCY RATING.

4. MINIMUM EFFICIENCY: 97 PERCENT AT 60 HZ, FULL LOAD.

5. MINIMUM DISPLACEMENT PRIMARY-SIDE POWER FACTOR: 98 PERCENT UNDER ANY LOAD OR SPEED CONDITION.

6. MINIMUM SHORT-CIRCUIT CURRENT (WITHSTAND) RATING: 65KA.

7. AMBIENT TEMPERATURE RATING: NOT LESS THAN 32 DEG F AND NOT EXCEEDING 104 DEG F.

8. HUMIDITY RATING: LESS THAN 95 PERCENT (NONCONDENSING).

9. ALTITUDE RATING: NOT EXCEEDING 3300 FEET

10. VIBRATION WITHSTAND: COMPLY WITH NEMA ICS 61800-2.

11. OVERLOAD CAPABILITY: 1.1 TIMES THE BASE LOAD CURRENT FOR 60 SECONDS; MINIMUM OF 1.8 TIMES THE BASE

LOAD CURRENT FOR THREE SECONDS.

12. SPEED REGULATION: PLUS OR MINUS 5 PERCENT.

13. OUTPUT CARRIER FREQUENCY: SELECTABLE; 0.5 TO 15 KHZ.

14. STOP MODES: PROGRAMMABLE; INCLUDES FAST, FREE-WHEEL, AND DC INJECTION BRAKING.

G. INVERTER LOGIC: MICROPROCESSOR BASED, 32 BIT, ISOLATED FROM ALL POWER CIRCUITS.

H. ISOLATED CONTROL INTERFACE: ALLOWS VFCS TO FOLLOW REMOTE-CONTROL SIGNAL OVER A MINIMUM 40:1 SPEED

RANGE.

20. SIGNAL: ELECTRICAL

I. INTERNAL ADJUSTABILITY CAPABILITIES:

1. MINIMUM SPEED: 5 TO 25 PERCENT OF MAXIMUM RPM.

2. MAXIMUM SPEED: 80 TO 100 PERCENT OF MAXIMUM RPM.

3. ACCELERATION: 0.1 TO 999.9 SECONDS.

4. DECELERATION: 0.1 TO 999.9 SECONDS.

5. CURRENT LIMIT: 30 TO MINIMUM OF 150 PERCENT OF MAXIMUM RATING.

J. SELF-PROTECTION AND RELIABILITY FEATURES:

1. SURGE SUPPRESSION: FACTORY INSTALLED AS AN INTEGRAL PART OF THE VFC, COMPLYING WITH UL 1449 SPD,

TYPE 1 OR TYPE 2.

2. LOSS OF INPUT SIGNAL PROTECTION: SELECTABLE RESPONSE STRATEGY, INCLUDING SPEED DEFAULT TO A

PERCENT OF THE MOST RECENT SPEED, A PRESET SPEED, OR STOP; WITH ALARM.

3. UNDER- AND OVERVOLTAGE TRIPS.

4. INVERTER OVERCURRENT TRIPS.

5. VFC AND MOTOR-OVERLOAD/OVERTEMPERATURE PROTECTION: MICROPROCESSOR-BASED THERMAL PROTECTION

SYSTEM FOR MONITORING VFCS AND MOTOR THERMAL CHARACTERISTICS, AND FOR PROVIDING VFC

OVERTEMPERATURE AND MOTOR-OVERLOAD ALARM AND TRIP; SETTINGS SELECTABLE VIA THE KEYPAD.

6. CRITICAL FREQUENCY REJECTION, WITH THREE SELECTABLE, ADJUSTABLE DEADBANDS.

7. INSTANTANEOUS LINE-TO-LINE AND LINE-TO-GROUND OVERCURRENT TRIPS.

8. LOSS-OF-PHASE PROTECTION.

9. REVERSE-PHASE PROTECTION.

10. SHORT-CIRCUIT PROTECTION.

11. MOTOR-OVERTEMPERATURE FAULT.

K. AUTOMATIC RESET/RESTART: ATTEMPT THREE RESTARTS AFTER DRIVE FAULT OR ON RETURN OF POWER AFTER AN

INTERRUPTION AND BEFORE SHUTTING DOWN FOR MANUAL RESET OR FAULT CORRECTION; ADJUSTABLE DELAY TIME

BETWEEN RESTART ATTEMPTS.

L. BIDIRECTIONAL AUTOSPEED SEARCH: CAPABLE OF STARTING VFC INTO ROTATING LOADS SPINNING IN EITHER

DIRECTION AND RETURNING MOTOR TO SET SPEED IN PROPER DIRECTION, WITHOUT CAUSING DAMAGE TO DRIVE,

MOTOR, OR LOAD.

M. TORQUE BOOST: AUTOMATICALLY VARIES STARTING AND CONTINUOUS TORQUE TO AT LEAST 1.5 TIMES THE MINIMUM

TORQUE TO ENSURE HIGH-STARTING TORQUE AND INCREASED TORQUE AT SLOW SPEEDS.

N. MOTOR TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION AT SLOW SPEEDS: ADJUSTABLE CURRENT FALL-BACK BASED ON OUTPUT

FREQUENCY FOR TEMPERATURE PROTECTION OF SELF-COOLED, FAN-VENTILATED MOTORS AT SLOW SPEEDS.

O. INTEGRAL INPUT DISCONNECTING MEANS AND OCPD UL 489, THERMAL-MAGNETIC CIRCUIT BREAKER OR NEMA KS 1,

NONFUSIBLE SWITCH, WITH POWER FUSE BLOCK AND CURRENT-LIMITING FUSES WITH PAD-LOCKABLE, DOOR-MOUNTED

HANDLE MECHANISM.

1. DISCONNECT RATING: NOT LESS THAN 115 PERCENT OF NFPA 70 MOTOR FULL-LOAD CURRENT RATING OR VFC INPUT

CURRENT RATING, WHICHEVER IS LARGER.

2. AUXILIARY CONTACTS: NO OR NC, ARRANGED TO ACTIVATE BEFORE SWITCH BLADES OPEN.

3. AUXILIARY CONTACTS "A" AND "B" ARRANGED TO ACTIVATE WITH CIRCUIT-BREAKER HANDLE.

2.3 CONTROLS AND INDICATION

A. PANEL-MOUNTED OPERATOR STATION: MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD FRONT-ACCESSIBLE, SEALED KEYPAD AND

PLAIN-ENGLISH-LANGUAGE DIGITAL DISPLAY; ALLOWS COMPLETE PROGRAMMING, PROGRAM COPYING, OPERATING,

MONITORING, AND DIAGNOSTIC CAPABILITY.

1. KEYPAD: IN ADDITION TO REQUIRED PROGRAMMING AND CONTROL KEYS, INCLUDE KEYS FOR HAND, OFF, AND AUTO

MODES.

B. INDICATING DEVICES: DIGITAL DISPLAY MOUNTED FLUSH IN VFC DOOR AND CONNECTED TO DISPLAY VFC PARAMETERS

INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO:

1. OUTPUT FREQUENCY (HZ).

2. MOTOR SPEED (RPM).

3. MOTOR STATUS (RUNNING, STOP, FAULT).

4. MOTOR CURRENT (AMPERES).

5. MOTOR TORQUE (PERCENT).

6. FAULT OR ALARMING STATUS (CODE).

7. PID FEEDBACK SIGNAL (PERCENT).

8. DC-LINK VOLTAGE (V DC).

9. SET POINT FREQUENCY (HZ).

10. MOTOR OUTPUT VOLTAGE (V AC).

C. CONTROL SIGNAL INTERFACES:

1. ELECTRIC INPUT SIGNAL INTERFACE:

a. A MINIMUM OF TWO PROGRAMMABLE ANALOG INPUTS: 0- TO 10-V DC 4- TO 20-MA DC

b. A MINIMUM OF SIX MULTIFUNCTION PROGRAMMABLE DIGITAL INPUTS.

2. REMOTE SIGNAL INPUTS: CAPABILITY TO ACCEPT ANY OF THE FOLLOWING SPEED-SETTING INPUT SIGNALS FROM THE

DDC SYSTEM FOR HVAC OR OTHER CONTROL SYSTEMS:

a. 0- TO 10-V DC.

b. 4- TO 20-MA DC.

c. POTENTIOMETER USING UP/DOWN DIGITAL INPUTS.

d. FIXED FREQUENCIES USING DIGITAL INPUTS.

3. OUTPUT SIGNAL INTERFACE: A MINIMUM OF ONE PROGRAMMABLE ANALOG OUTPUT SIGNAL(S) (0- TO 10-V DC 4- TO

20-MA DC), WHICH CAN BE CONFIGURED FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING:

a. OUTPUT FREQUENCY (HZ).

b. OUTPUT CURRENT (LOAD).

c. DC-LINK VOLTAGE (V DC).

d. MOTOR TORQUE (PERCENT).

e. MOTOR SPEED (RPM).

f. SET POINT FREQUENCY (HZ).

4. REMOTE INDICATION INTERFACE: A MINIMUM OF TWO PROGRAMMABLE DRY-CIRCUIT RELAY OUTPUTS (120-V AC, 1 A)

FOR REMOTE INDICATION OF THE FOLLOWING:

a. MOTOR RUNNING.

b. SET POINT SPEED REACHED.

c. FAULT AND WARNING INDICATION (OVERTEMPERATURE OR OVERCURRENT).

d. PID HIGH- OR LOW-SPEED LIMITS REACHED.

D. INTERFACE WITH DDC SYSTEM FOR HVAC: FACTORY-INSTALLED HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE SHALL INTERFACE WITH

DDC SYSTEM FOR HVAC TO MONITOR, CONTROL, DISPLAY, AND RECORD DATA FOR USE IN PROCESSING REPORTS. VFC

SETTINGS SHALL BE RETAINED WITHIN VFC'S NONVOLATILE MEMORY.

5. COMMUNICATION INTERFACE: COMPLY WITH ASHRAE 135 COMMUNICATION SHALL INTERFACE WITH DDC SYSTEM

FOR HVAC TO REMOTELY CONTROL AND MONITOR LIGHTING FROM A DDC SYSTEM FOR HVAC OPERATOR

WORKSTATION. CONTROL FEATURES AND MONITORING POINTS DISPLAYED LOCALLY AT LIGHTING PANEL SHALL BE

AVAILABLE THROUGH THE DDC SYSTEM FOR HVAC.

2.4 LINE CONDITIONING AND FILTERING

A. INPUT LINE CONDITIONING: PROVIDE THREE PERCENT DC CHOKE LINE REACTOR ON A SIX PULSE VFC, OR EQUAL.

B. EMI/RFI FILTERING: CE MARKED; CERTIFY COMPLIANCE WITH IEC 61800-3 FOR CATEGORY C2.

2.5 BYPASS SYSTEMS

A. BYPASS OPERATION: SAFELY TRANSFERS MOTOR BETWEEN POWER CONVERTER OUTPUT AND BYPASS CIRCUIT,

MANUALLY, AUTOMATICALLY, OR BOTH. SELECTOR SWITCHES SET MODES AND INDICATOR LIGHTS INDICATE MODE

SELECTED. UNIT IS CAPABLE OF STABLE OPERATION (STARTING, STOPPING, AND RUNNING) WITH MOTOR COMPLETELY

DISCONNECTED FROM POWER CONVERTER.

B. BYPASS MODE: FIELD-SELECTABLE AUTOMATIC OR MANUAL, ALLOWS LOCAL AND REMOTE TRANSFER BETWEEN POWER

CONVERTER AND BYPASS CONTACTOR AND RETRANSFER, EITHER VIA MANUAL OPERATOR INTERFACE OR

AUTOMATIC-CONTROL SYSTEM FEEDBACK.

C. BYPASS CONTROLLER: THREE-CONTACTOR-STYLE BYPASS ALLOWS MOTOR OPERATION VIA THE POWER CONVERTER OR

THE BYPASS CONTROLLER; WITH INPUT ISOLATING SWITCH AND BARRIER ARRANGED TO ISOLATE THE POWER

CONVERTER INPUT AND OUTPUT AND PERMIT SAFE TESTING AND TROUBLESHOOTING OF THE POWER CONVERTER,

BOTH ENERGIZED AND DE-ENERGIZED, WHILE MOTOR IS OPERATING IN BYPASS MODE.

1. BYPASS CONTACTOR: LOAD-BREAK, IEC-RATED CONTACTOR.

2. INPUT AND OUTPUT ISOLATING CONTACTORS: NON-LOAD-BREAK, IEC-RATED CONTACTORS..

3. ISOLATING SWITCH: NON-LOAD-BREAK SWITCH ARRANGED TO ISOLATE POWER CONVERTER AND PERMIT SAFE

TROUBLESHOOTING AND TESTING OF THE POWER CONVERTER, BOTH ENERGIZED AND DE-ENERGIZED, WHILE

MOTOR IS OPERATING IN BYPASS MODE; PAD-LOCKABLE, DOOR-MOUNTED HANDLE MECHANISM.

D. BYPASS CONTACTOR CONFIGURATION: FULL-VOLTAGE (ACROSS-THE-LINE) TYPE.

1. NORMAL/BYPASS SELECTOR SWITCH.

2. HAND/OFF/AUTO SELECTOR SWITCH.

3. NORMAL/TEST SELECTOR SWITCH: ALLOWS TESTING AND ADJUSTING OF VFC WHILE THE MOTOR IS RUNNING IN THE

BYPASS MODE.

4. CONTACTOR COILS: PRESSURE-ENCAPSULATED TYPE WITH COIL TRANSIENT SUPPRESSORS.

a. OPERATING VOLTAGE: DEPENDING ON CONTACTOR NEMA SIZE AND LINE-VOLTAGE RATING, MANUFACTURER'S

STANDARD MATCHING CONTROL POWER OR LINE VOLTAGE.

b. POWER CONTACTS: TOTALLY ENCLOSED, DOUBLE BREAK, AND SILVER-CADMIUM OXIDE; ASSEMBLED TO ALLOW

INSPECTION AND REPLACEMENT WITHOUT DISTURBING LINE OR LOAD WIRING.

5. CONTROL CIRCUITS: 120-V AC; OBTAINED FROM INTEGRAL CPT, WITH PRIMARY AND SECONDARY FUSES WITH CPT OF

SUFFICIENT CAPACITY TO OPERATE ALL INTEGRAL DEVICES AND REMOTELY LOCATED PILOT, INDICATING, AND

CONTROL DEVICES.

6. OVERLOAD RELAYS: NEMA ICS 2.

a. BIMETALLIC OVERLOAD RELAYS:

1) INVERSE-TIME-CURRENT CHARACTERISTIC.

2) CLASS 20 TRIPPING CHARACTERISTIC.

3) HEATERS IN EACH PHASE MATCHED TO NAMEPLATE FULL-LOAD CURRENT OF ACTUAL PROTECTED MOTOR

AND WITH APPROPRIATE ADJUSTMENT FOR DUTY CYCLE.

4) AMBIENT COMPENSATED.

5) AUTOMATIC RESETTING.

b. EXTERNAL OVERLOAD, RESET PUSH BUTTON.

2.5 OPTIONAL FEATURES

A. MOTOR PREHEAT FUNCTION: PREHEATS MOTOR WHEN IDLE TO PREVENT MOISTURE ACCUMULATION IN THE MOTOR.

2.6 ENCLOSURES

A. VFC ENCLOSURES: NEMA 250, TO COMPLY WITH ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS AT INSTALLED LOCATION.

6. DRY AND CLEAN INDOOR LOCATIONS: TYPE 1

B. PLENUM RATING: UL 1995; NRTL CERTIFICATION LABEL ON ENCLOSURE, CLEARLY IDENTIFYING VFC AS "PLENUM RATED."

2.7 ACCESSORIES

A. PHASE-FAILURE, PHASE-REVERSAL, AND UNDERVOLTAGE AND OVERVOLTAGE RELAYS: SOLID-STATE SENSING CIRCUIT

WITH ISOLATED OUTPUT CONTACTS FOR HARD-WIRED CONNECTIONS. PROVIDE ADJUSTABLE UNDERVOLTAGE,

OVERVOLTAGE, AND TIME-DELAY SETTINGS.

1. CURRENT TRANSFORMERS: CONTINUOUS CURRENT RATING, BASIC IMPULSE INSULATING LEVEL (BIL) RATING,

BURDEN, AND ACCURACY CLASS SUITABLE FOR CONNECTED CIRCUITRY. COMPLY WITH IEEE C57.13.

2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. TESTING: TEST AND INSPECT VFCS ACCORDING TO REQUIREMENTS IN NEMA ICS 61800-2.

1. TEST EACH VFC WHILE CONNECTED TO ITS SPECIFIED MOTOR.

2. VERIFICATION OF PERFORMANCE: RATE VFCS ACCORDING TO OPERATION OF FUNCTIONS AND FEATURES SPECIFIED.

B. VFCS WILL BE CONSIDERED DEFECTIVE IF THEY DO NOT PASS TESTS AND INSPECTIONS.

C. PREPARE TEST AND INSPECTION REPORTS.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. EXAMINE AREAS, SURFACES, AND SUBSTRATES TO RECEIVE VFCS, WITH INSTALLER PRESENT, FOR COMPLIANCE WITH

REQUIREMENTS FOR INSTALLATION TOLERANCES AND OTHER CONDITIONS AFFECTING PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK.

B. EXAMINE VFC BEFORE INSTALLATION. REJECT VFCS THAT ARE WET, MOISTURE DAMAGED, OR MOLD DAMAGED.

C. EXAMINE ROUGHING-IN FOR CONDUIT SYSTEMS TO VERIFY ACTUAL LOCATIONS OF CONDUIT CONNECTIONS BEFORE VFC

INSTALLATION.

D. PROCEED WITH INSTALLATION ONLY AFTER UNSATISFACTORY CONDITIONS HAVE BEEN CORRECTED.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. WALL-MOUNTING CONTROLLERS: INSTALL WITH TOPS AT UNIFORM HEIGHT AND WITH DISCONNECT OPERATING HANDLES

NOT HIGHER THAN 79 INCHES ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR, UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED, AND BY BOLTING UNITS TO WALL

OR MOUNTING ON LIGHTWEIGHT STRUCTURAL-STEEL CHANNELS BOLTED TO WALL.

B. TEMPORARY LIFTING PROVISIONS: REMOVE TEMPORARY LIFTING EYES, CHANNELS, AND BRACKETS AND TEMPORARY

BLOCKING OF MOVING PARTS FROM ENCLOSURES AND COMPONENTS.

C. INSTALL FUSES IN EACH FUSIBLE-SWITCH VFC.

D. INSTALL FUSES IF NOT FACTORY INSTALLED.

E. INSTALL HEATERS IN THERMAL-OVERLOAD RELAYS. SELECT HEATERS BASED ON ACTUAL NAMEPLATE FULL-LOAD

AMPERES AFTER MOTORS ARE INSTALLED.

F. INSTALL, CONNECT, AND FUSE THERMAL-PROTECTOR MONITORING RELAYS FURNISHED WITH MOTOR-DRIVEN

EQUIPMENT.

G. COMPLY WITH NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. IDENTIFY VFCS, COMPONENTS, AND CONTROL WIRING. COMPLY WITH REQUIREMENTS FOR IDENTIFICATION.

1. IDENTIFY FIELD-INSTALLED CONDUCTORS, INTERCONNECTING WIRING, AND COMPONENTS; PROVIDE WARNING

SIGNS.

2. LABEL EACH VFC WITH ENGRAVED NAMEPLATE.


A. MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICE: ENGAGE A FACTORY-AUTHORIZED SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE TO TEST AND INSPECT

COMPONENTS, ASSEMBLIES, AND EQUIPMENT INSTALLATIONS, INCLUDING CONNECTIONS..

B. TESTS AND INSPECTIONS:

1. INSPECT VFC, WIRING, COMPONENTS, CONNECTIONS, AND EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION. TEST AND ADJUST

CONTROLLERS, COMPONENTS, AND EQUIPMENT.

2. TEST INSULATION RESISTANCE FOR EACH VFC ELEMENT, COMPONENT, CONNECTING MOTOR SUPPLY, FEEDER, AND

CONTROL CIRCUITS.

3. TEST CONTINUITY OF EACH CIRCUIT.

4. VERIFY THAT VOLTAGES AT VFC LOCATIONS ARE WITHIN 10 PERCENT OF MOTOR NAMEPLATE RATED VOLTAGES. IF

OUTSIDE THIS RANGE FOR ANY MOTOR, NOTIFY CONSTRUCTION MANAGER BEFORE STARTING THE MOTOR(S).

5. TEST EACH MOTOR FOR PROPER PHASE ROTATION.

6. PERFORM TESTS ACCORDING TO THE INSPECTION AND TEST PROCEDURES FOR ADJUSTABLE SPEED DRIVES STATED

IN NETA ACCEPTANCE TESTING SPECIFICATION. CERTIFY COMPLIANCE WITH TEST PARAMETERS.

7. CORRECT MALFUNCTIONING UNITS ON-SITE, WHERE POSSIBLE, AND RETEST TO DEMONSTRATE COMPLIANCE;

OTHERWISE, REPLACE WITH NEW UNITS AND RETEST.

8. TEST AND ADJUST CONTROLS, REMOTE MONITORING, AND SAFETIES. REPLACE DAMAGED AND MALFUNCTIONING

CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT.

C. VFCS WILL BE CONSIDERED DEFECTIVE IF THEY DO NOT PASS TESTS AND INSPECTIONS..

3.5 STARTUP SERVICE

A. PERFORM STARTUP SERVICE.

1. COMPLETE INSTALLATION AND STARTUP CHECKS ACCORDING TO MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. PROGRAM MICROPROCESSORS FOR REQUIRED OPERATIONAL SEQUENCES, STATUS INDICATIONS, ALARMS, EVENT

RECORDING, AND DISPLAY FEATURES. CLEAR EVENTS MEMORY AFTER FINAL ACCEPTANCE TESTING AND PRIOR TO

SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. TEMPORARY HEATING: APPLY TEMPORARY HEAT TO MAINTAIN TEMPERATURE ACCORDING TO MANUFACTURER'S

WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS UNTIL CONTROLLERS ARE READY TO BE ENERGIZED AND PLACED INTO SERVICE.

B. REPLACE VFCS WHOSE INTERIORS HAVE BEEN EXPOSED TO WATER OR OTHER LIQUIDS PRIOR TO SUBSTANTIAL

COMPLETION.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. TRAIN OWNER'S MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL TO ADJUST, OPERATE, REPROGRAM, AND MAINTAIN VFCS.



CT-4 TO BE REMOVED

CT-3 TO BE REMOVED

EXISTING ELECTRICAL TRANSFORMERS AND EQUIPMENT TO REMAIN

1

1

CT-2 TO BE REMOVED1

EXISTING COOLING TOWER TO REMAIN

EXISTING EXHAUST FANS TO REMAIN


ISSUE/ REVISIONS


ENGINEER OF RECORD

PROJECT INFORMATION

A:


FOR:


COLLEGE

DRAWN BY CHECKED BY

PROJECT NO.

PROJECT ADDRESS:

DATE

MJR CAH

OCCC130001001

12/14/2017

7777 S. MAY AVE.


MA

IN B

UIL

DIN

G C

OO

LIN

G T

OW

ER

RE

PL

AC

EM

EN

TO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

CO

MM

UN

ITY

CO

LL

EG

EO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

, OK

PL

OT

TE

D B

Y: M

att R

utko

wski D

AT

E: 1

2/1

4/2

01

7 5

:5

8:4

0 P

M D

WG

N

AM

E: V

:\O

CC

C\C

oo

lin

g T

ow

er R

ep

la

ce

me

nt\D

ra

win

gs\E

D1

01

.d

wg

LA

ST

S

AV

ED

B

Y: M

ru

tko

wski D

AT

E: 1

2/1

4/2

01

7 8

:1

4:3

6 A

M


918.877.6000 918.877.4000 FAX


11/14/201795% REVIEW SET


CA # 3537

EXPIRES 6/30/2018

MATTHEWRUTKOWSKI

28077

L

I

C

EN

S

E

D

P

R

O

F

E

SS

IO

N

A

L

E

N

G

IN

E

E

R

O

K

L

AH

O

M

A


ED101

DEMOLITION PLAN

ELECTRICAL ROOF/ SITE

1. DISCONNECT EXISTING EQUIPMENT. REMOVE ASSOCIATED

DISCONNECTS, JUNCTION BOXES, CONDUIT, AND

CONDUCTORS BACK TO ORIGINATING SOURCE. INTERIOR

CONDUIT MAY BE REUSED IF IT MEETS THE INTENT OF THE

NEW WORK.

KEY NOTES

N

A. CONTRACTOR SHALL VISIT THE SITE, PRIOR TO BID, TO EVALUATE SCOPE OF

DEMOLITION AND EXISTING CONDITIONS.

B. CONTRACTOR SHALL MAINTAIN EXISTING ELECTRICAL SERVICE FOR ALL AREAS

OUTSIDE OF THE SCOPE OF WORK AREA THROUGHOUT THE PROJECT, UNLESS

SCHEDULED AND AGREED TO IN WRITING WITH THE OWNER/CLIENT. CONTRACTOR

SHALL PROVIDE A MINIMUM OF TWO WEEKS NOTICE TO OWNER/CLIENT FOR ALL

SHUTDOWNS.

C. REFER TO MECHANICAL DOCUMENTS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ABOUT ITEMS

TO BE DEMOLISHED.

D. CONDUCTORS AND RACEWAYS ASSOCIATED WITH EQUIPMENT/DEVICES TO BE

REMOVED SHALL BE REMOVED. RACEWAYS SHALL BE REMOVED TO THE NEXT

DEVICE, JUNCTION BOX, OR OVERCURRENT DEVICE. ALL RACEWAYS IN

INACCESSIBLE CONCEALED AREAS MAY REMAIN. ALL CONDUCTORS SHALL BE

REMOVED TO THE OVERCURRENT DEVICE, UNLESS USED FOR NEW OR EXISTING

TO REMAIN EQUIPMENT/DEVICES.

E. CONTRACTOR SHALL CONFIRM IF THERE ARE ANY DEVICES TO REMAIN ON THE

CIRCUITS THAT ARE SCHEDULED TO HAVE EQUIPMENT/DEVICES DEMOLISHED.

CONTRACTOR SHALL UPDATE PANEL SCHEDULES ACCORDINGLY. IF ALL

EQUIPMENT/DEVICES HAVE BEEN REMOVED FROM A CIRCUIT THEN THE

OVERCURRENT DEVICE SHALL BE TURNED OFF AND LABELED AS “SPARE”.

F. COORDINATE THE OWNERSHIP OF ALL DEMOLISHED ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT WITH

THE OWNER/CLIENT, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO: DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT.

ALL EQUIPMENT TO BE RETURNED TO THE OWNER/CLIENT SHALL BE PALLETIZED

AND DELIVERED TO THE OWNER/CLIENT'S LOCATION BY THE CONTRACTOR.

G. CONTRACTOR SHALL DISPOSE OF ALL EQUIPMENT/DEVICES IN ACCORDANCE WITH

APPLICABLE GOVERNMENT STANDARDS.

H. CUT ABANDONED BELOW GRADE CONDUIT OFF FLUSH OR BELOW FLOOR AND FILL

WITH NON-SHRINK GROUT.

I. HOLES LEFT BY REMOVAL OF ELECTRICAL DEVICES, BOXES, ENCLOSURES, ETC IN

EXISTING TO REMAIN WALLS SHALL BE PATCHED.

J. SEAL ALL PENETRATIONS THROUGH FIRE-RATED WALLS AND FLOORS WITH

FIREPROOFING MATERIAL EQUAL TO THE FIRE RATING OF THE WALL OR FLOOR.

K. RELOCATE LIGHTS, CONDUITS, BOXES, ETC AS REQUIRED.

DEMOLITION NOTES


EXISTING CT-1


EXISTING GENERATOR

NEW CT-2

NEW CT-3

PPSB1

1

1

LC-4

WP

VIBRATION SENSOR

VIBRATION SENSOR

ALL COOLING TOWER MOTOR

CIRCUITS SHALL BE:

3-#8, 1-#10GND., UON

VFD CABLE GENERAL CABLE

#4580 CVTC OR EQUAL IN 1 1/4"C.

GROUND CABLE SHIELD PER

MANUFACTURER

RECOMMENDATIONS. PROVIDE

LONG RADIUS 90'S. DO NOT

EXCEED MINIMUM BEND RADIUS.

CT-2 VFD

SUPPORT

FROM STEEL

STRUCTURE

EXISTING EXHAUST FANS

2

2

LC-4

WP

BASIN HEATER

3

SUPPORT

FROM STEEL

STRUCTURE

CT-1 VFD

3#10, 1#10GND., 3/4" C.

LC-6

4

ISSUE/ REVISIONS


ENGINEER OF RECORD

PROJECT INFORMATION

A:


FOR:


COLLEGE

DRAWN BY CHECKED BY

PROJECT NO.

PROJECT ADDRESS:

DATE

MJR CAH

OCCC130001001

12/14/2017

7777 S. MAY AVE.


MA

IN B

UIL

DIN

G C

OO

LIN

G T

OW

ER

RE

PL

AC

EM

EN

TO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

CO

MM

UN

ITY

CO

LL

EG

EO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

, OK

PL

OT

TE

D B

Y: M

att R

utko

wski D

AT

E: 1

2/1

4/2

01

7 5

:5

8:4

1 P

M D

WG

N

AM

E: V

:\O

CC

C\C

oo

lin

g T

ow

er R

ep

la

ce

me

nt\D

ra

win

gs\E

10

1.d

wg

LA

ST

S

AV

ED

B

Y: M

ru

tko

wski D

AT

E: 1

2/1

1/2

01

7 1

1:1

2:2

2 A

M


918.877.6000 918.877.4000 FAX


11/14/201795% REVIEW SET


CA # 3537

EXPIRES 6/30/2018

MATTHEWRUTKOWSKI

28077

L

I

C

EN

S

E

D

P

R

O

F

E

SS

IO

N

A

L

E

N

G

IN

E

E

R

O

K

L

AH

O

M

A


E101

PLAN

ELECTRICAL ROOF

1. ALL MATERIAL SHALL FIT THE SPACE AVAILABLE. VERIFY

DIMENSIONS AND CLEARANCES AT BUILDING PRIOR TO

ORDERING. ALL WORKING CLEARANCES AT ELECTRICAL

EQUIPMENT SHALL BE MAINTAINED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE

NEC. COORDINATE WITH OTHER TRADES AS REQUIRED.

2. REFER TO MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT

REQUIRING ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS. NOTIFY ENGINEER, IN

WRITING, TEN DAYS PRIOR TO BID IF MECHANICAL DOCUMENTS

REQUIRE ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS THAT ARE NOT INDICATED

ON ELECTRICAL DOCUMENTS.

3. ELECTRICAL DISCONNECTS, STARTERS, DEVICES, OR RACEWAYS

MOUNTED ON OR ADJACENT TO EQUIPMENT SHALL NOT IMPEDE

ACCESS TO THAT EQUIPMENT. DISCONNECTS AND STARTERS

SHALL BE INSTALLED IN A LOCATION TO MEET THE NEC WORKING

SPACE REQUIREMENTS.

4. LABEL ALL DISCONNECTS, STARTERS, VARIABLE FREQUENCY

DRIVES WITH EQUIPMENT DESIGNATION, SERVING PANELBOARD

DESIGNATION AND CIRCUIT NUMBER. INTERIOR EQUIPMENT MAY

BE LABELED WITH SELF-ADHESIVE VINYL LABELS THAT ARE

PREPRINTED, FLEXIBLE, LAMINATED WITH A CLEAR,

WEATHER-AND CHEMICAL-RESISTANT COATING. EXTERIOR

EQUIPMENT SHALL BE LABELED WITH SCREW RETAINED, UV

STABILIZED PHENOLIC LABELS.

5. COORDINATE WITH MECHANICAL FOR ELECTRICAL CONTROLS

WORK NOT PART OF CONTROLS CONTRACTOR SCOPE OF WORK.

6. ALL BRANCH CIRCUITS LARGER THAN 20A SHALL BE INSTALLED IN

DEDICATED CONDUITS.

7. SLEEVE ALL WALL, FLOOR AND CEILING PENETRATIONS FOR

CABLE INSTALLATIONS. SUPPORT SLEEVES ACCORDINGLY.

FIRESTOP AROUND AND IN SLEEVES AS REQUIRED. FIRESTOP

MATERIAL IN SLEEVE SHALL BE REMOVABLE FOR FUTURE

INSTALLATION OF CABLES.

8. CONTRACTOR SHALL REVIEW CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, , MECHANICAL DRAWINGS,

STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. DO NOT SCALE OR DIMENSION

LOCATIONS FROM THESE DRAWINGS.

9. ALL 15A AND 20A, 120V CIRCUITS WITH CIRCUIT LENGTH GREATER

THAN 100' SHALL BE #10 AWG MINIMUM.

10. A SEPARATE GREEN INSULATED EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

CONDUCTOR SHALL BE INSTALLED WITH THE CIRCUIT

CONDUCTORS, WHETHER INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS OR NOT.

METAL RACEWAY, CABLE ARMOR OR SHEATH SHALL NOT BE USED

AS THE PREFERRED EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR.

RACEWAY SYSTEMS SHALL BE MECHANICALLY AND

ELECTRICALLY CONTINUOUS AND SHALL BE BONDED AT ALL

POINTS TO THE INSULATED EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR

IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE APPLICABLE PROVISIONS OF NEC

ARTICLE 250.

11. THE WORD "PROVIDE" AS USED IN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

SHALL MEAN TO FURNISH AND INSTALL, UNLESS OTHERWISE

NOTED.

12. CONTRACTOR SHALL UPDATE ALL PANELBOARD DIRECTORIES

WITH ALL NEW AND REMOVED CIRCUITS. DIRECTORIES SHALL BE

TYPED. ALL SPARE CIRCUIT BREAKERS SHALL BE LABELED AS

“SPARE” AND TURNED OFF.

13. ALL EQUIPMENT/DEVICES (INCLUDING LIGHTING ASSEMBLIES)

SHALL BE UNDERWRITER LABORATORY (OR OTHER APPROVED

NATIONALLY RECOGNIZED TESTING LABORATORY) LISTED AND

LABELED FOR INSTALLATION AND INTENDED USE.

14. PROVIDE DEDICATED NEUTRALS FOR GFCI CIRCUITS. GFCI

OUTLETS ARE SHOWN FOR ALL OUTLETS REQUIRED TO BE

PROTECTED, HOWEVER, ONLY ONE GFCI DEVICE ON EACH

CIRCUIT MAY BE INSTALLED TO PROTECT THE GFCI OUTLETS

SHOWN. LOCATE GFCI DEVICE IN CIRCUIT TO PROTECT ALL GFCI

OUTLETS SHOWN. GFCI SHALL HAVE A 4-6 mA TRIP.

15. NEW CIRCUIT BREAKERS IN EXISTING PANELS SHALL MATCH THE

EXISTING CIRCUIT BREAKERS MANUFACTURER AND AIC RATING.

GENERAL NOTES

N

1. PROVIDE POWER CONNECTION TO MOTOR CIRCUIT

PROTECTION PANEL FURNISHED WITH TOWER. MAKE FINAL

CONNECTIONS TO MOTORS.

2. PROVIDE POWER CONNECTION PER MANUFACTURER

RECOMENDATIONS.

3. CONNECT TO EXISTING SPARE 20A CIRCUIT BREAKER IN

SWITCHBOARD.

4. PROVIDE POWER CONNECTION(S) TO HEAT TRACE

CONTROLLER(S). REFER TO MECHANICAL FOR ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION. PROVIDE QUANTITY OF CONNECTIONS AS

REQUIRED. MULTIPLE CONNECTIONS MAY SHARE THE SAME

CIRCUIT. CONNECT TO GFEP CIRCUIT BREAKER.

KEY NOTES

EXTEND AND PROVIDE NEW LIGHTNING

PROTECTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS FOR

THE NEW COOLING TOWER ON ROOF.

CONNECT TO EXISTING LIGHTNING

PROTECTION SYSTEM. FURNISH AND INSTALL

IN ACCORDANCE WITH NFPA 780, AND UL

REQUIREMENTS. MECHANICAL GROUND AND

LIGHTING PROTECTION BONDING SHALL BE IN

ACCORDANCE WITH NFPA 70.

ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS

ASSORTED RACEWAY SYMBOLS

DISTRIBUTION SYMBOLS

XXX-XX

JUNCTION BOX,

WITH CIRCUIT NUMBER

VFD

RECEPTACLE SYMBOLS

VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE

GFCI RECEPTACLE, DUPLEX, WITH

WEATHERPROOF CAST IN-USE COVER

NON FUSED DISCONNECT

HOMERUN WITH PANEL AND CIRCUIT

NUMBER INDICATEDLA-1

WP

EXISTING SWITCHBOARD "PPSB2"

EXISTING MCC "PPMCC2"



EXISTING CDWP-3

VFD

CT-2 VFD

CT-3 VFD

1

1

2

EXISTING LOAD CENTER LC3

CIRCUIT TO "PPMCC2"

VFD

4

5

7

8

REFER TO ROOF PLAN

FOR CIRCUIT SIZE FROM

VFD TO MOTOR

3#8,1#10GND.,3/4"C

NEW CDWP-3

6

PPMCC2

3-#4,1-#8GND.,1"C.

REMOVE CDWP-3

DISCONNECT

NEW SIDE STREAM FILTER (ALTERNATE)

VFD

11

PPMCC2

MAKE CONNECTION TO FACTORY FURNISHED STARTER/DISCONNECT

EXISTING CDWP-69

10

3#12, 1-#12 GND., 1/2"C.

AS PART OF ALTERNATE FOR SIDE STREAM

FILTER, CDWP-3 HORSEPOWER INCREASES.

PROVIDE VFD RATED FOR INCREASED HP, 100A

CIRCUIT BREAKER IN PPMCC2, AND LARGER

CIRCUIT, 3#3, 1-#8, 1" C.

ISSUE/ REVISIONS


ENGINEER OF RECORD

PROJECT INFORMATION

A:


FOR:


COLLEGE

DRAWN BY CHECKED BY

PROJECT NO.

PROJECT ADDRESS:

DATE

MJR CAH

OCCC130001001

12/14/2017

7777 S. MAY AVE.


MA

IN B

UIL

DIN

G C

OO

LIN

G T

OW

ER

RE

PL

AC

EM

EN

TO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

CO

MM

UN

ITY

CO

LL

EG

EO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

, OK

PL

OT

TE

D B

Y: M

att R

utko

wski D

AT

E: 1

2/1

4/2

01

7 5

:5

8:4

1 P

M D

WG

N

AM

E: V

:\O

CC

C\C

oo

lin

g T

ow

er R

ep

la

ce

me

nt\D

ra

win

gs\E

10

2.d

wg

LA

ST

S

AV

ED

B

Y: M

ru

tko

wski D

AT

E: 1

2/1

1/2

01

7 1

1:1

5:2

7 A

M


918.877.6000 918.877.4000 FAX


11/14/201795% REVIEW SET


CA # 3537

EXPIRES 6/30/2018

MATTHEWRUTKOWSKI

28077

L

I

C

EN

S

E

D

P

R

O

F

E

SS

IO

N

A

L

E

N

G

IN

E

E

R

O

K

L

AH

O

M

A


E102

FLOOR PLAN

ELECTRICAL GROUND

1. INSTALL NEW VFD FURNISHED WITH TOWER.

2. REMOVE EXISTING CT-2 AND CT-4 STARTER BUCKETS.

REPLACE WITH GE E9000 SERIES CIRCUIT BREAKER BUCKET

WITH 50A/3P CIRCUIT BREAKER. PROVIDE ORIGINAL

MANUFACTURER MOUNTING AND INSTALLATION HARDWARE,

CLOSURE PLATES, AND TRIM PIECES AS REQUIRED TO

COMPLETE THE INSTALLATION. FIELD FABRICATED HARDWARE

SHALL NOT BE ACCEPTABLE. LABEL CIRCUIT BREAKERS WITH

THE NEW LOADS.

3. PROVIDE ONE NEW 20A/1P CIRCUIT BREAKER FOR SERVICE

RECEPTACLES AND ONE 30A/1P GFEP CIRCUIT BREAKER FOR

HEAT TRACE IN EXISTING LOAD CENTER.

4. REMOVE EXISTING CDWP-3 STARTER BUCKET. REPLACE WITH

GE E9000 SERIES CIRCUIT BREAKER BUCKET WITH 70A/3P

CIRCUIT BREAKER. PROVIDE ORIGINAL MANUFACTURER

MOUNTING AND INSTALLATION HARDWARE, CLOSURE PLATES,

AND TRIM PIECES AS REQUIRED TO COMPLETE THE

INSTALLATION. FIELD FABRICATED HARDWARE SHALL NOT BE

ACCEPTABLE. LABEL CIRCUIT BREAKER WITH THE NEW LOAD.

5. REMOVE EXISTING CT-3 VFD AND RETURN TO OWNER.

6. PROVIDE NEW VFD. REFER TO MECH SCHEDULES FOR HP

RATING. REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS FOR ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION. PROVIDE NEW CIRCUIT AS SHOWN.





NEW WORK.

8. PROVIDE A VFD LINE SIDEDV/DT FILTER, TCI VIK OR EQUAL.

SIZE FILTER PER MANUFACTURER RECOMMENDATIONS.

9. DISCONNECT EXISTING EQUIPMENT. RETAIN CIRCUIT FOR

REUSE.








11. EXTEND CIRCUIT FROM DISCONNECTED CDWP-6.

KEY NOTES

N

ISSUE/ REVISIONS


ENGINEER OF RECORD

PROJECT INFORMATION

A:


FOR:


COLLEGE

DRAWN BY CHECKED BY

PROJECT NO.

PROJECT ADDRESS:

DATE

MJR CAH

OCCC130001001

12/14/2017

7777 S. MAY AVE.


MA

IN B

UIL

DIN

G C

OO

LIN

G T

OW

ER

RE

PL

AC

EM

EN

TO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

CO

MM

UN

ITY

CO

LL

EG

EO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

, OK

PL

OT

TE

D B

Y: M

att R

utko

wski D

AT

E: 1

2/1

4/2

01

7 5

:5

8:3

5 P

M D

WG

N

AM

E: V

:\O

CC

C\C

oo

lin

g T

ow

er R

ep

la

ce

me

nt\D

ra

win

gs\E

00

1.d

wg

LA

ST

S

AV

ED

B

Y: M

ru

tko

wski D

AT

E: 1

1/1

4/2

01

7 3

:4

8:1

4 P

M


918.877.6000 918.877.4000 FAX


11/14/201795% REVIEW SET


CA # 3537

EXPIRES 6/30/2018

MATTHEWRUTKOWSKI

28077

L

I

C

EN

S

E

D

P

R

O

F

E

SS

IO

N

A

L

E

N

G

IN

E

E

R

O

K

L

AH

O

M

A


E001

SPECIFICATIONS

ELECTRICAL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS:

A. FURNISH ALL LABOR, MATERIAL, EQUIPMENT, TOOLS AND TEMPORARY POWER REQUIRED TO

COMPLETE THE INSTALLATION OF THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.

B. OBTAIN ALL PERMITS, INSPECTIONS AND APPROVALS AS REQUIRED BY THE LOCAL AUTHORITIES

HAVING JURISDICTION (AHJ). ALL ASSOCIATED FEES SHALL BE PAID BY THE CONTRACTOR

AND/OR CONSTRUCTION MANAGER. COORDINATE WITH THE CONSTRUCTION MANAGER.

C. ALL MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEM APPURTENANCES OF THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

NECESSARY FOR ITS PROPER OPERATION AND INSTALLATION, BUT NOT NECESSARILY STATED

OR SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS SHALL BE PROVIDED BY THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR AND BE

INCLUDED IN THEIR SCOPE OF WORK AND BID.

D. THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL FULFILL ALL REQUIREMENTS OF THE CONTRACT

DOCUMENTS AND SHALL COMPLETE THE IMPROVEMENTS SHOWN IN THE CONTRACT

DOCUMENTS. ALL SYSTEMS SHALL BE PROVIDED AND PROVEN TO BE FULLY OPERATIONAL AND

FUNCTIONAL.

E. WORK SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH ALL OF THE FOLLOWING MINIMUM APPLICABLE

REQUIREMENTS OF THE LATEST GOVERNING CODES. FINAL APPROVAL OF ALL WORK SHALL BE

IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION. WHERE THERE ARE CONFLICTS

WITH CODES AND OR AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION, THE MOST STRINGENT SHALL APPLY

AND BE IMPLEMENTED.

1. NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE (NEC)

2. INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE (IBC)

3. INTERNATIONAL MECHANICAL CODE (IMC)

4. NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)

5. AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES ACT (ADA)

6. LOCAL CODES AND AMENDMENTS

7. NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION (NECA)

8. OWNER'S CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS

9. BUILDING STANDARDS

F. MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT SHALL BE NEW AND SHALL CONFORM TO THE FOLLOWING CURRENT

APPLICABLE INDUSTRY STANDARDS:

1. NEMA (NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURER'S ASSOCIATION)

2. ANSI (AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE)

3. UL (UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES)

4. IEEE (INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC ENGINEERS)

5. IPCEA (INSULATED POWER CABLE ENGINEERS ASSOCIATION)

G. CONTRACTOR SHALL REVIEW ALL DOCUMENTS, PRIOR TO SUBMITTING BID PROPOSAL,

INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, MECHANICAL DRAWINGS, AND MECHANICAL SCHEDULES.

REQUIREMENTS AND INFORMATION NECESSARY FOR THE ELECTRICAL MAY BE FOUND IN OTHER

DISCIPLINE'S DOCUMENTS.

H. COORDINATE AND VERIFY ALL WORK SHOWN ON THESE DOCUMENTS WITH ALL OTHER

DISCIPLINE'S CONTRACT DOCUMENTS DRAWINGS AND EXISTING CONDITIONS. IT IS THE

RESPONSIBILITY OF THIS CONTRACTOR TO NOTIFY THE ENGINEER IN WRITING OF

DISCREPANCIES FOUND.

I. COORDINATE WITH THE WORK OF ALL OTHER TRADES INVOLVED IN THIS PROJECT. IT IS THE

RESPONSIBILITY OF THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY THE ACTUAL LOCATION OF THE

EQUIPMENT, DUCTWORK, PIPING, STRUCTURE, ETC., AND COORDINATE THE INSTALLATION

ACCORDINGLY.

J. CONTRACTOR SHALL SURVEY SITE DURING BIDDING PROCESS AND FULLY FAMILIARIZE

THEMSELVES WITH ALL CONDITIONS THAT AFFECT THE WORK OR COST THEREOF. PROVIDE

REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION, AS REQUIRED AND IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CONTRACT

DOCUMENTS.

K. THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS ARE DIAGRAMMATIC. EXACT LOCATION

OF EQUIPMENT SHALL BE COORDINATED WITH OTHER TRADES AND FIELD CONDITIONS.

L. CONDUIT RUNS SHOWN ARE DIAGRAMMATIC IN NATURE. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR

SIZING AND LOCATING PULL BOXES PER NEC AND FOR COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES.

M. DO NOT SCALE OR DIMENSION LOCATIONS FROM THESE DRAWINGS.

N. SUBMITTALS: THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT INFORMATION FOR ENGINEER

REVIEW, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ALL OF THE FOLLOWING EQUIPMENT: CONDUIT, BOXES,

DISCONNECT SWITCHES, CONDUCTORS, VFDS, MOTOR CONTROL CENTER BUCKETS., ETC.

SUBMITTALS SHALL BE NEATLY BOUND WITH EXACT MODEL NUMBER PROVIDED AND CLEARLY

MARKED. SUBMITTALS SHALL INCLUDE, BUT NOT BE LIMITED TO: PHYSICAL SIZE, LISTINGS,

PERFORMANCE INFORMATION, AND FABRICATION MATERIALS.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1. MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, AND DEVICES SHALL BE LISTED AND LABELED BY A NATIONALLY

RECOGNIZED AND APPROVED TESTING AGENCY AS OUTLINED IN THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL

CODE.

2.2. FIRESTOPPING MATERIAL SHALL BE MANUFACTURED BY 3M OR ENGINEER APPROVED EQUAL.

2.3. CONDUIT RACEWAYS:

A. CONDUIT SIZES SHOWN ON DRAWINGS ARE BASED ON THHN/THWN INSULATION AND EMT.

CONTRACTOR SHALL ADJUST CONDUIT SIZE FOR CONDUCTORS OF DIFFERENT INSULATION AND

CONDUIT OTHER THAN EMT.

B. CONDUIT TYPES PERMITTED:

1. RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC)-EXTERIOR ABOVE GRADE, DAMP OR WET LOCATIONS, OR

WHERE SUBJECT TO MECHANICAL DAMAGE.

2. ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)-INTERIOR.

3. FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT: CONNECTION TO VIBRATING EQUIPMENT (INCLUDING COOLING

TOWER, MOTORS). USE LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT IN DAMP OR WET LOCATIONS.

NOT TO EXCEED 6'-0".

4. INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT (IMC)-USES PERMITTED BY NEC.

5. PVC - BELOW GRADE.

ALL CONDUITS NOT SPECIFICALLY LISTED ABOVE SHALL NOT BE ALLOWED.

C. MINIMUM INTERIOR CONDUIT SIZE SHALL BE 1/2”, MINIMUM EXTERIOR CONDUIT SIZE SHALL BE

3/4".

2.1. OUTLET BOXES AND CONDUIT FITTINGS:

A. FURNISH OUTLETS AND BOXES WHERE REQUIRED BY DOCUMENTS, EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS,

OR CODE. ALL OUTLET AND SWITCH BOXES SHALL BE SIZED TO PROVIDE SPACE FOR WIRING

DEVICES, CONDUCTORS, AND GROUNDING CONDUCTORS. NON-METALLIC OUTLET BOXES ARE

NOT ACCEPTABLE.

B. PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES ARE NOT COMPLETELY SHOWN ON DRAWINGS. THEY SHALL BE

INSTALLED WHERE REQUIRED, IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE NEC. ALL BOXES SHALL BE

CONSTRUCTED OF #14 GAUGE MINIMUM HOT DIPPED GALVANIZED STEEL, CAST OR SHEET

ALUMINUM WITH SCREWED OR HINGED COVER. FASTENERS SHALL BE BRASS OR ZINC COATED

SCREWS. WHERE EXPOSED TO WEATHER, MOISTURE-TIGHT GASKET SHALL BE PROVIDED.

ELECTRICAL BOXES WITH UNUSED KNOCKOUTS SHALL BE PLUGGED. ALL BOXES SHALL BE OF

ADEQUATE SIZE WITHOUT THE USE OF EXTENSION RINGS.

C. CONDUIT CONNECTORS:

1. ALL FITTINGS FOR RIGID METAL CONDUITS SHALL BE THREADED TYPE UNLESS NOTED

OTHERWISE.

2. DIE CAST FITTINGS ARE PROHIBITED.

3. INDOOR EXPOSED EMT FITTINGS SHALL BE STEEL COMPRESSION TYPE.

4. OUTDOOR RMC OR IMC CONNECTIONS INTO SHEET METAL BOXES SHALL BE MADE WITH

MEYERS SEAL-TIGHT HUBS WHERE ENTERING FROM THE SIDE OR TOP OF BOX.

THREADLESS RMC OR IMC FITTINGS SHALL NOT BE USED. INDOOR RMC OR IMC

CONNECTIONS SHALL BE MADE WITH DOUBLE LOCK NUTS AND BUSHINGS.

D. COMPLY WITH NECA FOR INSTALLATION OF HANGERS, AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL

EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS EXCEPT IF REQUIREMENTS IN THIS SECTION ARE MORE STRINGENT.

2.5 SUPPORTING DEVICES:

A. ANCHORS AND FASTENERS

1. STEEL STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS: USE BEAM CLAMPS. WELDED FASTENERS MAY BE USED

WITH APPROVAL FROM STRUCTURAL ENGINEER.

2. CONCRETE SURFACES: USE SELF-DRILLING ANCHORS AND EXPANSION ANCHORS.

3. MASONRY, PLASTER, AND GYPSUM BOARD: USE TOGGLE BOLTS AND HOLLOW WALL

FASTENERS.

4. SOLID MASONRY WALLS: USE EXPANSION ANCHORS.

5. SHEET METAL: USE SHEET METAL SCREWS.

B. INSTALLATION

1. INSTALL PRODUCTS IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS.

2. DO NOT FASTEN SUPPORTS TO PIPES, DUCTS, MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT, AND CONDUIT.

3. DO NOT USE SPRING STEEL CLIPS AND CLAMPS.

4. DO NOT DRILL OR CUT STRUCTURAL MEMBERS.

5. PROVIDE SUPPORTS LOCATED PER NEC CODE.

6. NO RACEWAYS SHALL BE SUPPORTED FROM CEILING, CEILING GRID SUPPORTS OR OTHER

TYPE OF SUPPORT WIRE.

C. COMPLY WITH NECA FOR INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND

SYSTEMS EXCEPT IF REQUIREMENTS IN THIS SECTION ARE STRICTER.

2.6 CONDUCTORS:

A. CONDUCTORS AS INDICATED AND REQUIRED BY THE DRAWINGS SHALL BEAR THE UL LABEL AND

STAMPING INDICATING CONDUCTOR SIZE, TYPE, VOLTAGE, AND GRADE, AND SHALL MEET THE

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS AND TEST ESTABLISHED FOR SUCH MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION

BY ASTM, NEMA, ANSI, AND IPCEA WHERE APPLICABLE.

B. CONDUCTOR SHALL BE CODE GAUGE, SOFT COPPER, NOT LESS THAN 98% CONDUCTIVITY AND

OF THE 600 VOLT INSULATION UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.

C. COLOR CODE CONDUCTORS IN ACCORDANCE WITH NEC, LOCAL CODES, AND THE FOLLOWING:

1. 120/208 VOLT

PHASE A BLACK

PHASE B RED

PHASE C BLUE

NEUTRAL WHITE

GROUND GREEN

2. 277/480 VOLT

PHASE A BROWN

PHASE B ORANGE

PHASE C YELLOW

NEUTRAL GRAY

GROUND GREEN

D. #10 AWG AND SMALLER CONDUCTORS SHALL BE COLOR CODED BY A CONTINUOUS OUTER

COVERING. CONDUCTORS LARGER THAN #10 AWG MAY BE COLOR CODED BY TAPE OR

CONTINUOUS OUTER COVERING.

E. BRANCH CIRCUITS: TYPE THHN-THWN, SINGLE CONDUCTORS IN RACEWAY.

F. BRANCH CIRCUIT AND FEEDER CONDUCTORS SIZE #10 AWG AND SMALLER SHALL BE SOLID.

BRANCH CIRCUIT AND FEEDER CONDUCTORS SIZE #8 AWG AND LARGER SHALL BE STRANDED.


A. MAKE SPLICES IN #8 AWG AND SMALLER WITH INSULATED TWIST-ON WIRE CONNECTORS. MAKE

SPLICES IN #6 AWG AND LARGER WITH CU/AL LISTED COMPRESSION CONNECTORS.

B. DO NOT INSTALL MORE THAN THREE PHASE, ONE NEUTRAL, ONE INSULATED EQUIPMENT

GROUNDING CONDUCTOR AND/OR ISOLATED GROUND CONDUCTORS IN ANY ONE CONDUIT,

UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. ALL CONDUITS SHALL CONTAIN A SEPARATE INSULATED EQUIPMENT

GROUNDING CONDUCTOR.

C. RECEPTACLE DEVICES SHALL BE GROUNDING TYPE COMMERCIAL GRADE AS FOLLOWS:

1. DUPLEX RECEPTACLE 20A 125V, NEMA 5-20R

2. BACK AND SIDE WIRED

3. EXTERIOR DUPLEX 20A 125V, NEMA 5-20R WEATHER RESISTANT GFCI PROTECTED

4. GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER 20A 125V, NEMA 5-20R

D. SWITCHES SHALL BE COMMERCIAL GRADE, BACK AND SIDE WIRED, 120/277V AND 20A RATED.

E. COVER PLATES:

1. WEATHERPROOF WHILE IN USE COVER PLATES SHALL BE CAST METAL. PLASTIC

WEATHERPROOF COVER PLATES WILL NOT BE ALLOWED.

G. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:

1. WIRING DEVICES AND PLATES AS MANUFACTURED BY ARROW HART, P&S, BRYANT, HUBBELL,

LEVITON, GE OR APPROVED EQUALS.

2. DEVICES OR PLATES FOUND NOT TO BE AS SPECIFIED SHALL BE REMOVED AND REPLACED

WITH SPECIFIED DEVICE AT CONTRACTOR'S EXPENSE.


A. MANUFACTURERS: SUBJECT TO COMPLIANCE WITH REQUIREMENTS, PROVIDE SWITCHES BY ONE

OF THE FOLLOWING:

1. EATON ELECTRICAL INC.; CUTLER-HAMMER PRODUCTS

2. GENERAL ELECTRIC

3. SIEMENS

4. SQUARE D

B. FURNISH FUSIBLE OR NON-FUSIBLE SWITCHES AS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS. SWITCHES SHALL

BE HORSEPOWER-RATED. INDOOR SWITCHES SHALL BE NEMA 1; OUTDOOR SWITCHES SHALL BE

NEMA 3R, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. SWITCHES SHALL BE RATED FOR THE CONNECTED

SYSTEM VOLTAGE. SWITCHES SHALL BE HEAVY DUTY QUICK MAKE, QUICK BREAK. FURNISH

REJECTION TYPE FUSE HOLDERS AND TYPE R FUSES UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.

2.9 IDENTIFICATION:

A. PROVIDE ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION FOR EACH MOTOR CONTROL CENTER BUCKET, STARTER,

VFD, AND DISCONNECT. MECHANICALLY CONNECT NAMEPLATE WITH STAINLESS-STEEL SCREWS

OR STAINLESS-STEEL MACHINE SCREWS WITH NUTS, FLAT WASHERS, AND LOCK WASHERS.

B. NAMEPLATES

1. NAMEPLATES SHALL BE 4"X1"X1/8" MINIMUM WITH WHITE CORE, BLACK FACE, ACRYLIC OR

MELAMINE WITH ENGRAVED 3/8” MINIMUM LETTERS.

C. PROVIDE PANEL DESIGNATION AND CIRCUIT NUMBER FOR ALL ELECTRICAL JUNCTION BOX

COVERS. PROVIDE SELF-ADHESIVE VINYL LABELS: PREPRINTED, FLEXIBLE LABEL LAMINATED

WITH A CLEAR, WEATHER-AND CHEMICAL-RESISTANT COATING. PERMANENT MARKER IS

ACCEPTABLE FOR ALL JUNCTION BOXES LOCATED ABOVE CEILINGS.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION:

A. COORDINATE:

1. COORDINATE THE INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL WITH THE SCHEDULE AND WORK OF OTHER

TRADES TO PREVENT UNNECESSARY DELAYS AND OR COSTS IN THE TOTAL WORK.

2. COORDINATE WITH MECHANICAL AND OR CONTROLS CONTACTOR FOR TEMPERATURE

CONTROL AND INTERLOCK WIRING REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO SUBMITTING BID PROPOSAL.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS:

A. SECURELY AND RIGIDLY SUPPORT CONDUITS TO SUPER STRUCTURE THROUGHOUT THE WORK.

B. INSTALL RACEWAYS PARALLEL AND PERPENDICULAR TO SURFACES OF STRUCTURAL MEMBERS.

FOLLOW SURFACE CONTOURS, WHERE POSSIBLE, IN EXPOSED AREAS.

C. COMPLY WITH ALL APPLICABLE NECA STANDARDS FOR INSTALLATION OF HANGERS, SUPPORTS

AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS.

D. USE FLEXIBLE METALLIC CONDUIT ONLY FOR SHORT MOTOR CONNECTIONS, OR WHERE SUBJECT

TO VIBRATION.

E. CONDUITS THROUGH PERIMETER BUILDING WALLS SHALL HAVE INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL SEALS.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS:

A. NO CONDUCTOR SHALL BE SMALLER THAN #12 AWG, EXCEPT THAT WIRING FOR SIGNAL AND

PILOT CONTROL CIRCUITS MAY BE #14 AWG, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE.


A. ALL ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS SHALL BE MADE IN ACCORDANCE WITH ARTICLE 110 OF THE NEC.

3.6 IDENTIFICATION AT PANELS:

A. PANEL DIRECTORIES SHALL BE TYPED AND FILLED OUT BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR AFTER

TESTING AND CHECKOUT AND BE MOUNTED IN DIRECTORY FRAME INSIDE OF PANEL DOOR.

PROVIDE ACCURATE TYPED PANELBOARD SCHEDULES IN ALL NEW AND EXISTING PANELS.

MOUNT DIRECTORY BEHIND PLASTIC ON THE INSIDE OF EACH PANEL DOOR. PROVIDE CIRCUIT

NUMBER AND COMPLETE DESCRIPTION OF ALL LOADS ON EACH CIRCUIT.

B. PROVIDE NAMEPLATE ON THE PANELBOARD WITH THE PANEL DESIGNATION, VOLTAGE, PHASE,

AND POWER SOURCE.

3.7 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT:

A. ALL MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT SHALL BE NEW, OF THE SAME TYPE AND MANUFACTURER, AND

SHALL BE FREE FROM DEFECTS. DEFECTIVE AND OR DAMAGED EQUIPMENT SHALL BE REMOVED

FROM THE SITE AND REPLACED WITH NEW AT CONTRACTOR'S EXPENSE.

B. MAKE FINAL ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS TO NEW AND ANY RELOCATED EQUIPMENT.

3.8 GROUNDING:

A. A SEPARATE GREEN INSULATED EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR SHALL BE INSTALLED

WITH THE CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS, WHETHER INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS OR NOT. METAL

RACEWAY, CABLE ARMOR OR SHEATH SHALL NOT BE USED AS THE PREFERRED EQUIPMENT

GROUNDING CONDUCTOR. RACEWAY SYSTEMS SHALL BE MECHANICALLY AND ELECTRICALLY

CONTINUOUS AND SHALL BE BONDED AT ALL POINTS TO THE INSULATED EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

CONDUCTOR IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE APPLICABLE PROVISIONS OF NEC ARTICLE 250.


A. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE A HEAVY DUTY DISCONNECT FOR ALL MOTORS WHICH ARE NOT

PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WITH A UL LISTED DISCONNECT. WHERE NO INTERNAL

OVERLOAD PROTECTION IS PROVIDED, PROVIDE A STARTER (IF REMOTELY CONTROLLED) OR

MOTOR STARTING SWITCH AS REQUIRED. PROVIDE MELTING ALLOY OR ELECTRONIC TRIP

MOTOR OVERLOAD PROTECTION SIZED PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS.

3.10 CUTTING AND PATCHING:

A. THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR CUTTING AND PENETRATING ALL

FLOORS, WALLS, PARTITIONS, CEILINGS OR OTHER CONSTRUCTION REQUIRED FOR PROPER

INSTALLATION OF THEIR WORK. CUTTING AND PENETRATING SHALL COMPLY WITH BUILDING

CODE REQUIREMENTS. NO CUTTING OR PENETRATIONS SHALL BE DONE WITHOUT PRIOR

APPROVAL OF THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER. ALL CUTTING AND PENETRATIONS SHALL BE

PERFORMED AS DIRECTED BY THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER.

B. PROVIDE FIRESTOPPING FOR ALL FIRE RATED WALL, FLOOR AND CEILING PENETRATIONS.

FIRESTOPPING SHALL BE PRODUCED AND INSTALLED TO RESIST SPREAD OF FIRE ACCORDING TO

ASTME OR UL REQUIREMENTS, RESIST PASSAGE OF SMOKE AND OTHER GASES, AND MAINTAIN

ORIGINAL FIRE-RESISTANCE RATING OF CONSTRUCTION PENETRATED.

C. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR PATCHING, PAINTING AND REPAIRING ALL

WALLS, FLOORS AND CEILINGS DAMAGED DURING CONSTRUCTION TO MATCH EXISTING

CONDITIONS.

3.11 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS:

A. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS REQUIRED FOR PROPER

INSTALLATION OF ALL ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.

B. PROVIDE ALL DISCONNECTS AND SAFETY SWITCHES FOR MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING

EQUIPMENT. OVERCURRENT DEVICES FOR HEATING, REFRIGERATION OR AIR CONDITIONING

EQUIPMENT SHALL BE FUSES OR “HACR” RATED CIRCUIT BREAKERS.

C. COMPLY WITH NECA INSTALLATION RECOMMENDATIONS FOR ALL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

INSTALLATIONS.

3.12 TESTS:

A. PERFORM CIRCUIT CONTINUITY TESTS FOR CIRCUITS.

B. TEST MOTORS FOR CORRECT ROTATION.

C. ALL EGRESS AND EXIT FIXTURES SHALL BE TESTED FOR PROPER OPERATION.

D. ANY FAILURE OR UNSATISFACTORY RESULT OF TESTS SHALL BE CORRECTED AND RETESTED, AT

CONTRACTOR'S EXPENSE. REPAIR AND RETEST UNTIL A SATISFACTORY RESULT IS ACHIEVED.

E. ALL TEST RESULTS SHALL BE TYPE-WRITTEN AND INCLUDED WITH THE PROJECT CLOSE OUT

DOCUMENTS.

3.13 PROJECT COMPLETION:

A. UPON COMPLETION OF THE WORK OF THIS SECTION, THOROUGHLY CLEAN ALL EXPOSED

PORTIONS OF THE ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION, REMOVING ALL TRACES OF SOIL, LABELS,

FINGERPRINTS, GREASE, PAINT, DRYWALL COMPOUND, OIL, AND OTHER FOREIGN MATERIAL, AND

USING ONLY THE TYPE CLEANER RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER OF THE ITEM BEING

CLEANED. CLEAN INTERIORS OF ALL PANELBOARDS, TRANSFORMERS, DISCONNECTS AND

OTHER ENCLOSURES. CLEAN ALL LIGHT FIXTURE APERTURES, REFLECTORS, LENSES, EXIT SIGN

FACES, AND ANY OTHER SOILED PORTIONS OF THE LIGHT FIXTURES.

B. THOROUGHLY INDOCTRINATE THE OWNER'S OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL IN THE

CONTENTS OF THE OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL REQUIRED TO BE SUBMITTED BY

THESE DOCUMENTS.

C. PROVIDE A COMPLETE, NEATLY BOUND SET OF AS-BUILT DRAWINGS AND OPERATIONS AND

MAINTENANCE MANUALS TO THE OWNER AND ENGINEER. SUBMIT DOCUMENTS IN ACCORDANCE

WITH THE GENERAL CONDITIONS AND THE FOLLOWING. AS-BUILT DRAWINGS SHALL INDICATE

INSTALLED EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS (DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT, LIGHT FIXTURES, OUTLETS,

SWITCHES, ETC.), INSTALLED WIRING CONNECTIONS (FEEDERS, REVISED CIRCUIT NUMBERS,

ETC.), UPDATED PANEL SCHEDULES, REVISED FIXTURE SCHEDULE INDICATING MODEL NUMBERS

OF INSTALLED FIXTURES INFORMATION, ETC.. AS-BUILTS SHALL BE CREATED BY QUALIFIED

DRAFTING PERSONNEL.

END OF SPECIFICATIONS

ISSUE/ REVISIONS


ENGINEER OF RECORD

PROJECT INFORMATION

A:


FOR:


COLLEGE

DRAWN BY CHECKED BY

PROJECT NO.

PROJECT ADDRESS:

DATE

MJR CAH

OCCC130001001

12/14/2017

7777 S. MAY AVE.


MA

IN B

UIL

DIN

G C

OO

LIN

G T

OW

ER

RE

PL

AC

EM

EN

TO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

CO

MM

UN

ITY

CO

LL

EG

EO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

, OK

PL

OT

TE

D B

Y: M

att R

utko

wski D

AT

E: 1

2/1

4/2

01

7 5

:5

8:3

8 P

M D

WG

N

AM

E: V

:\O

CC

C\C

oo

lin

g T

ow

er R

ep

la

ce

me

nt\D

ra

win

gs\E

00

2.d

wg

LA

ST

S

AV

ED

B

Y: M

ru

tko

wski D

AT

E: 9

/2

5/2

01

7 3

:1

2:1

5 P

M


918.877.6000 918.877.4000 FAX


11/14/201795% REVIEW SET


CA # 3537

EXPIRES 6/30/2018

MATTHEWRUTKOWSKI

28077

L

I

C

EN

S

E

D

P

R

O

F

E

SS

IO

N

A

L

E

N

G

IN

E

E

R

O

K

L

AH

O

M

A


E002

SPECIFICATIONS

ELECTRICAL VFD

SECTION 262923 - VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS OF THE CONTRACT, INCLUDING GENERAL AND SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS

AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SPECIFICATION SECTIONS, APPLY TO THIS SECTION.

1.2 SUMMARY

B. SECTION INCLUDES SEPARATELY ENCLOSED, PREASSEMBLED, COMBINATION VFCS, RATED 600 V AND LESS, FOR SPEED

CONTROL OF THREE-PHASE, SQUIRREL-CAGE INDUCTION MOTORS.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

C. CE: CONFORMITE EUROPEENE (EUROPEAN COMPLIANCE).

D. CPT: CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMER.

E. DDC: DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL.

F. EMI: ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE.

G. LED: LIGHT-EMITTING DIODE.

H. NC: NORMALLY CLOSED.

I. NO: NORMALLY OPEN.

J. OCPD: OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE.

K. PID: CONTROL ACTION, PROPORTIONAL PLUS INTEGRAL PLUS DERIVATIVE.

L. RFI: RADIO-FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE.

M. VFC: VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLER.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. PRODUCT DATA: FOR EACH TYPE AND RATING OF VFC INDICATED.

1. INCLUDE DIMENSIONS AND FINISHES FOR VFCS.

2. INCLUDE RATED CAPACITIES, OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS, ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS, AND FURNISHED

SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES.


A. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA: FOR VFCS TO INCLUDE IN EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS.

1. INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING:

a. MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS FOR TESTING AND ADJUSTING THERMAL-MAGNETIC CIRCUIT

BREAKER AND MOTOR-CIRCUIT PROTECTOR TRIP SETTINGS.

b. MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS FOR SETTING FIELD-ADJUSTABLE OVERLOAD RELAYS.

c. MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND REPROGRAMMING

MICROPROCESSOR CONTROL MODULES.

d. MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS FOR SETTING FIELD-ADJUSTABLE TIMERS, CONTROLS, AND STATUS

AND ALARM POINTS.


A. ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS, DEVICES, AND ACCESSORIES: LISTED AND LABELED AS DEFINED IN NFPA 70, BY A QUALIFIED

TESTING AGENCY, AND MARKED FOR INTENDED LOCATION AND APPLICATION.

B. COMPLY WITH NFPA 70.

1.7 WARRANTY

C. SPECIAL WARRANTY: MANUFACTURER AGREES TO REPAIR OR REPLACE VFCS THAT FAIL IN MATERIALS OR

WORKMANSHIP WITHIN SPECIFIED WARRANTY PERIOD.

2. WARRANTY PERIOD: ONE YEARS FROM DATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. BASIS-OF-DESIGN PRODUCT: SUBJECT TO COMPLIANCE WITH REQUIREMENTS, PROVIDE PRODUCT BY ONE OF THE

FOLLOWING:

1. YASKAWA ELECTRIC AMERICA, INC; DRIVES DIVISION.

2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VFCS:

1. VFCS AND ACCESSORIES: LISTED AND LABELED AS DEFINED IN NFPA 70, BY A QUALIFIED TESTING AGENCY, AND

MARKED FOR INTENDED LOCATION AND APPLICATION.

2. COMPLY WITH NEMA ICS 7, NEMA ICS 61800-2, AND UL 508C

B. APPLICATION: VARIABLE TORQUE

C. VFC DESCRIPTION: VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLER, CONSISTING OF POWER CONVERTER THAT EMPLOYS

PULSE-WIDTH-MODULATED INVERTER, FACTORY BUILT AND TESTED IN AN ENCLOSURE, WITH INTEGRAL DISCONNECTING

MEANS AND OVERCURRENT AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION; LISTED AND LABELED BY AN NRTL AS A COMPLETE UNIT;

ARRANGED TO PROVIDE SELF-PROTECTION, PROTECTION, AND VARIABLE-SPEED CONTROL OF ONE OR MORE

THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS BY ADJUSTING OUTPUT VOLTAGE AND FREQUENCY.

1. UNITS SUITABLE FOR OPERATION OF NEMA MG 1, DESIGN A AND DESIGN B MOTORS, AS DEFINED BY NEMA MG 1,

SECTION IV, PART 30, "APPLICATION CONSIDERATIONS FOR CONSTANT SPEED MOTORS USED ON A SINUSOIDAL BUS

WITH HARMONIC CONTENT AND GENERAL PURPOSE MOTORS USED WITH ADJUSTABLE-VOLTAGE OR

ADJUSTABLE-FREQUENCY CONTROLS OR BOTH."

2. UNITS SUITABLE FOR OPERATION OF INVERTER-DUTY MOTORS AS DEFINED BY NEMA MG 1, SECTION IV, PART 31,

"DEFINITE-PURPOSE INVERTER-FED POLYPHASE MOTORS."

3. LISTED AND LABELED FOR INTEGRATED SHORT-CIRCUIT CURRENT (WITHSTAND) RATING BY AN NRTL ACCEPTABLE TO

AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION.

D. DESIGN AND RATING: MATCH LOAD TYPE, SUCH AS FANS, BLOWERS, AND PUMPS; AND TYPE OF CONNECTION USED

BETWEEN MOTOR AND LOAD SUCH AS DIRECT OR THROUGH A POWER-TRANSMISSION CONNECTION.

E. OUTPUT RATING: THREE PHASE; 10 TO 60 HZ, WITH VOLTAGE PROPORTIONAL TO FREQUENCY THROUGHOUT VOLTAGE

RANGE; MAXIMUM VOLTAGE EQUALS INPUT VOLTAGE.

F. UNIT OPERATING REQUIREMENTS:

1. INPUT AC VOLTAGE TOLERANCE: PLUS 10 AND MINUS 10 PERCENT OF VFC INPUT VOLTAGE RATING.

2. INPUT AC VOLTAGE UNBALANCE: NOT EXCEEDING 3 PERCENT.

3. INPUT FREQUENCY TOLERANCE: PLUS OR MINUS 3 PERCENT OF VFC FREQUENCY RATING.

4. MINIMUM EFFICIENCY: 97 PERCENT AT 60 HZ, FULL LOAD.

5. MINIMUM DISPLACEMENT PRIMARY-SIDE POWER FACTOR: 98 PERCENT UNDER ANY LOAD OR SPEED CONDITION.

6. MINIMUM SHORT-CIRCUIT CURRENT (WITHSTAND) RATING: 65KA.

7. AMBIENT TEMPERATURE RATING: NOT LESS THAN 32 DEG F AND NOT EXCEEDING 104 DEG F.

8. HUMIDITY RATING: LESS THAN 95 PERCENT (NONCONDENSING).

9. ALTITUDE RATING: NOT EXCEEDING 3300 FEET

10. VIBRATION WITHSTAND: COMPLY WITH NEMA ICS 61800-2.

11. OVERLOAD CAPABILITY: 1.1 TIMES THE BASE LOAD CURRENT FOR 60 SECONDS; MINIMUM OF 1.8 TIMES THE BASE

LOAD CURRENT FOR THREE SECONDS.

12. SPEED REGULATION: PLUS OR MINUS 5 PERCENT.

13. OUTPUT CARRIER FREQUENCY: SELECTABLE; 0.5 TO 15 KHZ.

14. STOP MODES: PROGRAMMABLE; INCLUDES FAST, FREE-WHEEL, AND DC INJECTION BRAKING.

G. INVERTER LOGIC: MICROPROCESSOR BASED, 32 BIT, ISOLATED FROM ALL POWER CIRCUITS.

H. ISOLATED CONTROL INTERFACE: ALLOWS VFCS TO FOLLOW REMOTE-CONTROL SIGNAL OVER A MINIMUM 40:1 SPEED

RANGE.

20. SIGNAL: ELECTRICAL

I. INTERNAL ADJUSTABILITY CAPABILITIES:

1. MINIMUM SPEED: 5 TO 25 PERCENT OF MAXIMUM RPM.

2. MAXIMUM SPEED: 80 TO 100 PERCENT OF MAXIMUM RPM.

3. ACCELERATION: 0.1 TO 999.9 SECONDS.

4. DECELERATION: 0.1 TO 999.9 SECONDS.

5. CURRENT LIMIT: 30 TO MINIMUM OF 150 PERCENT OF MAXIMUM RATING.

J. SELF-PROTECTION AND RELIABILITY FEATURES:

1. SURGE SUPPRESSION: FACTORY INSTALLED AS AN INTEGRAL PART OF THE VFC, COMPLYING WITH UL 1449 SPD,

TYPE 1 OR TYPE 2.

2. LOSS OF INPUT SIGNAL PROTECTION: SELECTABLE RESPONSE STRATEGY, INCLUDING SPEED DEFAULT TO A

PERCENT OF THE MOST RECENT SPEED, A PRESET SPEED, OR STOP; WITH ALARM.

3. UNDER- AND OVERVOLTAGE TRIPS.

4. INVERTER OVERCURRENT TRIPS.

5. VFC AND MOTOR-OVERLOAD/OVERTEMPERATURE PROTECTION: MICROPROCESSOR-BASED THERMAL PROTECTION

SYSTEM FOR MONITORING VFCS AND MOTOR THERMAL CHARACTERISTICS, AND FOR PROVIDING VFC

OVERTEMPERATURE AND MOTOR-OVERLOAD ALARM AND TRIP; SETTINGS SELECTABLE VIA THE KEYPAD.

6. CRITICAL FREQUENCY REJECTION, WITH THREE SELECTABLE, ADJUSTABLE DEADBANDS.

7. INSTANTANEOUS LINE-TO-LINE AND LINE-TO-GROUND OVERCURRENT TRIPS.

8. LOSS-OF-PHASE PROTECTION.

9. REVERSE-PHASE PROTECTION.

10. SHORT-CIRCUIT PROTECTION.

11. MOTOR-OVERTEMPERATURE FAULT.

K. AUTOMATIC RESET/RESTART: ATTEMPT THREE RESTARTS AFTER DRIVE FAULT OR ON RETURN OF POWER AFTER AN

INTERRUPTION AND BEFORE SHUTTING DOWN FOR MANUAL RESET OR FAULT CORRECTION; ADJUSTABLE DELAY TIME

BETWEEN RESTART ATTEMPTS.

L. BIDIRECTIONAL AUTOSPEED SEARCH: CAPABLE OF STARTING VFC INTO ROTATING LOADS SPINNING IN EITHER

DIRECTION AND RETURNING MOTOR TO SET SPEED IN PROPER DIRECTION, WITHOUT CAUSING DAMAGE TO DRIVE,

MOTOR, OR LOAD.

M. TORQUE BOOST: AUTOMATICALLY VARIES STARTING AND CONTINUOUS TORQUE TO AT LEAST 1.5 TIMES THE MINIMUM

TORQUE TO ENSURE HIGH-STARTING TORQUE AND INCREASED TORQUE AT SLOW SPEEDS.

N. MOTOR TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION AT SLOW SPEEDS: ADJUSTABLE CURRENT FALL-BACK BASED ON OUTPUT

FREQUENCY FOR TEMPERATURE PROTECTION OF SELF-COOLED, FAN-VENTILATED MOTORS AT SLOW SPEEDS.

O. INTEGRAL INPUT DISCONNECTING MEANS AND OCPD UL 489, THERMAL-MAGNETIC CIRCUIT BREAKER OR NEMA KS 1,

NONFUSIBLE SWITCH, WITH POWER FUSE BLOCK AND CURRENT-LIMITING FUSES WITH PAD-LOCKABLE, DOOR-MOUNTED

HANDLE MECHANISM.

1. DISCONNECT RATING: NOT LESS THAN 115 PERCENT OF NFPA 70 MOTOR FULL-LOAD CURRENT RATING OR VFC INPUT

CURRENT RATING, WHICHEVER IS LARGER.

2. AUXILIARY CONTACTS: NO OR NC, ARRANGED TO ACTIVATE BEFORE SWITCH BLADES OPEN.

3. AUXILIARY CONTACTS "A" AND "B" ARRANGED TO ACTIVATE WITH CIRCUIT-BREAKER HANDLE.

2.3 CONTROLS AND INDICATION

A. PANEL-MOUNTED OPERATOR STATION: MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD FRONT-ACCESSIBLE, SEALED KEYPAD AND

PLAIN-ENGLISH-LANGUAGE DIGITAL DISPLAY; ALLOWS COMPLETE PROGRAMMING, PROGRAM COPYING, OPERATING,

MONITORING, AND DIAGNOSTIC CAPABILITY.

1. KEYPAD: IN ADDITION TO REQUIRED PROGRAMMING AND CONTROL KEYS, INCLUDE KEYS FOR HAND, OFF, AND AUTO

MODES.

B. INDICATING DEVICES: DIGITAL DISPLAY MOUNTED FLUSH IN VFC DOOR AND CONNECTED TO DISPLAY VFC PARAMETERS

INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO:

1. OUTPUT FREQUENCY (HZ).

2. MOTOR SPEED (RPM).

3. MOTOR STATUS (RUNNING, STOP, FAULT).

4. MOTOR CURRENT (AMPERES).

5. MOTOR TORQUE (PERCENT).

6. FAULT OR ALARMING STATUS (CODE).

7. PID FEEDBACK SIGNAL (PERCENT).

8. DC-LINK VOLTAGE (V DC).

9. SET POINT FREQUENCY (HZ).

10. MOTOR OUTPUT VOLTAGE (V AC).

C. CONTROL SIGNAL INTERFACES:

1. ELECTRIC INPUT SIGNAL INTERFACE:

a. A MINIMUM OF TWO PROGRAMMABLE ANALOG INPUTS: 0- TO 10-V DC 4- TO 20-MA DC

b. A MINIMUM OF SIX MULTIFUNCTION PROGRAMMABLE DIGITAL INPUTS.

2. REMOTE SIGNAL INPUTS: CAPABILITY TO ACCEPT ANY OF THE FOLLOWING SPEED-SETTING INPUT SIGNALS FROM THE

DDC SYSTEM FOR HVAC OR OTHER CONTROL SYSTEMS:

a. 0- TO 10-V DC.

b. 4- TO 20-MA DC.

c. POTENTIOMETER USING UP/DOWN DIGITAL INPUTS.

d. FIXED FREQUENCIES USING DIGITAL INPUTS.

3. OUTPUT SIGNAL INTERFACE: A MINIMUM OF ONE PROGRAMMABLE ANALOG OUTPUT SIGNAL(S) (0- TO 10-V DC 4- TO

20-MA DC), WHICH CAN BE CONFIGURED FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING:

a. OUTPUT FREQUENCY (HZ).

b. OUTPUT CURRENT (LOAD).

c. DC-LINK VOLTAGE (V DC).

d. MOTOR TORQUE (PERCENT).

e. MOTOR SPEED (RPM).

f. SET POINT FREQUENCY (HZ).

4. REMOTE INDICATION INTERFACE: A MINIMUM OF TWO PROGRAMMABLE DRY-CIRCUIT RELAY OUTPUTS (120-V AC, 1 A)

FOR REMOTE INDICATION OF THE FOLLOWING:

a. MOTOR RUNNING.

b. SET POINT SPEED REACHED.

c. FAULT AND WARNING INDICATION (OVERTEMPERATURE OR OVERCURRENT).

d. PID HIGH- OR LOW-SPEED LIMITS REACHED.

D. INTERFACE WITH DDC SYSTEM FOR HVAC: FACTORY-INSTALLED HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE SHALL INTERFACE WITH

DDC SYSTEM FOR HVAC TO MONITOR, CONTROL, DISPLAY, AND RECORD DATA FOR USE IN PROCESSING REPORTS. VFC

SETTINGS SHALL BE RETAINED WITHIN VFC'S NONVOLATILE MEMORY.

5. COMMUNICATION INTERFACE: COMPLY WITH ASHRAE 135 COMMUNICATION SHALL INTERFACE WITH DDC SYSTEM

FOR HVAC TO REMOTELY CONTROL AND MONITOR LIGHTING FROM A DDC SYSTEM FOR HVAC OPERATOR

WORKSTATION. CONTROL FEATURES AND MONITORING POINTS DISPLAYED LOCALLY AT LIGHTING PANEL SHALL BE

AVAILABLE THROUGH THE DDC SYSTEM FOR HVAC.

2.4 LINE CONDITIONING AND FILTERING

A. INPUT LINE CONDITIONING: PROVIDE THREE PERCENT DC CHOKE LINE REACTOR ON A SIX PULSE VFC, OR EQUAL.

B. EMI/RFI FILTERING: CE MARKED; CERTIFY COMPLIANCE WITH IEC 61800-3 FOR CATEGORY C2.

2.5 BYPASS SYSTEMS

A. BYPASS OPERATION: SAFELY TRANSFERS MOTOR BETWEEN POWER CONVERTER OUTPUT AND BYPASS CIRCUIT,

MANUALLY, AUTOMATICALLY, OR BOTH. SELECTOR SWITCHES SET MODES AND INDICATOR LIGHTS INDICATE MODE

SELECTED. UNIT IS CAPABLE OF STABLE OPERATION (STARTING, STOPPING, AND RUNNING) WITH MOTOR COMPLETELY

DISCONNECTED FROM POWER CONVERTER.

B. BYPASS MODE: FIELD-SELECTABLE AUTOMATIC OR MANUAL, ALLOWS LOCAL AND REMOTE TRANSFER BETWEEN POWER

CONVERTER AND BYPASS CONTACTOR AND RETRANSFER, EITHER VIA MANUAL OPERATOR INTERFACE OR

AUTOMATIC-CONTROL SYSTEM FEEDBACK.

C. BYPASS CONTROLLER: THREE-CONTACTOR-STYLE BYPASS ALLOWS MOTOR OPERATION VIA THE POWER CONVERTER OR

THE BYPASS CONTROLLER; WITH INPUT ISOLATING SWITCH AND BARRIER ARRANGED TO ISOLATE THE POWER

CONVERTER INPUT AND OUTPUT AND PERMIT SAFE TESTING AND TROUBLESHOOTING OF THE POWER CONVERTER,

BOTH ENERGIZED AND DE-ENERGIZED, WHILE MOTOR IS OPERATING IN BYPASS MODE.

1. BYPASS CONTACTOR: LOAD-BREAK, IEC-RATED CONTACTOR.

2. INPUT AND OUTPUT ISOLATING CONTACTORS: NON-LOAD-BREAK, IEC-RATED CONTACTORS..

3. ISOLATING SWITCH: NON-LOAD-BREAK SWITCH ARRANGED TO ISOLATE POWER CONVERTER AND PERMIT SAFE

TROUBLESHOOTING AND TESTING OF THE POWER CONVERTER, BOTH ENERGIZED AND DE-ENERGIZED, WHILE

MOTOR IS OPERATING IN BYPASS MODE; PAD-LOCKABLE, DOOR-MOUNTED HANDLE MECHANISM.

D. BYPASS CONTACTOR CONFIGURATION: FULL-VOLTAGE (ACROSS-THE-LINE) TYPE.

1. NORMAL/BYPASS SELECTOR SWITCH.

2. HAND/OFF/AUTO SELECTOR SWITCH.

3. NORMAL/TEST SELECTOR SWITCH: ALLOWS TESTING AND ADJUSTING OF VFC WHILE THE MOTOR IS RUNNING IN THE

BYPASS MODE.

4. CONTACTOR COILS: PRESSURE-ENCAPSULATED TYPE WITH COIL TRANSIENT SUPPRESSORS.

a. OPERATING VOLTAGE: DEPENDING ON CONTACTOR NEMA SIZE AND LINE-VOLTAGE RATING, MANUFACTURER'S

STANDARD MATCHING CONTROL POWER OR LINE VOLTAGE.

b. POWER CONTACTS: TOTALLY ENCLOSED, DOUBLE BREAK, AND SILVER-CADMIUM OXIDE; ASSEMBLED TO ALLOW

INSPECTION AND REPLACEMENT WITHOUT DISTURBING LINE OR LOAD WIRING.

5. CONTROL CIRCUITS: 120-V AC; OBTAINED FROM INTEGRAL CPT, WITH PRIMARY AND SECONDARY FUSES WITH CPT OF

SUFFICIENT CAPACITY TO OPERATE ALL INTEGRAL DEVICES AND REMOTELY LOCATED PILOT, INDICATING, AND

CONTROL DEVICES.

6. OVERLOAD RELAYS: NEMA ICS 2.

a. BIMETALLIC OVERLOAD RELAYS:

1) INVERSE-TIME-CURRENT CHARACTERISTIC.

2) CLASS 20 TRIPPING CHARACTERISTIC.

3) HEATERS IN EACH PHASE MATCHED TO NAMEPLATE FULL-LOAD CURRENT OF ACTUAL PROTECTED MOTOR

AND WITH APPROPRIATE ADJUSTMENT FOR DUTY CYCLE.

4) AMBIENT COMPENSATED.

5) AUTOMATIC RESETTING.

b. EXTERNAL OVERLOAD, RESET PUSH BUTTON.

2.5 OPTIONAL FEATURES

A. MOTOR PREHEAT FUNCTION: PREHEATS MOTOR WHEN IDLE TO PREVENT MOISTURE ACCUMULATION IN THE MOTOR.

2.6 ENCLOSURES

A. VFC ENCLOSURES: NEMA 250, TO COMPLY WITH ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS AT INSTALLED LOCATION.

6. DRY AND CLEAN INDOOR LOCATIONS: TYPE 1

B. PLENUM RATING: UL 1995; NRTL CERTIFICATION LABEL ON ENCLOSURE, CLEARLY IDENTIFYING VFC AS "PLENUM RATED."

2.7 ACCESSORIES

A. PHASE-FAILURE, PHASE-REVERSAL, AND UNDERVOLTAGE AND OVERVOLTAGE RELAYS: SOLID-STATE SENSING CIRCUIT

WITH ISOLATED OUTPUT CONTACTS FOR HARD-WIRED CONNECTIONS. PROVIDE ADJUSTABLE UNDERVOLTAGE,

OVERVOLTAGE, AND TIME-DELAY SETTINGS.

1. CURRENT TRANSFORMERS: CONTINUOUS CURRENT RATING, BASIC IMPULSE INSULATING LEVEL (BIL) RATING,

BURDEN, AND ACCURACY CLASS SUITABLE FOR CONNECTED CIRCUITRY. COMPLY WITH IEEE C57.13.

2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. TESTING: TEST AND INSPECT VFCS ACCORDING TO REQUIREMENTS IN NEMA ICS 61800-2.

1. TEST EACH VFC WHILE CONNECTED TO ITS SPECIFIED MOTOR.

2. VERIFICATION OF PERFORMANCE: RATE VFCS ACCORDING TO OPERATION OF FUNCTIONS AND FEATURES SPECIFIED.

B. VFCS WILL BE CONSIDERED DEFECTIVE IF THEY DO NOT PASS TESTS AND INSPECTIONS.

C. PREPARE TEST AND INSPECTION REPORTS.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. EXAMINE AREAS, SURFACES, AND SUBSTRATES TO RECEIVE VFCS, WITH INSTALLER PRESENT, FOR COMPLIANCE WITH

REQUIREMENTS FOR INSTALLATION TOLERANCES AND OTHER CONDITIONS AFFECTING PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK.

B. EXAMINE VFC BEFORE INSTALLATION. REJECT VFCS THAT ARE WET, MOISTURE DAMAGED, OR MOLD DAMAGED.

C. EXAMINE ROUGHING-IN FOR CONDUIT SYSTEMS TO VERIFY ACTUAL LOCATIONS OF CONDUIT CONNECTIONS BEFORE VFC

INSTALLATION.

D. PROCEED WITH INSTALLATION ONLY AFTER UNSATISFACTORY CONDITIONS HAVE BEEN CORRECTED.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. WALL-MOUNTING CONTROLLERS: INSTALL WITH TOPS AT UNIFORM HEIGHT AND WITH DISCONNECT OPERATING HANDLES

NOT HIGHER THAN 79 INCHES ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR, UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED, AND BY BOLTING UNITS TO WALL

OR MOUNTING ON LIGHTWEIGHT STRUCTURAL-STEEL CHANNELS BOLTED TO WALL.

B. TEMPORARY LIFTING PROVISIONS: REMOVE TEMPORARY LIFTING EYES, CHANNELS, AND BRACKETS AND TEMPORARY

BLOCKING OF MOVING PARTS FROM ENCLOSURES AND COMPONENTS.

C. INSTALL FUSES IN EACH FUSIBLE-SWITCH VFC.

D. INSTALL FUSES IF NOT FACTORY INSTALLED.

E. INSTALL HEATERS IN THERMAL-OVERLOAD RELAYS. SELECT HEATERS BASED ON ACTUAL NAMEPLATE FULL-LOAD

AMPERES AFTER MOTORS ARE INSTALLED.

F. INSTALL, CONNECT, AND FUSE THERMAL-PROTECTOR MONITORING RELAYS FURNISHED WITH MOTOR-DRIVEN

EQUIPMENT.

G. COMPLY WITH NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. IDENTIFY VFCS, COMPONENTS, AND CONTROL WIRING. COMPLY WITH REQUIREMENTS FOR IDENTIFICATION.

1. IDENTIFY FIELD-INSTALLED CONDUCTORS, INTERCONNECTING WIRING, AND COMPONENTS; PROVIDE WARNING

SIGNS.

2. LABEL EACH VFC WITH ENGRAVED NAMEPLATE.


A. MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICE: ENGAGE A FACTORY-AUTHORIZED SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE TO TEST AND INSPECT

COMPONENTS, ASSEMBLIES, AND EQUIPMENT INSTALLATIONS, INCLUDING CONNECTIONS..

B. TESTS AND INSPECTIONS:

1. INSPECT VFC, WIRING, COMPONENTS, CONNECTIONS, AND EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION. TEST AND ADJUST

CONTROLLERS, COMPONENTS, AND EQUIPMENT.

2. TEST INSULATION RESISTANCE FOR EACH VFC ELEMENT, COMPONENT, CONNECTING MOTOR SUPPLY, FEEDER, AND

CONTROL CIRCUITS.

3. TEST CONTINUITY OF EACH CIRCUIT.

4. VERIFY THAT VOLTAGES AT VFC LOCATIONS ARE WITHIN 10 PERCENT OF MOTOR NAMEPLATE RATED VOLTAGES. IF

OUTSIDE THIS RANGE FOR ANY MOTOR, NOTIFY CONSTRUCTION MANAGER BEFORE STARTING THE MOTOR(S).

5. TEST EACH MOTOR FOR PROPER PHASE ROTATION.

6. PERFORM TESTS ACCORDING TO THE INSPECTION AND TEST PROCEDURES FOR ADJUSTABLE SPEED DRIVES STATED

IN NETA ACCEPTANCE TESTING SPECIFICATION. CERTIFY COMPLIANCE WITH TEST PARAMETERS.

7. CORRECT MALFUNCTIONING UNITS ON-SITE, WHERE POSSIBLE, AND RETEST TO DEMONSTRATE COMPLIANCE;

OTHERWISE, REPLACE WITH NEW UNITS AND RETEST.

8. TEST AND ADJUST CONTROLS, REMOTE MONITORING, AND SAFETIES. REPLACE DAMAGED AND MALFUNCTIONING

CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT.

C. VFCS WILL BE CONSIDERED DEFECTIVE IF THEY DO NOT PASS TESTS AND INSPECTIONS..

3.5 STARTUP SERVICE

A. PERFORM STARTUP SERVICE.

1. COMPLETE INSTALLATION AND STARTUP CHECKS ACCORDING TO MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. PROGRAM MICROPROCESSORS FOR REQUIRED OPERATIONAL SEQUENCES, STATUS INDICATIONS, ALARMS, EVENT

RECORDING, AND DISPLAY FEATURES. CLEAR EVENTS MEMORY AFTER FINAL ACCEPTANCE TESTING AND PRIOR TO

SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. TEMPORARY HEATING: APPLY TEMPORARY HEAT TO MAINTAIN TEMPERATURE ACCORDING TO MANUFACTURER'S

WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS UNTIL CONTROLLERS ARE READY TO BE ENERGIZED AND PLACED INTO SERVICE.

B. REPLACE VFCS WHOSE INTERIORS HAVE BEEN EXPOSED TO WATER OR OTHER LIQUIDS PRIOR TO SUBSTANTIAL

COMPLETION.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. TRAIN OWNER'S MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL TO ADJUST, OPERATE, REPROGRAM, AND MAINTAIN VFCS.



EXISTING CT-1


EXISTING GENERATOR

NEW CT-2

NEW CT-3

PPSB1

1

1

LC-4

WP

VIBRATION SENSOR

VIBRATION SENSOR

ALL COOLING TOWER MOTOR

CIRCUITS SHALL BE:

3-#8, 1-#10GND., UON

VFD CABLE GENERAL CABLE

#4580 CVTC OR EQUAL IN 1 1/4"C.

GROUND CABLE SHIELD PER

MANUFACTURER

RECOMMENDATIONS. PROVIDE

LONG RADIUS 90'S. DO NOT

EXCEED MINIMUM BEND RADIUS.

CT-2 VFD

SUPPORT

FROM STEEL

STRUCTURE

EXISTING EXHAUST FANS

2

2

LC-4

WP

BASIN HEATER

3

SUPPORT

FROM STEEL

STRUCTURE

CT-1 VFD

3#10, 1#10GND., 3/4" C.

LC-6

4

ISSUE/ REVISIONS


ENGINEER OF RECORD

PROJECT INFORMATION

A:


FOR:


COLLEGE

DRAWN BY CHECKED BY

PROJECT NO.

PROJECT ADDRESS:

DATE

MJR CAH

OCCC130001001

12/14/2017

7777 S. MAY AVE.


MA

IN B

UIL

DIN

G C

OO

LIN

G T

OW

ER

RE

PL

AC

EM

EN

TO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

CO

MM

UN

ITY

CO

LL

EG

EO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

, OK

PL

OT

TE

D B

Y: M

att R

utko

wski D

AT

E: 1

2/1

4/2

01

7 5

:5

8:4

1 P

M D

WG

N

AM

E: V

:\O

CC

C\C

oo

lin

g T

ow

er R

ep

la

ce

me

nt\D

ra

win

gs\E

10

1.d

wg

LA

ST

S

AV

ED

B

Y: M

ru

tko

wski D

AT

E: 1

2/1

1/2

01

7 1

1:1

2:2

2 A

M


918.877.6000 918.877.4000 FAX


11/14/201795% REVIEW SET


CA # 3537

EXPIRES 6/30/2018

MATTHEWRUTKOWSKI

28077

L

I

C

EN

S

E

D

P

R

O

F

E

SS

IO

N

A

L

E

N

G

IN

E

E

R

O

K

L

AH

O

M

A


E101

PLAN

ELECTRICAL ROOF

1. ALL MATERIAL SHALL FIT THE SPACE AVAILABLE. VERIFY

DIMENSIONS AND CLEARANCES AT BUILDING PRIOR TO

ORDERING. ALL WORKING CLEARANCES AT ELECTRICAL

EQUIPMENT SHALL BE MAINTAINED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE

NEC. COORDINATE WITH OTHER TRADES AS REQUIRED.

2. REFER TO MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT

REQUIRING ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS. NOTIFY ENGINEER, IN

WRITING, TEN DAYS PRIOR TO BID IF MECHANICAL DOCUMENTS

REQUIRE ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS THAT ARE NOT INDICATED

ON ELECTRICAL DOCUMENTS.

3. ELECTRICAL DISCONNECTS, STARTERS, DEVICES, OR RACEWAYS

MOUNTED ON OR ADJACENT TO EQUIPMENT SHALL NOT IMPEDE

ACCESS TO THAT EQUIPMENT. DISCONNECTS AND STARTERS

SHALL BE INSTALLED IN A LOCATION TO MEET THE NEC WORKING

SPACE REQUIREMENTS.

4. LABEL ALL DISCONNECTS, STARTERS, VARIABLE FREQUENCY

DRIVES WITH EQUIPMENT DESIGNATION, SERVING PANELBOARD

DESIGNATION AND CIRCUIT NUMBER. INTERIOR EQUIPMENT MAY

BE LABELED WITH SELF-ADHESIVE VINYL LABELS THAT ARE

PREPRINTED, FLEXIBLE, LAMINATED WITH A CLEAR,

WEATHER-AND CHEMICAL-RESISTANT COATING. EXTERIOR

EQUIPMENT SHALL BE LABELED WITH SCREW RETAINED, UV

STABILIZED PHENOLIC LABELS.

5. COORDINATE WITH MECHANICAL FOR ELECTRICAL CONTROLS

WORK NOT PART OF CONTROLS CONTRACTOR SCOPE OF WORK.

6. ALL BRANCH CIRCUITS LARGER THAN 20A SHALL BE INSTALLED IN

DEDICATED CONDUITS.

7. SLEEVE ALL WALL, FLOOR AND CEILING PENETRATIONS FOR

CABLE INSTALLATIONS. SUPPORT SLEEVES ACCORDINGLY.

FIRESTOP AROUND AND IN SLEEVES AS REQUIRED. FIRESTOP

MATERIAL IN SLEEVE SHALL BE REMOVABLE FOR FUTURE

INSTALLATION OF CABLES.

8. CONTRACTOR SHALL REVIEW CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, , MECHANICAL DRAWINGS,

STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. DO NOT SCALE OR DIMENSION

LOCATIONS FROM THESE DRAWINGS.

9. ALL 15A AND 20A, 120V CIRCUITS WITH CIRCUIT LENGTH GREATER

THAN 100' SHALL BE #10 AWG MINIMUM.

10. A SEPARATE GREEN INSULATED EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

CONDUCTOR SHALL BE INSTALLED WITH THE CIRCUIT

CONDUCTORS, WHETHER INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS OR NOT.

METAL RACEWAY, CABLE ARMOR OR SHEATH SHALL NOT BE USED

AS THE PREFERRED EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR.

RACEWAY SYSTEMS SHALL BE MECHANICALLY AND

ELECTRICALLY CONTINUOUS AND SHALL BE BONDED AT ALL

POINTS TO THE INSULATED EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR

IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE APPLICABLE PROVISIONS OF NEC

ARTICLE 250.

11. THE WORD "PROVIDE" AS USED IN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

SHALL MEAN TO FURNISH AND INSTALL, UNLESS OTHERWISE

NOTED.

12. CONTRACTOR SHALL UPDATE ALL PANELBOARD DIRECTORIES

WITH ALL NEW AND REMOVED CIRCUITS. DIRECTORIES SHALL BE

TYPED. ALL SPARE CIRCUIT BREAKERS SHALL BE LABELED AS

“SPARE” AND TURNED OFF.

13. ALL EQUIPMENT/DEVICES (INCLUDING LIGHTING ASSEMBLIES)

SHALL BE UNDERWRITER LABORATORY (OR OTHER APPROVED

NATIONALLY RECOGNIZED TESTING LABORATORY) LISTED AND

LABELED FOR INSTALLATION AND INTENDED USE.

14. PROVIDE DEDICATED NEUTRALS FOR GFCI CIRCUITS. GFCI

OUTLETS ARE SHOWN FOR ALL OUTLETS REQUIRED TO BE

PROTECTED, HOWEVER, ONLY ONE GFCI DEVICE ON EACH

CIRCUIT MAY BE INSTALLED TO PROTECT THE GFCI OUTLETS

SHOWN. LOCATE GFCI DEVICE IN CIRCUIT TO PROTECT ALL GFCI

OUTLETS SHOWN. GFCI SHALL HAVE A 4-6 mA TRIP.

15. NEW CIRCUIT BREAKERS IN EXISTING PANELS SHALL MATCH THE

EXISTING CIRCUIT BREAKERS MANUFACTURER AND AIC RATING.

GENERAL NOTES

N

1. PROVIDE POWER CONNECTION TO MOTOR CIRCUIT

PROTECTION PANEL FURNISHED WITH TOWER. MAKE FINAL

CONNECTIONS TO MOTORS.

2. PROVIDE POWER CONNECTION PER MANUFACTURER

RECOMENDATIONS.

3. CONNECT TO EXISTING SPARE 20A CIRCUIT BREAKER IN

SWITCHBOARD.

4. PROVIDE POWER CONNECTION(S) TO HEAT TRACE

CONTROLLER(S). REFER TO MECHANICAL FOR ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION. PROVIDE QUANTITY OF CONNECTIONS AS

REQUIRED. MULTIPLE CONNECTIONS MAY SHARE THE SAME

CIRCUIT. CONNECT TO GFEP CIRCUIT BREAKER.

KEY NOTES

EXTEND AND PROVIDE NEW LIGHTNING

PROTECTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS FOR

THE NEW COOLING TOWER ON ROOF.

CONNECT TO EXISTING LIGHTNING

PROTECTION SYSTEM. FURNISH AND INSTALL

IN ACCORDANCE WITH NFPA 780, AND UL

REQUIREMENTS. MECHANICAL GROUND AND

LIGHTING PROTECTION BONDING SHALL BE IN

ACCORDANCE WITH NFPA 70.

ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS

ASSORTED RACEWAY SYMBOLS

DISTRIBUTION SYMBOLS

XXX-XX

JUNCTION BOX,

WITH CIRCUIT NUMBER

VFD

RECEPTACLE SYMBOLS

VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE

GFCI RECEPTACLE, DUPLEX, WITH

WEATHERPROOF CAST IN-USE COVER

NON FUSED DISCONNECT

HOMERUN WITH PANEL AND CIRCUIT

NUMBER INDICATEDLA-1

WP





EXISTING CDWP-3

VFD

CT-2 VFD

CT-3 VFD

1

1

2

EXISTING LOAD CENTER LC3

CIRCUIT TO "PPMCC2"

VFD

4

5

7

8

REFER TO ROOF PLAN

FOR CIRCUIT SIZE FROM

VFD TO MOTOR

3#8,1#10GND.,3/4"C

NEW CDWP-3

6

PPMCC2

3-#4,1-#8GND.,1"C.

REMOVE CDWP-3

DISCONNECT

NEW SIDE STREAM FILTER (ALTERNATE)

VFD

11

PPMCC2

MAKE CONNECTION TO FACTORY FURNISHED STARTER/DISCONNECT

EXISTING CDWP-69

10

3#12, 1-#12 GND., 1/2"C.

AS PART OF ALTERNATE FOR SIDE STREAM

FILTER, CDWP-3 HORSEPOWER INCREASES.

PROVIDE VFD RATED FOR INCREASED HP, 100A

CIRCUIT BREAKER IN PPMCC2, AND LARGER

CIRCUIT, 3#3, 1-#8, 1" C.

ISSUE/ REVISIONS


ENGINEER OF RECORD

PROJECT INFORMATION

A:


FOR:


COLLEGE

DRAWN BY CHECKED BY

PROJECT NO.

PROJECT ADDRESS:

DATE

MJR CAH

OCCC130001001

12/14/2017

7777 S. MAY AVE.


MA

IN B

UIL

DIN

G C

OO

LIN

G T

OW

ER

RE

PL

AC

EM

EN

TO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

CO

MM

UN

ITY

CO

LL

EG

EO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

, OK

PL

OT

TE

D B

Y: M

att R

utko

wski D

AT

E: 1

2/1

4/2

01

7 5

:5

8:4

1 P

M D

WG

N

AM

E: V

:\O

CC

C\C

oo

lin

g T

ow

er R

ep

la

ce

me

nt\D

ra

win

gs\E

10

2.d

wg

LA

ST

S

AV

ED

B

Y: M

ru

tko

wski D

AT

E: 1

2/1

1/2

01

7 1

1:1

5:2

7 A

M


918.877.6000 918.877.4000 FAX


11/14/201795% REVIEW SET


CA # 3537

EXPIRES 6/30/2018

MATTHEWRUTKOWSKI

28077

L

I

C

EN

S

E

D

P

R

O

F

E

SS

IO

N

A

L

E

N

G

IN

E

E

R

O

K

L

AH

O

M

A


E102

FLOOR PLAN

ELECTRICAL GROUND

1. INSTALL NEW VFD FURNISHED WITH TOWER.

2. REMOVE EXISTING CT-2 AND CT-4 STARTER BUCKETS.

REPLACE WITH GE E9000 SERIES CIRCUIT BREAKER BUCKET

WITH 50A/3P CIRCUIT BREAKER. PROVIDE ORIGINAL

MANUFACTURER MOUNTING AND INSTALLATION HARDWARE,

CLOSURE PLATES, AND TRIM PIECES AS REQUIRED TO

COMPLETE THE INSTALLATION. FIELD FABRICATED HARDWARE

SHALL NOT BE ACCEPTABLE. LABEL CIRCUIT BREAKERS WITH

THE NEW LOADS.

3. PROVIDE ONE NEW 20A/1P CIRCUIT BREAKER FOR SERVICE

RECEPTACLES AND ONE 30A/1P GFEP CIRCUIT BREAKER FOR

HEAT TRACE IN EXISTING LOAD CENTER.








5. REMOVE EXISTING CT-3 VFD AND RETURN TO OWNER.

6. PROVIDE NEW VFD. REFER TO MECH SCHEDULES FOR HP

RATING. REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS FOR ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION. PROVIDE NEW CIRCUIT AS SHOWN.





NEW WORK.

8. PROVIDE A VFD LINE SIDEDV/DT FILTER, TCI VIK OR EQUAL.

SIZE FILTER PER MANUFACTURER RECOMMENDATIONS.

9. DISCONNECT EXISTING EQUIPMENT. RETAIN CIRCUIT FOR

REUSE.








11. EXTEND CIRCUIT FROM DISCONNECTED CDWP-6.

KEY NOTES

N


CT-4 TO BE REMOVED

CT-3 TO BE REMOVED

EXISTING ELECTRICAL TRANSFORMERS AND EQUIPMENT TO REMAIN

1

1

CT-2 TO BE REMOVED1

EXISTING COOLING TOWER TO REMAIN

EXISTING EXHAUST FANS TO REMAIN


ISSUE/ REVISIONS


ENGINEER OF RECORD

PROJECT INFORMATION

A:


FOR:


COLLEGE

DRAWN BY CHECKED BY

PROJECT NO.

PROJECT ADDRESS:

DATE

MJR CAH

OCCC130001001

12/14/2017

7777 S. MAY AVE.


MA

IN B

UIL

DIN

G C

OO

LIN

G T

OW

ER

RE

PL

AC

EM

EN

TO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

CO

MM

UN

ITY

CO

LL

EG

EO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

, OK

PL

OT

TE

D B

Y: M

att R

utko

wski D

AT

E: 1

2/1

4/2

01

7 5

:5

8:4

0 P

M D

WG

N

AM

E: V

:\O

CC

C\C

oo

lin

g T

ow

er R

ep

la

ce

me

nt\D

ra

win

gs\E

D1

01

.d

wg

LA

ST

S

AV

ED

B

Y: M

ru

tko

wski D

AT

E: 1

2/1

4/2

01

7 8

:1

4:3

6 A

M


918.877.6000 918.877.4000 FAX


11/14/201795% REVIEW SET


CA # 3537

EXPIRES 6/30/2018

MATTHEWRUTKOWSKI

28077

L

I

C

EN

S

E

D

P

R

O

F

E

SS

IO

N

A

L

E

N

G

IN

E

E

R

O

K

L

AH

O

M

A


ED101

DEMOLITION PLAN

ELECTRICAL ROOF/ SITE





NEW WORK.

KEY NOTES

N

A. CONTRACTOR SHALL VISIT THE SITE, PRIOR TO BID, TO EVALUATE SCOPE OF

DEMOLITION AND EXISTING CONDITIONS.

B. CONTRACTOR SHALL MAINTAIN EXISTING ELECTRICAL SERVICE FOR ALL AREAS

OUTSIDE OF THE SCOPE OF WORK AREA THROUGHOUT THE PROJECT, UNLESS

SCHEDULED AND AGREED TO IN WRITING WITH THE OWNER/CLIENT. CONTRACTOR

SHALL PROVIDE A MINIMUM OF TWO WEEKS NOTICE TO OWNER/CLIENT FOR ALL

SHUTDOWNS.

C. REFER TO MECHANICAL DOCUMENTS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ABOUT ITEMS

TO BE DEMOLISHED.

D. CONDUCTORS AND RACEWAYS ASSOCIATED WITH EQUIPMENT/DEVICES TO BE

REMOVED SHALL BE REMOVED. RACEWAYS SHALL BE REMOVED TO THE NEXT

DEVICE, JUNCTION BOX, OR OVERCURRENT DEVICE. ALL RACEWAYS IN

INACCESSIBLE CONCEALED AREAS MAY REMAIN. ALL CONDUCTORS SHALL BE

REMOVED TO THE OVERCURRENT DEVICE, UNLESS USED FOR NEW OR EXISTING

TO REMAIN EQUIPMENT/DEVICES.

E. CONTRACTOR SHALL CONFIRM IF THERE ARE ANY DEVICES TO REMAIN ON THE

CIRCUITS THAT ARE SCHEDULED TO HAVE EQUIPMENT/DEVICES DEMOLISHED.

CONTRACTOR SHALL UPDATE PANEL SCHEDULES ACCORDINGLY. IF ALL

EQUIPMENT/DEVICES HAVE BEEN REMOVED FROM A CIRCUIT THEN THE

OVERCURRENT DEVICE SHALL BE TURNED OFF AND LABELED AS “SPARE”.

F. COORDINATE THE OWNERSHIP OF ALL DEMOLISHED ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT WITH

THE OWNER/CLIENT, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO: DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT.

ALL EQUIPMENT TO BE RETURNED TO THE OWNER/CLIENT SHALL BE PALLETIZED

AND DELIVERED TO THE OWNER/CLIENT'S LOCATION BY THE CONTRACTOR.

G. CONTRACTOR SHALL DISPOSE OF ALL EQUIPMENT/DEVICES IN ACCORDANCE WITH

APPLICABLE GOVERNMENT STANDARDS.

H. CUT ABANDONED BELOW GRADE CONDUIT OFF FLUSH OR BELOW FLOOR AND FILL

WITH NON-SHRINK GROUT.

I. HOLES LEFT BY REMOVAL OF ELECTRICAL DEVICES, BOXES, ENCLOSURES, ETC IN

EXISTING TO REMAIN WALLS SHALL BE PATCHED.

J. SEAL ALL PENETRATIONS THROUGH FIRE-RATED WALLS AND FLOORS WITH

FIREPROOFING MATERIAL EQUAL TO THE FIRE RATING OF THE WALL OR FLOOR.

K. RELOCATE LIGHTS, CONDUITS, BOXES, ETC AS REQUIRED.

DEMOLITION NOTES

ISSUE/ REVISIONS

PROJECT INFORMATION

A:


FOR:


COLLEGE

DRAWN BY CHECKED BY

PROJECT NO.

PROJECT ADDRESS:

DATE

OCCC130001001

12/14/2017

7777 S. MAY AVE.


MA

IN B

UIL

DIN

G C

OO

LIN

G T

OW

ER

RE

PL

AC

EM

EN

TO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

CO

MM

UN

ITY

CO

LL

EG

EO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

, OK

PL

OT

TE

D B

Y: R

ach

el S

pitle

r D

AT

E: 1

2/1

4/2

01

7 9

:4

8:0

7 A

M D

WG

N

AM

E: V

:\O

CC

C\C

oo

lin

g T

ow

er R

ep

la

ce

me

nt\D

ra

win

gs\G

00

1.d

wg

LA

ST

S

AV

ED

B

Y: R

sp

itle

r D

AT

E: 1

2/1

3/2

01

7 1

1:1

3:1

6 A

M


918.877.6000 918.877.4000 FAX


11/14/201795% REVIEW SET


OKLAHOMA CITYCOMMUNITY COLLEGE

Main Building Cooling Tower Replacement

Oklahoma City, Oklahoma

FOR CONSTRUCTION SET

12/14/2017

G001

COVER SHEET

ISSUE/ REVISIONS


ENGINEER OF RECORD

PROJECT INFORMATION

A:


FOR:


COLLEGE

DRAWN BY CHECKED BY

PROJECT NO.

PROJECT ADDRESS:

DATE

MJR JDF

OCCC130001001

12/14/2017

7777 S. MAY AVE.


MA

IN B

UIL

DIN

G C

OO

LIN

G T

OW

ER

RE

PL

AC

EM

EN

TO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

CO

MM

UN

ITY

CO

LL

EG

EO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

, OK

PL

OT

TE

D B

Y: R

ach

el S

pitle

r D

AT

E: 1

2/1

4/2

01

7 9

:4

7:5

0 A

M D

WG

N

AM

E: V

:\O

CC

C\C

oo

lin

g T

ow

er R

ep

la

ce

me

nt\D

ra

win

gs\G

00

2.d

wg

LA

ST

S

AV

ED

B

Y: M

ru

tko

wski D

AT

E: 1

2/1

4/2

01

7 8

:1

4:4

1 A

M


918.877.6000 918.877.4000 FAX


11/14/201795% REVIEW SET


CA # 3537

EXPIRES 6/30/2018

L

I

C

EN

S

E

D

P

R

O

F

E

SS

IO

N

A

L

E

N

G

IN

E

E

R

O

K

L

AH

O

M

A

JEFFERYDON

FERGUSON19755


N

G002

INDEX / CODE

INFORMATION SHEET

CAMPUS LOCATIONPROJECT LOCATION

ISSUE/ REVISIONS


ENGINEER OF RECORD

PROJECT INFORMATION

A:


FOR:


COLLEGE

DRAWN BY CHECKED BY

PROJECT NO.

PROJECT ADDRESS:

DATE

MJR JDF

OCCC130001001

12/14/2017

7777 S. MAY AVE.


MA

IN B

UIL

DIN

G C

OO

LIN

G T

OW

ER

RE

PL

AC

EM

EN

TO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

CO

MM

UN

ITY

CO

LL

EG

EO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

, OK

PL

OT

TE

D B

Y: R

ach

el S

pitle

r D

AT

E: 1

2/1

4/2

01

7 9

:4

7:2

4 A

M D

WG

N

AM

E: V

:\O

CC

C\C

oo

lin

g T

ow

er R

ep

la

ce

me

nt\D

ra

win

gs\M

00

1.d

wg

LA

ST

S

AV

ED

B

Y: R

sp

itle

r D

AT

E: 1

2/1

3/2

01

7 3

:5

7:3

1 P

M


918.877.6000 918.877.4000 FAX


11/14/201795% REVIEW SET


CA # 3537

EXPIRES 6/30/2018

L

I

C

EN

S

E

D

P

R

O

F

E

SS

IO

N

A

L

E

N

G

IN

E

E

R

O

K

L

AH

O

M

A

JEFFERYDON

FERGUSON19755


M001

ABBREVIATIONS

NOTES, AND

MECHANICAL SYMBOLS,

DUCT SECTION, EXHAUST

DUCTWORK TOE-HEEL TAP

(SQUARE TO SQUARE)

RETURN GRILLE

EXHAUST GRILLE


(SQUARE TO ROUND)

5'-0" MAX LENGTH FOR FLEX DUCT

RIGID ELBOW, FLEXIBLE

ELBOWS NOT ALLOWED

RIGID SUPPLY DUCTWORK

90° RECTANGULAR ELBOW WITH SINGLE


90° ROUND ELBOW,

RADIUS/DIAMETER=1.5

45° RECTANGULAR BEND,

RADIUS/DIAMETER=1.5

45° ROUND BEND,

RADIUS/DIAMETER=1.5


(ROUND-TO-ROUND)

F=FALL IN DUCT ELEV R=RISE IN DUCT ELEV

NOTE: AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES ARE

ARE DENOTED AS ILLUSTRATED BELOW:

90° RECTANGULAR ELBOW DOWN WITH

SINGLE THICKNESS TURNING VANES

90° RECTANGULAR ELBOW UP WITH SINGLE


LINEAR DIFFUSER, NO ARROWS

INDICATE 2-WAY AIR PATTERN

SIDEWALL SUPPLY REGISTER OR GRILLE

CEILING DIFFUSER SQUARE

PATTERN. NO ARROWS INDICATE

4-WAY AIR PATTERN

DUCT SECTION, RETURN

MVD

SUPPLY DIFFUSER

MAIN DUCTWORK

DIFFUSER

NOTE: SINGLE LINE DUCT TAP SYMBOLS ARE DENOTED

AS ILLUSTRATED BELOW:

RECTANGULAR TO RECTANGULAR

ROUND TO ROUND

RECTANGULAR TO ROUND

DUCT SIZE TRANSITION

CEILING DIFFUSER ROUND PATTERN.

NO ARROWS INDICATE 4-WAY AIR

PATTERN

DUCT SECTION, SUPPLY

90° ROUND ELBOW DOWN

90° ROUND ELBOW UP

SUPPLY DIFFUSER WITH FACTORY INSTALLED

QUADRANT BLANKS. PROVIDE BLANKS AS

SHOWN ON DRAWINGS.

FIRE/SMOKE DAMPER

DEFINITION OF LINEWEIGHTS AND LINETYPES:

OUTLINE OF NEW EQUIPMENT INSTALLED

ABOVE THE FLOOR SHOWN (I.E., ROOF)

XXX-X

EQUIPMENT TAG

EQUIPMENT NUMBER

BFW

CHWS

CHWR

BA

CA

CD

CP

LPC

MPC

HPC

CWS

CWR

HWS

HWR

S

MPS

HPS

RG

RL


REFRIGERANT LIQUID

REFRIGERANT GAS

STEAM, HIGH PRESS 125 PSI & ABOVE

STEAM, MED PRESS 16-124 PSI

STEAM, LOW PRESS 0-15 PSI

HEATING WATER RETURN

HEATING WATER SUPPLY

CONDENSER WATER RETURN

CONDENSER WATER SUPPLY

CONDENSATE, HIGH PRESS 125 PSI & ABOVE

CONDENSATE, MED PRESS 16-124 PSI

CONDENSATE, LOW PRESS 0-15 PSI

CONDENSATE, PUMPED

CONDENSATE, DRAIN

COMPRESSED AIR

COMPRESSED AIR, BREATHING AIR

CHILLED WATER RETURN

CHILLED WATER SUPPLY

BOILER FEED WATER

PIPE LABEL DESCRIPTION

SYMBOL DESCRIPTIONSYMBOL DESCRIPTION

AUTOMATIC AIR VENT

BACKFLOW PREVENTER

BALL VALVE

BASKET STEAM TRAP

BLIND FLANGE

BUTTERFLY VALVE

CAP

CHECK VALVE

CHECK VALVE, SILENT

CIRCUIT SETTER

COMPRESSED AIR CONNECTION



FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR

GATE VALVE

GATE VALVE, ANGLE

GENERAL VALVE, SEE SPECS

GLOBE VALVE

GLOBE VALVE, ANGLE

PLUG VALVE

PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE RELIEF

PRESSURE REDUCING STATION, STEAM

PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE

RELIEF VALVE, ASME

SOLENOID VALVE

STRAINER

SUCTION DIFFUSER

THERMOSTAT, HUMIDISTAT

TRIPLE DUTY VALVE

UNION

VENTURI

RISER DOWN (ELBOW)

RISER UP (ELBOW)

RISE OR DROP

TEE DOWN

TEE UP

TOP CONNECTION

BOTTOM CONNECTION

SIDE CONNECTION

FLOW IN DIRECTION OF ARROW

PIPE SLOPE IN DIRECTION OF ARROW

TIE-IN TO EXISTING AT THIS POINT

REMOVE EXISTING TO THIS POINT

PUMP

DEVICE TYPE, REFER TO SCHEDULE

CFM

NECK SIZE

XXxXX

XXX

NEW CONSTRUCTION

EXISTING TO REMAIN

DEMOLITION

PRS

PSD

T H

45° RECTANGULAR BEND

END CAP

F

AAV

TYPICAL RUNOUT

S

TEMPERATURE, HUMIDITY & CO2 SENSOR

FIRE DAMPER

SMOKE DAMPER

DAMPER SYMBOLS:

MOTORIZED DAMPER

MECHANICAL SYMBOLS LEGEND

DUCTWORK SPIN-IN TAP

(SQUARE TO ROUND)

R REFRIGERANT

DUCTWORK 45° LATERAL TAP

(ROUND-TO-ROUND)

DUCTWORK 90° TAP

(ROUND-TO-ROUND)

SMOKE DETECTOR

A

AC AIR COMPRESSOR

ACC AIR COOLED CHILLER

ACFM ACTUAL CUBIC FEET PER MINUTE

ADD ADDENDUM

ADJ ADJUSTABLE

AFF ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR

AHU AIR HANDLING UNIT

AFUE ANNUAL FUEL UTILIZATION EFFICIENCY

APD AIR PRESSURE DROP

AR AIR RECEIVER

AV ACID VENT

AVTR ACID VENT THRU THE ROOF

AW ACID WASTE

B

BA BREATHING AIR, COMPRESSED

BAC BREATHING AIR COMPRESSOR

BCU BLOWER COIL UNIT

BFPD BACK FLOW PREVENTION DEVICE

BFW BOILER FEED WATER

BTUH BRITISH THERMAL UNIT PER HOUR

C

CA COMPRESSED AIR

CC COOLING COIL

CD CONDENSATE DRAIN

CF CEILING FAN

CFM CUBIC FEET PER MINUTE

CH CHILLER (WATER COOLED)

CHWP CHILLED WATER PUMP

CHWS CHILLED WATER SUPPLY

CHWR CHILLED WATER RETURN

CL CENTER LINE

CO CLEANOUT

CONT CONTINUATION

CP PUMPED CONDENSATE

CT COOLING TOWER

CU CONDENSING UNIT

CWP CONDENSER WATER PUMP

CWS CONDENSER WATER SUPPLY

CWR CONDENSER WATER RETURN

D

DCW DOMESTIC COLD WATER

DF DRINKING FOUNTAIN

DHW DOMESTIC HOT WATER

DI DEIONIZED WATER

DN DOWN

DOAU DEDICATED OUTDOOR AIR UNIT

DP DEWPOINT

DS DISTILLED WATER

DWG DRAWING

DWV DRAIN WASTE AND VENT

E

E/A EXHAUST AIR

EAG EXHAUST AIR GRILLE

EAT ENTERING AIR TEMPERATURE

EDB ENTERING DRY BULB

EEW EMERGENCY EYE WASH

EF EXHAUST FAN

ENGR ENGINEER

EPO EMERGENCY POWER OFF

ESP EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE

EQUIP EQUIPMENT

EWB ENTERING WET BULB

EWC ELECTRIC WATER COOLER

EWH ELECTRIC WATER HEATER

EWT ENTERING WATER TEMPERATURE

EXT EXPANSION TANK

F

F FAHRENHEIT

FCO FLOOR CLEANOUT

FCU FAN COIL UNIT

FD FLOOR DRAIN

FH FUME HOOD

FLR FLOOR

FP FIRE PROTECTION

FPM FEET PER MINUTE

FPWH FREEZE PROOF WALL HYDRANT

FS FLOOR SINK

FT FOOT, FEET

G

G NATURAL GAS, LOW PRESSURE

GAL GALLON, GALLONS

GPH GALLONS PER HOUR

GPM GALLONS PER MINUTE

GCO GRADE CLEAN OUT

GW GREASE WASTE

GWH GAS WATER HEATER

H

HB HOSE BIBB

HD HEAD

HP HORSEPOWER

HPC HIGH PRESSURE CONDENSATE

HPG NATURAL GAS, HIGH PRESSURE

HPS HIGH PRESSURE STEAM

HWR HEATING WATER RETURN

HWS HEATING WATER SUPPLY

HEX HEAT EXCHANGER

I

IDU INDOOR UNIT

IH INTAKE HOOD

IN INCH, INCHES

INV INVERT

INWC INCHES OF WATER COLUMN

IW IRRIGATION WATER

K

KW KILOWATT

K THOUSAND

L

L LOUVER

LAT LEAVING AIR TEMPERATURE

LB POUND, POUNDS

LDB LEAVING DRY BULB

LPC LOW PRESSURE CONDENSATE

LPS LOW PRESSURE STEAM

LWB LEAVING WET BULB

LWT LEAVING WATER TEMPERATURE

M

M THOUSAND

MBH THOUSAND BTUH

MFG MANUFACTURER

MPG NATURAL GAS, MEDIUM PRESSURE

MIN MINIMUM

MISC MISCELLANEOUS

MPC MEDIUM PRESSURE CONDENSATE

MPS MEDIUM PRESSURE STEAM

MSB MOP SINK BASIN

MVD MANUAL VOLUME DAMPER

N

NC NORMALLY CLOSED

NIC NOT IN CONTRACT

NO NORMALLY OPEN or NUMBER

NOM NOMINAL

NTS NOT TO SCALE

O

O/A OUTSIDE AIR

ODU OUTDOOR UNIT

P

PH PHASE

PPRD PRIMARY ROOF DRAIN

PRV PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE

PSI POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH

PSIA POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH

ABSOLUTE

PSIG POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH GAGE

R

R REFRIGERANT

R/A RETURN AIR

RAD REFRIGERATED AIR DRYER

RAG RETURN AIR GRILLE

RD ROOF DRAIN

RE REFER TO

RG REFRIGERANT GAS

RH RELATIVE HUMIDITY

RL REFRIGERANT LIQUID

RL/A RELIEF AIR

RM ROOM

RPM REVOLUTIONS PER MINUTE

RPS REVOLUTIONS PER SECOND


RTU ROOFTOP UNIT

RV RELIEF VALVE

Ø ROUND, DIAMETER

S

S/A SUPPLY AIR

SAG SUPPLY AIR GRILLE

SCFM STANDARD CUBIC FEET PER MINUTE

SD STORM DRAIN

SF SUPPLY FAN

SP STATIC PRESSURE

SRD SECONDARY ROOF DRAIN

SS SANITARY SEWER or STAINLESS

STEEL

STM STEAM

SQIN SQUARE INCH/INCHES

SQFT SQUARE FOOT/FEET

T

T/A TRANSFER AIR

TAG TRANSFER AIR GRILLE

TDH TOTAL DYNAMIC HEAD

TEMP TEMPERATURE

THRU THROUGH

TMV THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE

TSP TOTAL STATIC PRESSURE

TSTAT THERMOSTAT

TYP TYPICAL

U

UH UNIT HEATER

UL UNDERWRITER'S LABORATORIES

UNO UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE

UR URINAL

V

V VENT or VOLT

VAC VACUUM

VFD VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE

VRF VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW

VTR VENT THRU THE ROOF

VTW VENT THRU THE WALL

W

W WATT

WAG WATER AND GAS

WB WET BULB or WASHER BOX

WC WATER CLOSET

WHA WATER HAMMER ARRESTOR

Y

YH YARD HYDRANT

MECHANICAL ABBREVIATIONS

1. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL VISIT THE SITE BEFORE BIDDING AND SHALL BECOME FULLY INFORMED AS

TO THE EXTENT AND CHARACTER OF THE WORK REQUIRED AND ITS RELATION TO OTHER WORK.

FAILURE TO VISIT SITE SHALL NOT CONSTITUTE A BASIS FOR FUTURE CLAIMS.

2. DEMOLISH EXISTING AS REQUIRED FOR NEW CONSTRUCTION AS NOTED ON DRAWINGS. AVOID

DISRUPTION OF SERVICES DURING NORMAL BUSINESS HOURS. ALL SYSTEM SHUT-DOWNS AND

DISRUPTION OF BUILDING SERVICES SHALL BE COORDINATED WITH OWNER AND SCHEDULED AFTER

NORMAL BUILDING HOURS OR AS OTHERWISE APPROVED BY OWNER.

3. PRIOR TO DEMOLITION FIELD VERIFY AND IDENTIFY ANY EXISTING EQUIPMENT TO REMAIN IN

SERVICE THAT IS SERVED BY SYSTEMS TO BE DEMOLISHED. NOTIFY ENGINEER OF ANY SUCH

CONDITIONS AND REMOVE AND/OR RELOCATE THE SERVICES AS DIRECTED.

4. FIELD VERIFY EXISTING SYSTEM PRESSURES AND TEMPERATURES PRIOR TO ANY SYSTEM TIE-INS.

ALL NEW MATERIALS SHALL MEET OR EXCEED PERFORMANCE OF MATERIALS USED ON EXISTING

SYSTEMS.

5. MEET WITH OWNER PRIOR TO DEMOLITION TO IDENTIFY WHETHER EXISTING MATERIALS SYSTEMS,

EQUIPMENT, ETC. ARE CONSIDERED SALVAGE OR DEBRIS. REMOVE DEBRIS FROM SITE AND

DISPOSE OF IN AN APPROVED MANNER. RETURN SALVAGE TO OWNER IN A LOCATION AND MANNER

AS DIRECTED BY OWNER.

6. TERMINATE DEMOLISHED SYSTEM SERVICES IN A CONCEALED LOCATION IN AN APPROVED MANNER.

COORDINATE WITH NEW AND EXISTING CONSTRUCTION.

7. FIELD VERIFY EXISTING PIPING LOCATIONS PRIOR TO WORK.

8. WHERE REQUIRED, COORDINATE EQUIPMENT ELECTRICAL TERMINATION REQUIREMENTS WITH

ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR.

9. THE CONTRACTOR TO FIELD VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS AND EXACT LOCATION OF ALL

EQUIPMENT, DUCTWORK, AND PIPING, INCLUDING SYSTEM TIE-INS. NOTIFY ENGINEER OF ANY

MODIFICATIONS REQUIRED FROM THE PLANS TO FACILITATE INSTALLATION PRIOR TO INSTALLATION.

10. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE AND SCHEDULE ALL CONSTRUCTION WITH BUILDING

OCCUPANTS LOCATED IN THE WORK AREA.

11. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE ALL PATCH AND REPAIR OF WALLS AND FLOORS WHEN

DISTURBED BY NEW CONSTRUCTION.

12. WHERE SYSTEM TIE-INS ARE MADE AND AT ALL LOCATIONS WHERE DAMAGE OCCURRED FROM NEW

CONSTRUCTION, PATCH AND REPAIR DAMAGED INSULATION WITH INSULATION TYPE AND

THICKNESS TO MATCH EXISTING.

13. TEST AND BALANCE EXISTING HVAC SYSTEMS AS REQUIRED TO ACCOMMODATE SYSTEM

MODIFICATIONS AND ADDITIONS. MAINTAIN ACCEPTABLE COMFORT LEVELS DURING TEST AND

BALANCE AS REQUIRED. ENSURE THE INTEGRITY OF THE EXISTING SYSTEM BALANCE.

14. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE WORK WITH EXISTING FIRE PROTECTION PIPING. ANY WORK

ASSOCIATED WITH MODIFYING THESE SYSTEMS SHALL BE PERFORMED BY A LICENSED AND

APPROVED CONTRACTOR. FIRE PROTECTION CONTRACTOR SHALL INFORM THE BUILDING SECURITY

OFFICE EVERY DAY WHEN A SHUTDOWN OF SPRINKLER SYSTEM IS REQUIRED FOR CONSTRUCTION.

THE CONTRACTOR SHALL RECONNECT AND FILL THE SPRINKLER SYSTEM INTO WORKING

CONDITION AT THE END OF EACH WORKING DAY TO ASSURE PROTECTION DURING UNOCCUPIED

PERIODS.

15. ALL CEILING TILE REMOVED FOR INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT AND PIPING SHALL BE REINSTALLED

AND REPLACED AS REQUIRED TO MATCH PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONDITION.

DEMOLITION AND RENOVATION NOTES

1. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE TO COMPLY WITH CURRENT APPLICABLE LOCAL, STATE AND

FEDERAL CODES AND ORDINANCES AND IS RESPONSIBLE TO COMPLY WITH ALL REGULATIONS OF

REGULATORY AGENCIES HAVING JURISDICTION. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ALSO CONFORM TO THE

REQUIREMENTS OF THE OWNER'S INSURANCE CARRIER. NOTIFY THE ENGINEER OF ANY CONFLICTS

PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. CODES, ORDINANCES AND REGULATIONS SHALL HAVE PRECEDENCE OVER

SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS WHERE THERE IS A CONFLICT.

2. PAY ALL LAWFUL FEES, PERMITS OR LICENSES REQUIRED TO ACCOMPLISH WORK. OBTAIN AND PAY

FOR ALL NECESSARY CERTIFICATES OF APPROVAL.

3. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE TO PROVIDE ALL LABOR, MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, SERVICE AND

ANYTHING REASONABLY INCIDENTAL TO COMPLETE ALL WORK INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS AND

AS SPECIFIED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE INTENT OF THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS.

4. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE TO VISIT AND EXAMINE THE JOB SITE AND BECOME FAMILIAR

WITH ALL EXISTING CONDITIONS PERTINENT TO THE WORK TO BE PERFORMED.

5. INCORPORATE ALL CODE AND ORDINANCE REQUIREMENTS INTO THE BID AND INSTALLATION OF

WORK. NO ADDITIONAL FUNDS WILL BE ALLOCATED FOR WORK REQUIRED TO CONFORM TO

REGULATIONS AND REQUIREMENT AND/OR TO OBTAIN APPROVAL OF WORK.

6. THE DRAWINGS ARE DIAGRAMMATIC AND ARE ONLY INTENDED TO DEFINE THE BASIC FUNCTIONS

REQUIRED. THE DRAWINGS SHALL BE FOLLOWED AS CLOSELY AS ACTUAL CONSTRUCTION

CONDITIONS AND COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES WILL ALLOW. MINOR DEVIATIONS FROM THE

DESIGN LAYOUT ARE ANTICIPATED AND ARE A PART OF THE WORK INCLUDED; HOWEVER, CHANGES

THAT ALTER THE CHARACTER OF THE WORK ARE NOT PERMITTED. APPROVAL OF ARCHITECT AND

ENGINEER SHALL BE OBTAINED BEFORE DEVIATIONS FROM THESE PLANS ARE MADE.

7. PLUMBING AND MECHANICAL SYSTEMS ARE NOT DIMENSIONED. DO NOT SCALE FROM DRAWING(S).

THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE WITH OTHER TRADES AND ENSURE THERE IS AVAILABLE

SPACE FOR INSTALLATION BEFORE ORDERING EQUIPMENT AND FABRICATING PIPING AND/OR

DUCTWORK.

8. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL STUDY THE STRUCTURAL, MECHANICAL, AND ELECTRICAL PLANS TO

INSURE ALL MECHANICAL SYSTEMS WILL FIT WITH SUFFICIENT CLEARANCES FOR INSTALLATION,

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE. NOTIFY THE ENGINEER OF ANY CONFLICTS PRIOR TO INSTALLATION.

9. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COMPLY WITH SPECIFICATIONS AND INDUSTRY STANDARDS FOR ALL

INSTALLATIONS.

10. ALL VALVES, FITTINGS AND PIPING SHALL BE SUITABLE FOR INTENDED SERVICE AND SYSTEM

TEMPERATURES AND PRESSURES.

11. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED, CONTRACTOR SHALL REFER TO MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR

MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS. REFER TO PLUMBING DRAWINGS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT.

12. SEAL ALL PENETRATIONS WATER TIGHT. SEAL AROUND ALL WALL PENETRATIONS. PROVIDE

ESCUTCHEONS ON ALL PIPING ON EXTERIOR AND EXPOSED LOCATIONS. CAULK WITH REQUIRED

THICKNESS 3M BRAND FIRE BARRIER CAULK CP-25 (OR OTHER APPROVED METHOD) TO MAINTAIN

FIRE RESISTANCE RATING OF FIRE RATED ASSEMBLIES.

13. ALL CUTTING AND PATCHING OF STRUCTURE SHALL BE APPROVED BY THE OWNER PRIOR TO

PERFORMING WORK. CONSULT THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER IF REQUIRED.

14. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE ALL ROUTING AND MOUNTING OF EQUIPMENT, DUCTWORK,

PIPING, ETC (ALL WORK) WITH ALL OTHER TRADES.

15. ROUTE PIPING ABOVE CEILING EQUIPMENT AS HIGH AS POSSIBLE ABOVE FINISHED CEILING TO

AVOID CONFLICT WITH LIGHTS.

16. INSTALL ALL PIPING PARALLEL AND PERPENDICULAR TO BUILDING WALLS AND PARTITIONS UNLESS

DISTINCTLY SHOWN OR NOTED OTHERWISE.

17. ROUTE PIPING LOCATED NEAR EACH OTHER PARALLEL IN ALL PLANES AND WITH SUFFICIENT

CLEARANCE.

18. ALL PIPING SHALL BE INSTALLED SO THAT IT MAY EXPAND AND CONTRACT FREELY WITHOUT

DAMAGES TO EQUIPMENT, OTHER WORK, OR INJURY TO PIPING SYSTEM, ALL NECESSARY SWING

JOINTS, EXPANSION JOINTS, OR OFFSETS TO PROTECT PIPING, ETC. SHALL BE INSTALLED WHETHER

INDICATED OR NOT.

19. PROPERLY SUPPORT ALL PIPING. PROVIDE ALL REQUIRED ANCHORS, GUIDES AND EXPANSION

DEVICES.

20. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL TAKE ALL NECESSARY PRECAUTIONS TO PROTECT ALL MATERIAL,

EQUIPMENT, APPARATUS AND WORK FROM DAMAGE. FAILURE TO DO SO TO THE SATISFACTION OF

THE OWNER WILL BE SUFFICIENT CAUSE FOR THE REJECTION OF THE MATERIAL, EQUIPMENT,

APPARATUS AND WORK IN QUESTION.

21. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL GUARANTEE ALL EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP FOR A

PERIOD OF 1 YEAR FOLLOWING THE DATE OF ACCEPTANCE. THE CONTRACTOR'S GUARANTEE

INCLUDES EQUIPMENT CAPACITY, PERFORMANCE RATINGS AND NOISE RATINGS. ANY DEFICIENCIES

SHALL BE PROMPTLY CORRECTED. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE SHALL NOT BE INCLUDED.

22. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL CLEAN ALL FIXTURES, PIPES, EQUIPMENT AND EXPOSED WORK AFTER

COMPLETION OF FINAL TESTING AND BEFORE ACCEPTANCE.

23. ALTERNATE MANUFACTURERS LISTED IN THE SCHEDULE OR SPECIFICATIONS ARE APPROVED TO

BID; HOWEVER, THE SUBMITTED PRODUCT MUST MEET THE GENERAL DESIGN, PERFORMANCE,

DIMENSIONS, WEIGHT, AND QUALITY OF THE SCHEDULED PRODUCT. EACH MANUFACTURER WILL

HAVE DIFFERENCES IN INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS. IF THE CONTRACTOR ELECTS TO GO WITH A

NON-BASIS OF DESIGN MANUFACTURER, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE TO INCLUDE

THE COST FOR ENGINEERING TIME, AS REQUIRED, TO ADJUST THE DESIGN TO THOSE DIFFERENCES

IN THEIR BID, IF THE BASIS OF DESIGN IS NOT BID. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE TO IDENTIFY

THE DIFFERENCES IN THE INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS BETWEEN THE BASIS OF DESIGN AND THE

SUBMITTED MANUFACTURER DURING THE SUBMITTAL PHASE.

24. WHERE “OR APPROVED EQUAL” IS INDICATED, OTHER PRODUCTS SIMILAR IN DESIGN AND OF EQUAL

QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE, AND COMPLYING WITH THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS MAY BE

APPROVED IF FOUND ACCEPTABLE BY THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER. THE CONTRACTOR MUST SUBMIT

TO THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER A LINE-BY-LINE COMPARISON BETWEEN SCHEDULED MANUFACTURER

AND "OR APPROVED EQUAL" MANUFACTURER 10 DAYS PRIOR TO BID.

25. ALL MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, ETC., INSTALLED UNDER THIS CONTRACT SHALL CONFORM TO ALL

RULES, CODES, ETC., AS RECOMMENDED OR ADAPTED BY THE NATIONAL ASSOCIATION GOVERNING

THE MANUFACTURER, RATING AND TESTING OF SUCH MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, ETC., ALL

ELECTRICALLY OPERATED EQUIPMENT SHALL BE U.L. APPROVED FOR THE USE INTENDED.

26. MOTORS SHALL CONFORM TO THE RULES OF THE N.E.M.A. FOR THE SERVICE INTENDED AND TO

THEIR STANDARDIZED FORM SIZES.

27. SHOP DRAWINGS, CATALOG CUTSHEETS AND PERFORMANCE DATA PERTAINING TO ALL MATERIALS

AND EQUIPMENT PROPOSED FOR USE SHALL BE SUBMITTED.

28. JOINTS BETWEEN DISSIMILAR METALS SHALL BE MADE WITH DIELECTRIC NIPPLES DOWNSTREAM OF

A VALVE.

29. ALL MATERIALS EXPOSED IN A RETURN AIR PLENUM SHALL COMPLY WITH NFPA 90A FLAME SPREAD

UNDER 25 AND SMOKE DEVELOPED AND FUEL CONTRIBUTED UNDER 50.

30. ALL LOW PRESSURE RECTANGULAR DUCTS TO BE SHEET METAL. DUCTBOARD OR LINED DUCTWORK

IS NOT ALLOWED UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. METAL DUCTWORK SHALL BE GALVANIZED STEEL OR

ALUMINUM. CONSTRUCTION DETAILS AND GAUGES SHALL BE ACCORDING TO NFPA BULLETIN 90A

AND SMACNA DUCT MANUAL.

31. THE DISCHARGE OF SAFETY VALVES, BLOWOFF PIPES AND OTHER OUTLETS SHALL BE LOCATED

AND SUPPORTED SO AS TO PREVENT INJURY TO PERSONNEL.

32. MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT SHOWN ON THE PLANS HAVE A SPECIFIC WEIGHT AND LOCATION. SHOULD

THE CONTRACTOR INSTALL EQUIPMENT WITH DIFFERENT WEIGHTS OR LOCATIONS AS SHOWN,

CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE THIS INFORMATION TO THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER FOR APPROVAL,

PRIOR TO PURCHASING, CLEARLY INDICATING THE DIFFERENCES IN SIZE, WEIGHT AND LOCATION.

THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER SHALL NOT BEAR THE COSTS OF SUCH REVIEWS OR REDESIGNS.

33. DO NOT ROUTE PIPING OVER ELECTRICAL OR COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT. THIS INCLUDES

HYDRONICS, STEAM, DOMESTIC WATER, SANITARY SEWER AND VENTS, CONDENSATE, ROOF

DRAINS, ETC.

34. THE MECHANICAL PIPING, ELECTRICAL, AND STRUCTURAL STEEL PLANS ARE BASED ON THE BASIS

OF DESIGN COOLING TOWER; REFERENCE DRAWING M601. THE CONTRACTOR WILL BE

RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY MODIFICATIONS TO THESE PLANS IF AN ALTERNATE APPROVED COOLING

TOWER IS USED; THESE RESPONSIBILITIES INCLUDE THE DOCUMENTATION AND SUBMITTAL OF ALL

MODIFICATIONS NEEDED FOR THE ALTERNATE COOLING TOWER. THESE MODIFICATIONS WOULD

INCLUDE ANY PIPING AND ELECTRICAL; ANY MODIFICATIONS REQUIRED FOR THE COOLING TOWER

SUPPORT AND/OR CONNECTION OF THE CATWALK TO THE TOWER WILL REQUIRE SIGNED/SEALED

DRAWINGS FROM A REGISTERED OKLAHOMA ENGINEER. THE CONTRACTOR SHOULD INCLUDE THE

COST OF ANY MODIFICATIONS IN THEIR BID PRICE.

GENERAL NOTES

G NATURAL GAS

11

10

10.4

9



NEW CT-2


EXISTING GENERATOR

EXISTING BOILER FLUE

EXISTING AIR INTAKE

FLEX CONNECTION, TYP

CONNECT TO EXISTING 8" CWS


CONNECT TO EXISTING 8" CWR


EXTEND EXISTING BOILER

FLUE TO MATCH OTHER

EXISTING FLUE

PROVIDE BASE ELBOW SUPPORT, TYP


MOUNTING LOCATION

EXISTING SCREEN WALL

TO REMAIN.

EXISTING GAS PIPING ON ROOF TO

REMAIN. COORDINATE DEMO AND NEW

WORK WITH EXISTING ROOF GAS

PIPING SO AS TO AVOID ANY DAMAGE.

EXISTING ROOF DRAINS

TO REMAIN (TYP)

EXISTING SATELLITE

DISH TO REMAIN

G

1

GG

G

EXISTING RELIEF HOODS

HIGH ROOF

LOW ROOF

APPROXIMATE LIMIT

OF FUTURE COOLING

TOWER

NEW CT-3

RE: M102 FOR CONTINUATION

NEW FENCING & ASSOCIATED

LANDSCAPING BY OWNER


MOUNTING LOCATION AND

SUPPORT

MAINTAIN CT-3 OUTLET

ELEVATION, RE: 2/M101.

4" DRAIN LINE

PIPE STAND, RE: STRUCTURAL (TYP)

2" INSULATED MAKEUP

WATER LINE

6" OVERFLOW DRAIN LINE

2" INSULATED

DRAIN LINE

PROVIDE INSULATION, INSULATION

COVER, AND SELF-REGULATING

HEAT TRACE AT ALL AREAS PIPE IS

SUBJECT TO FREEZE (TYP)

CT-3 CLEARANCES

3

2

HH.1J H.6

ISSUE/ REVISIONS


ENGINEER OF RECORD

PROJECT INFORMATION

A:


FOR:


COLLEGE

DRAWN BY CHECKED BY

PROJECT NO.

PROJECT ADDRESS:

DATE

MJR JDF

OCCC130001001

12/14/2017

7777 S. MAY AVE.


MA

IN B

UIL

DIN

G C

OO

LIN

G T

OW

ER

RE

PL

AC

EM

EN

TO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

CO

MM

UN

ITY

CO

LL

EG

EO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

, OK

PL

OT

TE

D B

Y: R

ach

el S

pitle

r D

AT

E: 1

2/1

4/2

01

7 1

1:0

5:3

7 A

M D

WG

N

AM

E: V

:\O

CC

C\C

oo

lin

g T

ow

er R

ep

la

ce

me

nt\D

ra

win

gs\M

10

1.d

wg

LA

ST

S

AV

ED

B

Y: R

sp

itle

r D

AT

E: 1

2/1

4/2

01

7 1

1:0

5:3

1 A

M


918.877.6000 918.877.4000 FAX


11/14/201795% REVIEW SET


CA # 3537

EXPIRES 6/30/2018

L

I

C

EN

S

E

D

P

R

O

F

E

SS

IO

N

A

L

E

N

G

IN

E

E

R

O

K

L

AH

O

M

A

JEFFERYDON

FERGUSON19755


M101

PLAN

MECHANICAL ROOF






TO BID.

2. PATCH AND REPAIR ROOF WATER TIGHT. CONTRACTOR

SHALL COORDINATE WITH OWNER AND OWNER'S ROOFING

CONTRACTOR IN REGARDS TO ANY ROOF WARRANTIES. ALL

NEW WORK SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE

REQUIREMENTS OF CURRENT ROOF WARRANTIES THAT ARE

IN EFFECT. ROOF WARRANTY CONTACT IS OKLAHOMA

ROOFING, (405) 670-1429.

3. ALL PIPING SHALL BE ADEQUATELY SUPPORTED AND BRACED

INDEPENDENTLY OF THE COOLING TOWER TO AVOID STRAIN

ON THE UNIT. PIPING TO BE INSTALLED SO THAT FLANGED

CONNECTIONS NEAREST COOLING TOWER CAN BE DETACHED

WITHOUT NOTICEABLE CHANGE IN PIPING ALIGNMENT.

4. COOLING TOWER ISOLATION PER ASHRAE HVAC

APPLICATIONS 2015, CHAPTER 48. ISOLATOR TYPE 4, BASE

TYPE A, MINIMUM DEFLECTION OF 2.5 INCH. INSTALLATION

SHALL BE PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS.


ROOF DRAINS, ROOF-MOUNTED SATELLITE DISH, AND ALL

OTHER EXISTING ITEMS.

6. DO NOT PENETRATE STRUCTURAL MEMBERS WITH PIPING.

ROOF PENETRATIONS FOR PIPING TO BE 6 INCHES AWAY

FROM STRUCTURAL MEMBERS.



OWNER WILL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL CHEMICAL

TREATMENT.




TRANSMITTERS.


TRANSMITTERS.


COULD TRAP AIR.



13. PROVIDE CONDENSER WATER INLET AND OUTLET

TEMPERATURE SENSORS, RE: M701.






GENERAL NOTES

N

1. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY REQUIRED

MODIFICATIONS, TEMPORARY REMOVAL, OR DAMAGE TO

EXISTING SCREEN WALL RESULTING FROM WORK

ASSOCIATED WITH REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION OF

COOLING TOWERS AND ASSOCIATED PIPING. SCREEN WALL

SHALL BE RETURNED TO ORIGINAL CONDITION AND INTEGRITY

IF ANY MODIFICATIONS ARE REQUIRED OR IF DAMAGE

OCCURS.




EXTEND FROM COOLING TOWER CONNECTIONS BACK TO

WALL PENETRATION. FIELD VERIFY ELECTRICAL

REQUIREMENTS WITH ELECTRICAL.




EXTEND FROM COOLING TOWER CONNECTION BACK TO WALL

PENETRATION. FIELD VERIFY ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

WITH ELECTRICAL.

KEYNOTES

CONTRACTOR TO FIELD-VERIFY

FINAL PIPE ELEVATIONS.

NEW WALL PENETRATIONS. SEAL

WATERTIGHT.

8" CWR & 8" CWS BEYOND

6" OVERFLOW & 4" DRAIN

LINE BEYOND

2" MAKEUP WATER NOT SHOWN

PIPE SUPPORT, RE:

STRUCTURAL

EXISTING HX

EXISTING CH-3

EXISTING CDWP-4

EXISTING CDWP-1

(E) 18" CWS

(E) 14" CWS

(E) 14" CWS

(E) 8" CWS

(E) 8" CWS

(E) 8" CWR

(E) 8" CWS

(E) 8" CWR

(E) 8" CWR

(E

) 16" C

WS

(E

) 8" C

WS

(E

) 8" C

WS

(E

) 8" C

WR

(E) 14" CWR

EXISTING CH-2

EXISTING CH-1

UP TO ROOF

UP TO ROOF

(E) 8" CWS

(E

) 8" C

WR

(E

) 8" C

WS

(E) CDWP-2

(E

) 10" C

WS


WATER SUMP

(E) CWS UP TO CT-2 ROOF, RE: 1/M101

(E) CWR UP TO CT-2 ROOF, RE: 1/M101

CONNECT TO EXISTING

8" CWR PIPING

EXISTING BYPASS

LINE TO ALLOW

CWR TO DRAIN

DOWN

CTS-2 (E)

CTS-1 (E)

(E) PUMP ABANDONED

IN PLACE.

(E) CDWP-5

(E) PUMP

(E) PUMP

(E) PUMP

(E) PUMP

(E) PUMP

(E) PUMP


FILTRATION SYSTEM





8" CWR

8" CWS

CONNECT TO EXISTING 8" CWR PIPING

CONNECT TO EXISTING

8" CWS PIPING

UP FROM CDWP-3

CAPPED AND SEALED

1 2

3

EXISTING

FLOOR DRAIN

160 GPM LAKOS SIDE

STREAM FILTRATION,

CS-1

(ADD. ALTERNATE)

4

RE: 1/M101 FOR

CONTINUATION

4" INSULATED DRAIN LINE FROM CT-3

TO EXISTING FLOOR DRAIN

5

5

2" MAKEUP WATER TO NEAREST

MAKEUP WATER LINE 2" OR LARGER

8" CWR

8" CWS

6

7

PROVIDE MAKEUP WATER RUNOUT

WITH BACKFLOW PREVENTER

6" OVERFLOW DRAIN TO


CDWP-3, RE: 1/M501

3/4" DRAIN LINE TO


CAPPED AND SEALED

8

8

9

10

2

CONNECT TO EXISTING

CWS PIPING

THREE-WAY

BYPASS VALVE

ISSUE/ REVISIONS


ENGINEER OF RECORD

PROJECT INFORMATION

A:


FOR:


COLLEGE

DRAWN BY CHECKED BY

PROJECT NO.

PROJECT ADDRESS:

DATE

MJR JDF

OCCC130001001

12/14/2017

7777 S. MAY AVE.


MA

IN B

UIL

DIN

G C

OO

LIN

G T

OW

ER

RE

PL

AC

EM

EN

TO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

CO

MM

UN

ITY

CO

LL

EG

EO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

, OK

PL

OT

TE

D B

Y: R

ach

el S

pitle

r D

AT

E: 1

2/1

4/2

01

7 9

:5

9:1

3 A

M D

WG

N

AM

E: V

:\O

CC

C\C

oo

lin

g T

ow

er R

ep

la

ce

me

nt\D

ra

win

gs\M

10

2.d

wg

LA

ST

S

AV

ED

B

Y: R

sp

itle

r D

AT

E: 1

2/1

4/2

01

7 9

:5

7:5

1 A

M


918.877.6000 918.877.4000 FAX


11/14/201795% REVIEW SET


CA # 3537

EXPIRES 6/30/2018

L

I

C

EN

S

E

D

P

R

O

F

E

SS

IO

N

A

L

E

N

G

IN

E

E

R

O

K

L

AH

O

M

A

JEFFERYDON

FERGUSON19755


M102

PLAN

MECHANICAL

GROUND FLOOR






TO BID.

2. RELOCATE EXISTING PIPING, LIGHTS, CONDUIT, ETC AS

NECESSARY TO INSTALL NEW HYDRONIC PIPING.

3. PAINT ALL NEW EXPOSED, INSULATED CONDENSER WATER

PIPING GREEN TO MATCH EXISTING CONDENSER WATER

PIPING.

4. DO NOT ROUTE PIPING OVER ELECTRICAL OR

COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT. THIS INCLUDES HYDRONICS,

STEAM, DOMESTIC WATER, SANITARY SEWER AND VENTS,

CONDENSATE, ROOF DRAINS, ETC.



REMAIN.






TRANSMITTERS.


TRANSMITTERS.


COULD TRAP AIR.








GENERAL NOTES

N

1. THREE-WAY TOWER BYPASS VALVE.

2. PROVIDE ACCESS FOR INSPECTION AND SERVICING.

3. EXISTING SOLENOID VALVE, OPEN WHEN CDWP-2 IS OFF,

CLOSED WHEN CDWP-2 IS ON.

4. CONNECT TO EXISTING 8" CWS PIPING.

5. NEW WALL PENETRATION. SEAL WATERTIGHT.

6. TAKE-OFF PIPING FOR SUPPLY AND RETURN SENSOR LINES

FOR WATER TREATMENT.

7. TIE CT-3 BLEED-DOWN LINE BACK TO EXISTING WATER

TREATMENT LINE.

8. HOUSEKEEPING PAD, RE: STRUCTURAL

9. TOWER BYPASS LINE (FULL SIZE)

10. PIPE ENTRY RE: 5/M501 AND 8/M501.

KEYNOTES


1. SIDE STREAM FILTRATION SELECTION AND DESIGN IS STILL IN

PROGRESS.

2. CT-3 BYPASS LINE DESIGN IS STILL IN PROGRESS.

ISSUE/ REVISIONS


ENGINEER OF RECORD

PROJECT INFORMATION

A:


FOR:


COLLEGE

DRAWN BY CHECKED BY

PROJECT NO.

PROJECT ADDRESS:

DATE

MJR JDF

OCCC130001001

12/14/2017

7777 S. MAY AVE.


MA

IN B

UIL

DIN

G C

OO

LIN

G T

OW

ER

RE

PL

AC

EM

EN

TO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

CO

MM

UN

ITY

CO

LL

EG

EO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

, OK

PL

OT

TE

D B

Y: R

ach

el S

pitle

r D

AT

E: 1

2/1

4/2

01

7 9

:4

1:4

9 A

M D

WG

N

AM

E: V

:\O

CC

C\C

oo

lin

g T

ow

er R

ep

la

ce

me

nt\D

ra

win

gs\M

50

1.d

wg

LA

ST

S

AV

ED

B

Y: R

sp

itle

r D

AT

E: 1

2/1

3/2

01

7 5

:1

6:4

3 P

M


918.877.6000 918.877.4000 FAX


11/14/201795% REVIEW SET


CA # 3537

EXPIRES 6/30/2018

L

I

C

EN

S

E

D

P

R

O

F

E

SS

IO

N

A

L

E

N

G

IN

E

E

R

O

K

L

AH

O

M

A

JEFFERYDON

FERGUSON19755


M501

DETAILS

MECHANICAL

DETAIL NOTES:

1. FOR INSULATED PIPING SIZE SLEEVE ACCORDINGLY.

2. PROVIDE ESCUTCHEONS OR ANGLED STRIPS WHERE

PENETRATIONS ARE EXPOSED TO VIEW.

CONCRETE OR

MASONRY WALL

FIRE-RATED SEALANT FOR RATED

WALLS (SEE ARCHITECTURAL


PIPE SLEEVE FOR ALL MASONRY WALLS

AND RATED WALLS (SEE ARCHITECTURAL


STUD WALL

PACK WITH FIBROUS

MATERIAL AND CAULK

ALL AROUND

DUCT, PIPE OR

CONDUIT

ISSUE/ REVISIONS


ENGINEER OF RECORD

PROJECT INFORMATION

A:


FOR:


COLLEGE

DRAWN BY CHECKED BY

PROJECT NO.

PROJECT ADDRESS:

DATE

MJR JDF

OCCC130001001

12/14/2017

7777 S. MAY AVE.


MA

IN B

UIL

DIN

G C

OO

LIN

G T

OW

ER

RE

PL

AC

EM

EN

TO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

CO

MM

UN

ITY

CO

LL

EG

EO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

, OK

PL

OT

TE

D B

Y: R

ach

el S

pitle

r D

AT

E: 1

2/1

4/2

01

7 9

:4

8:2

9 A

M D

WG

N

AM

E: V

:\O

CC

C\C

oo

lin

g T

ow

er R

ep

la

ce

me

nt\D

ra

win

gs\M

60

1.d

wg

LA

ST

S

AV

ED

B

Y: R

sp

itle

r D

AT

E: 1

2/1

4/2

01

7 9

:0

9:2

6 A

M


918.877.6000 918.877.4000 FAX


11/14/201795% REVIEW SET


CA # 3537

EXPIRES 6/30/2018

L

I

C

EN

S

E

D

P

R

O

F

E

SS

IO

N

A

L

E

N

G

IN

E

E

R

O

K

L

AH

O

M

A

JEFFERYDON

FERGUSON19755


M601

SCHEDULES

MECHANICAL

PUMP SCHEDULE

MARK SERVICE

MANUFACTURER/

MODEL NO.

GPM

TDH

(FT)

TYPE

MOTOR

REMARKS

HP RPM V/PH/HZ


TACO

TA1230

1050 100

SPLIT

CASE

40 1760 460/3/60 1-8

REMARKS:









COOLING TOWER SCHEDULE

DESIGNATION

CT-2 CT-3

QUANTITY1 1

LOCATION

ROOF GROUND

OPERATING WEIGHT (LBS) 13758 13758

MANUFACTURER

TOWER TECH TOWER TECH

MODEL NO.

TTXR-041950 (2)

GENERAL DATA:

TYPE

FORCED DRAFT

COUNTERFLOW

FORCED DRAFT

COUNTERFLOW

AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE (°F W.B.) 79 79

WATER FLOW (GPM) 1050 1050

WATER TEMPERATURE (°F) 95/85 95/85

MINIMUM RATED CAPACITY (TONS) 350 350

NUMBER OF CELLS

1 1

MOTOR:

TYPE

TEAO TEAO

QUANTITY4 4

HORSEPOWER (EACH) 5 5

FULL LOAD AMPS (EACH) 8.3 8.3

ELECTRICAL SERVICE AVAILABLE

460/3/60 460/3/60

STARTER TYPE

VFD VFD

FAN:

TYPE

AXIAL

PROPELLER

AXIAL

PROPELLER

POWER DRIVE UNIT TYPE

DIRECT DRIVE DIRECT DRIVE

TOTAL AIR FLOW (CFM)77,387 77,387

REMARKS

1-5 1-5

REMARKS:

1. VFD FURNISHED BY MANUFACTURER AND INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR. SINGLE VFD PER TOWER SHALL

CONTROL ALL MOTORS. MOTORS SHALL HAVE INDIVIDUAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION. VFD TO BE EQUIPPED

WITH LONWORKS COMMUNICATION INTERFACE AND COMMUNICATE WITH BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM.

VFD SUPPLIER TO COORDINATE THE COMPLETION OF THE INTERFACE WITH THE BUILDING AUTOMATION

CONTRACTOR.

2. PROVIDE MANUFACTURER'S SIX (6) FOOT SUB-STRUCTURE KIT.

3. PROVIDE SIDE CONDENSER WATER SUPPLY AND INLET CONFIGURATION.

4. COORDINATE OTHER ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS WITH ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR.

5. INSTALL PER MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS.

CENTRIFUGAL SEPARATOR SCHEDULE (ADD. ALTERNATE)

CS-1 CT WATER LAKOS 160

REMARKS

1. PROVIDE 3/4" AUTOMATIC PURGE VALVE, PIPE DISCHARGE TO FLOOR DRAIN. COORDINATE WITH ELECTRICAL

CONTRACTOR. REFERENCE CONTROLS FOR SEQUENCE OF OPERATION RE: M701

2. CARBON STEEL CONSTRUCTION

3. PROVIDE MOUNTING KIT INCLUDING 3 LEG PIPE STAND AND CLAMP

4. PROVIDE 5 HP 460V CIRCULATION PUMP (CP-1). COORDINATE INSTALLATION WITH ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR.

5. PROVIDE OPTIONAL ZERO LIQUID LOSS COLLECTION VESSEL

6. PROVIDE CIRCUIT SETTER (B&G CB-3F) IN DISCHARGE LINE. ALLOW 15" STRAIGHT PIPE UPSTREAM AND 6"

DOWNSTREAM OF CIRCUIT SETTER. DURING T&B, OPEN CIRCUIT SETTER COMPLETELY AND REPORT FLOW RATE.

1-6

MARK SERVICE MANUF. MODEL NO. GPM REMARK

TBX-0200 5

PUMP HP

7.6

FLA

460/3

POWER

(V/PH)

PUMP SCHEDULE (ADD. ALTERNATE)

MARK SERVICE

MANUFACTURER/

MODEL NO.

GPM

TDH

(FT)

TYPE

MOTOR

REMARKS

HP RPM V/PH/HZ


TACO

TA1230

1210 100

SPLIT

CASE

50 1760 460/3/60 1-8

REMARKS:









ISSUE/ REVISIONS


ENGINEER OF RECORD

PROJECT INFORMATION

A:


FOR:


COLLEGE

DRAWN BY CHECKED BY

PROJECT NO.

PROJECT ADDRESS:

DATE

MJR JDF

OCCC130001001

12/14/2017

7777 S. MAY AVE.


MA

IN B

UIL

DIN

G C

OO

LIN

G T

OW

ER

RE

PL

AC

EM

EN

TO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

CO

MM

UN

ITY

CO

LL

EG

EO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

, OK

PL

OT

TE

D B

Y: R

ach

el S

pitle

r D

AT

E: 1

2/1

4/2

01

7 9

:4

4:3

9 A

M D

WG

N

AM

E: V

:\O

CC

C\C

oo

lin

g T

ow

er R

ep

la

ce

me

nt\D

ra

win

gs\M

70

1.d

wg

LA

ST

S

AV

ED

B

Y: R

sp

itle

r D

AT

E: 1

2/1

4/2

01

7 9

:4

0:5

8 A

M


918.877.6000 918.877.4000 FAX


11/14/201795% REVIEW SET


CA # 3537

EXPIRES 6/30/2018

L

I

C

EN

S

E

D

P

R

O

F

E

SS

IO

N

A

L

E

N

G

IN

E

E

R

O

K

L

AH

O

M

A

JEFFERYDON

FERGUSON19755


M701

CONTROLS

MECHANICAL

COORDINATE ALL CONTROLS WORK WITH TONY ARANGO

(405-834-7984) OR CHAD MARAZAS (918-317-3151) AT THE TRANE

COMPANY.

GENERAL NOTES

OCCC TOWER

COOLING TOWER CONTROLLER MP581 - 1

SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS

SYSTEM GENERAL DESCRIPTION:

THE CONDENSER WATER SYSTEM CONSISTS OF THE FOLLOWING:

THREE (3) CHILLERS - DEDICATED CONDENSER WATER PUMPS

THREE (3) COOLING TOWERS

THE BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM

(BAS) CONTROLLER PROVIDES STAND-ALONE CONTROL OR

CONTROL FROM A HIGHER LEVEL BAS OF THE CONDENSER WATER

SETPOINT (ADJ.) BY MODULATING THE TOWER FAN SPEEDS AND THE

TOWER BYPASS VALVE POSITION SIGNAL INPUT.

CONDENSER WATER SYSTEM ENABLE/DISABLE:

THE CONDENSER WATER SYSTEM SHALL BE ENABLED ON A CONTACT

CLOSURE FROM THE CHILLER.

WHEN ENABLED, THE BAS CONTROLLER OR CHILLER SHALL START THE

DEDICATED CONDENSER WATER PUMP WHEN THE PUMP STATUS IS

CONFIRMED, CONTROL THE COOLING TOWER FANS AND TOWER

BYPASS VALVE TO MAINTAIN THE CONDENSER WATER SETPOINT (ADJ.).

WHEN THE CONDENSER WATER SYSTEM IS DISABLED, THE CONDENSER

WATER PUMP AND COOLING TOWER FAN SHALL BE OFF.

CONDENSER PUMP START/STOP:

THE BAS CONTROLLER SHALL START A CONDENSER PUMP THROUGH A

CONTACT CLOSURE OF THE PUMPS MOTOR STARTER ENABLE CONTACTS.

CONDENSER PUMP STATUS:

THE BAS CONTROLLER SHALL DETECT CONDENSER PUMP RUN STATUS BY

A CURRENT SWITCH.

CONDENSER PUMP FAILURE:

IF THE LEAD START/STOP RELAY IS ENABLED AND THE CURRENT SWITCH

STATUS IS OFF FOR MORE THAN 30 SECONDS (ADJ.), THE BAS CONTROLLER

SHALL ANNUNCIATE A CONDENSER WATER PUMP FAILURE ALARM TO THE

BAS.

CHILLER-3 TOWER BYPASS CONTROL:

WHEN THE CONDENSER WATER SYSTEM IS ENABLED, THE COOLING

TOWER SHALL MAINTAIN THE ENTERING CONDENSER WATER

TEMPERATURE BY FIRST MODULATING THE NORMALLY OPEN BYPASS

VALVE. WHEN THE VALVE IS IN FULL TOWER BYPASS AND THE ENTERING

CONDENSER WATER TEMPERATURE IS GREATER THAN THE ENTERING

CONDENSER WATER TEMPERATURE SETPOINT MINUS 2.0 DEG. F (ADJ.), THE

BYPASS VALVE SHALL BEGIN TO CLOSE SENDING WATER TO THE COOLING

TOWER. THE BYPASS VALVE SHALL CONTINUE TO MODULATE CLOSED TO

MAINTAIN THE ENTERING CONDENSER WATER TEMPERATURE SETPOINT

WITHOUT THE TOWER FANS. WHEN THE BYPASS VALVE IS FULLY CLOSED

AND THE ENTERING CONDENSER WATER TEMPERATURE REACHES

CONDENSER WATER TEMPERATURE SETPOINT PLUS 2.0 DEG. F (ADJ.) THE

CONDENSER WATER TEMPERATURE SHALL BE MAINTAINED BY OPERATING

THE COOLING TOWER FANS TO MAINTAIN THE ENTERING CONDENSER

WATER TEMPERATURE SETPOINT.

CHILLER-3 FREE COOLING CONTROL:

CHILLER-3 IS CONFIGURED AS A DECOUPLED LOOP WITH "SIDECAR" FREE

COOLING HEAT EXCHANGER. IF OUTSIDE AIR CONDITIONS PERMIT, THE

FREE COOLING HEAT SYSTEM WILL BE ENABLED. THE FREE COOLING HEAT

SYSTEM UTILIZES CHILLER 3'S CONDENSER PUMP AND COOLING TOWER. IF

FREE COOLING IS ENABLED, THE HEAT EXCHANGER BYPASS VALVE WILL BE

OPENED TO THE HEAT EXCHANGER AND CHILLER-3 DISABLED. THE

BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS) CONTROLLER PROVIDES

STAND-ALONE CONTROL OR CONTROL FROM A HIGHER LEVEL BAS OF THE

CONDENSER WATER SETPOINT OF 40°(ADJ.) BY MODULATING THE TOWER

FAN SPEEDS AND THE TOWER BYPASS VALVE POSITION SIGNAL TO

MAINTAIN THE HEAT EXCHANGER LEAVING WATER TEMPERATURE. WHEN

OUTSIDE AIR CONDITIONS ARE NOT FAVORABLE, FREE COOLING WILL BE

DISABLED AND THE CONDENSER WATER SETPOINT WILL BE RESET UP.

SLOWLY OPEN THE HEAT EXCHANGER VALVE TO THE CHILLER.

TOWER FAN CONTROL:

WHEN A CHILLER IS OPERATING AND THE COOLING TOWER BASIN

TEMPERATURE RISES 2.0 DEG. F ABOVE THE CURRENT TOWER LEAVING

WATER SETPOINT THE COOLING TOWER LEAD TOWER FAN SHALL BE

TURNED ON AT MINIMUM SPEED AND MODULATED TO MAINTAIN THE

TOWER LEAVING WATER SETPOINT. WHEN A CHILLER IS OPERATING AND

THE COOLING TOWER LEAVING WATER TEMPERATURE DROPS BELOW 1.0

DEG. F. BELOW THE CURRENT TOWER LEAVING WATER SETPOINT AND THE

COOLING TOWER FAN IS RUNNING AT MINIMUM SPEED, THE FAN SHALL BE

DISABLED.

TOWER FAN START/STOP:

THE BAS CONTROLLER SHALL START A TOWER FAN THROUGH A CONTACT

CLOSURE OF THE FANS STARTER ENABLE CONTACTS.

TOWER FAN STATUS:

THE BAS CONTROLLER SHALL DETECT TOWER FAN RUN STATUS BY A

CURRENT SWITCH.

TOWER FAN FAILURE:

IF THE LEAD TOWER FAN START/STOP RELAY IS ENABLED AND THE

CURRENT SWITCH STATUS IS OFF FOR MORE THAN 15 SECONDS (ADJ.), THE

BAS CONTROLLER SHALL ANNUNCIATE A TOWER FAN FAILURE ALARM TO

THE BAS.

THIS PROJECT REQUIRES THE EXPANSION OF AN EXISTING INTEGRATED AUTOMATION SYSTEM CONSTRUCTED USING A TRANETRACER SUMMIT PLATFORM WITH TRANE LONWORKS FIELD LEVEL DEVICES. THE NEW IAS SHALL UTILIZE A SINGLE TRANE BCUNETWORK CONTROLLER, NETWORKED WITH A TRACER SUMMIT FRONT-END AND TRANE FULLY PROGRAMMABLE LONWORKS FIELDCONTROL DEVICES.

A. FURNISH AND INSTALL INTO EXISTING TRACER SUMMIT PLATFORM NEW LONWORKS FULLY PROGRAMMABLE ANDAPPLICATION SPECIFIC DDC CONTROLLERS FOR THE EQUIPMENT IDENTIFIED IN THE DRAWINGS, INCLUDING COOLING TOWERS,AND CONDENSER WATER PUMPS.

B. INTEGRATION OF NEW LONWORKS DDC CONTROLLERS WITH EXISTING TRANE BCU. CONTRACTOR TO CONFIRM ACTUALLOCATION AND CAPACITY OF EXISTING TRANE BCU.

C. PROVIDE GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE DEVELOPMENT FOR ALL OF THE DEVICES IDENTIFIED ABOVE AND ILLUSTRATED WITHINTHE IAS DRAWINGS. GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE DEVELOPMENT MUST MATCH EXISTING GRAPHICS, TOOL SETS ANDFEATURES.

D. IT IS THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO REVIEW ALL OF THE DESIGN DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS AND REPORT ANYDISCREPANCIES TO THE OWNER.

CONTROLS DESCRIPTIONA. FURNISH ALL MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND TECHNICAL LABOR NECESSARY FOR A COMPLETE AND OPERATING CONTROL

SYSTEM UTILIZING DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS AS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS, SEQUENCE OF OPERATION, POINTS LIST AND ASDESCRIBED HEREIN. THIS SHALL INCLUDE, BUT IS NOT LIMITED TO, CONTROLLERS, SENSORS, POWER SUPPLIES, CABLE, ETC.

B. CONTROLLER SOFTWARE: PROVIDE ALL SOFTWARE AND COMMUNICATION ACCESSORIES REQUIRED TO PROGRAM ANDCOMMISSION THE CONTROLS PROVIDED. THE CONTROLLER SOFTWARE MUST HAVE THE CAPABILITY TO BE INSTALLED ANDOPERATED ON A MINIMUM OF (5) COMPUTERS.

1. NOT REQUIRED IF OCCC IS ALREADY IN POSSESSION OF THE SOFTWARE AND COMMUNICATION ACCESSORIES REQUIRED TOPROGRAM AND COMMISSION THE CONTROLS PROVIDED.

C. COMPATIBILITY: THE SYSTEM MUST UTILIZE THE LATEST FIELD PROVEN TECHNOLOGIES INCLUDING SURFACE MOUNTTECHNOLOGY AND PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATION. THE TEMPERATURE CONTROLS CONTRACTOR SHALL ONLY PROVIDEDEVICE LEVEL DDC CONTROLLERS WHICH USE THE LONTALK PROTOCOL FOR COMMUNICATION. ONLY FULLY PROGRAMMABLECONTROLLERS FOR DIRECT CONNECTION OF ALL MECHANICAL AND MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT, SENSORS AND CONTROLSSHALL BE PROVIDED.

D. THE TEMPERATURE CONTROLS CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE REQUIRED TO ALLOWCOMMUNICATION AND FULL FUNCTIONALITY TO THE EXISTING OCCC TRANE TRACER SUMMIT FRONT-END.

WARRANTYA. THE TEMPERATURE CONTROL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE A ONE YEAR WARRANTY ON ALL HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE

THAT WILL COMMENCE FROM THE POINT OF PROJECT ACCEPTANCE BY THE OWNER. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL ALSO ASSUMERESPONSIBILITY FOR ALL SYSTEM UPGRADES AND PATCHES FROM THE MANUFACTURER DURING THE TERM OF THEWARRANTY.

B. THE CONTRACTOR'S OFFICE SHALL BE WITHIN A 5O MILE RADIUS OF THE JOBSITE.

QUALITY ASSURANCEA. ELECTRICAL STANDARDS: PROVIDE ELECTRICAL PRODUCTS WHICH HAVE BEEN TESTED, LISTED AND LABELED BY

UNDERWRITERS' LABORATORIES (UL) AND COMPLY WITH NEMA STANDARDS.

OWNER'S INSTRUCTIONSA. THE CONTROLS CONTRACTOR FURNISHING THE DDC CONTROLLERS AND OR DEVICES SHALL PROVIDE THE OWNER AND

ENGINEER WITH DETAILS OF THE PROPOSED INTERFACE INCLUDING PROTOCOL IMPLEMENTATION CONFORMANCESTATEMENT (PICS) FOR LONTALK EQUIPMENT, HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE IDENTIFIERS FOR THE INTERFACE POINTS,NETWORK IDENTIFIERS, WIRING REQUIREMENTS, COMMUNICATION SPEEDS, AND REQUIRED NETWORK ACCESSORIES. THECONTROLS CONTRACTOR SHALL INSURE THERE ARE NO UNRESOLVED ISSUES REGARDING THE INTEGRATION OF THESEPRODUCTS INTO THE DDC NETWORK.

HARDWARE SUPPORTA. THE TEMPERATURE CONTROLS CONTRACTOR SHALL MAINTAIN A MAINTENANCE SUPPORT FACILITY COMPLETE WITH SYSTEM

TECHNICIANS, DIAGNOSTIC AND TEST EQUIPMENT AND ROUTINES, AND NEW SPARE DIGITAL CONTROLLERS, CONTROLCOMPONENTS (INCLUDING ALL SPECIALTY CONTROL DEVICES), AND OPERATOR'S TERMINAL.

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLLERSA. CONTROLLERS SHALL BE A FULLY PROGRAMMABLE DDC CONTROLLER UTILIZING THE LONTALK PROTOCOL FOR

COMMUNICATION IN A PEER-TO-PEER TOPOLOGY. CONTROLLERS SHALL USE FTT-10 TRANSCEIVERS. ALL COMMUNICATIONSHALL BE WITH THE USE OF LONMARK-APPROVED SNVTs

B. THE CONTROLLERS AND SOFTWARE SHALL ALLOW FOR COMPLETE FUNCTIONALITY TO THE EXISTING OCCC TRANE TRACERSUMMIT FRONTEND.

C. THE GRAPHICS SHALL DISPLAY THE STATUS OF ANY EQUIPMENT OR ZONE TO THE EXISTING OCCC TRANE TRACER SUMMITFRONT END AS A PRE-DEFINED COLOR.

D. THE FOLLOWING PERFORMANCE SHALL BE REQUIRED.

THE INSTALLED CONTROLLERS SHALL HAVE THE FUNCTIONALITY THROUGH THE USE OF THE EXISTING TRANE TRACER SUMMITFRONTEND. OPERATOR INTERFACE SHALL ALLOW EACH AUTHORIZED OPERATOR TO EXECUTE THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS AS AMINIMUM:

1. LOG-IN AND LOG-OUT - SYSTEM SHALL REQUIRE USER NAME AND PASSWORD TO LOG-IN TO OPERATOR INTERFACE.

2. POINT-AND-CLICK NAVIGATION - OPERATOR INTERFACE SHALL BE GRAPHICALLY BASED AND SHALL ALLOW OPERATORS TOACCESS GRAPHICS FOR EQUIPMENT AND GEOGRAPHIC AREAS USING POINT-AND-CLICK NAVIGATION.

3. VIEW AND ADJUST EQUIPMENT PROPERTIES - OPERATORS SHALL BE ABLE TO VIEW CONTROLLED EQUIPMENT STATUS AND TOADJUST OPERATING PARAMETERS SUCH AS SETPOINTS, PID GAINS, ON AND OFF CONTROLS, AND SENSOR CALIBRATION.

4. VIEW AND ADJUST OPERATING SCHEDULES - OPERATORS SHALL BE ABLE TO VIEW SCHEDULED OPERATING HOURS OF EACHSCHEDULABLE PIECE OF EQUIPMENT ON A WEEKLY OR MONTHLY CALENDAR-BASED GRAPHICAL SCHEDULE DISPLAY, TO SELECTAND ADJUST EACH SCHEDULE AND TIME PERIOD, AND TO SIMULTANEOUSLY SCHEDULE RELATED EQUIPMENT. SYSTEM SHALLCLEARLY SHOW EXCEPTION SCHEDULES AND HOLIDAYS ON THE SCHEDULE DISPLAY.

5. VIEW AND RESPOND TO ALARMS. OPERATORS SHALL BE ABLE TO VIEW A LIST OF CURRENTLY ACTIVE SYSTEM ALARMS, TOACKNOWLEDGE EACH ALARM, AND TO CLEAR (DELETE) UNNEEDED ALARMS.

6. VIEW AND CONFIGURE TRENDS - OPERATORS SHALL BE ABLE TO VIEW A TREND GRAPH OF EACH TRENDED POINT AND BE ABLETO EDIT GRAPH CONFIGURATION TO DISPLAY A SPECIFIC TIME PERIOD OR DATA RANGE. OPERATOR SHALL BE ABLE TO CREATECUSTOM TREND GRAPHS TO DISPLAY DATA FROM MULTIPLE TRENDED POINTS ON THE SAME PAGE.

7. VIEW AND CONFIGURE REPORTS - OPERATORS SHALL BE ABLE TO RUN PRECONFIGURED REPORTS, TO VIEW REPORT RESULTS,AND TO CUSTOMIZE REPORT CONFIGURATION TO SHOW DATA OF INTEREST.

8. MANAGE CONTROL SYSTEM HARDWARE - OPERATORS SHALL BE ABLE TO VIEW CONTROLLER STATUS, TO RESTART (REBOOT)EACH CONTROLLER, AND TO DOWNLOAD NEW CONTROL SOFTWARE TO EACH CONTROLLER.

9. MANAGE OPERATOR ACCESS - TYPICALLY, ONLY A FEW OPERATORS ARE AUTHORIZED TO MANAGE OPERATOR ACCESS.AUTHORIZED OPERATORS SHALL BE ABLE TO VIEW A LIST OF OPERATORS WITH SYSTEM ACCESS AND OF FUNCTIONS THEY CANPERFORM WHILE LOGGED IN. OPERATORS SHALL BE ABLE TO ADD OPERATORS, TO DELETE OPERATORS, AND TO EDITOPERATOR FUNCTION AUTHORIZATION. OPERATOR SHALL BE ABLE TO AUTHORIZE EACH OPERATOR FUNCTION SEPARATELY.

E. EASY FIRMWARE UPGRADES USING REMOTE DOWNLOADING - (CHIP REPLACEMENT NOT ACCEPTABLE)

CONTROLS PERFORMANCE


1. FINAL SEQUENCE OF OPERATION, POINTS LIST, AND CONTROL

DIAGRAMS AND PERFORMANCE ARE IN PROGRESS.

BMTX - 1EXISTING HVAC CONTROLS

120 VACEXIST

LOC

CW SYSTEM MP-581EXISTING CW SYSTEM

CH - 3CW SYSTEM

120 VACEXIST

EX2 - 1CW SYSTEM

120 VACEXIST

EX2 - 2CW SYSTEM

120 VACBY ESC

EX2 - 3CW SYSTEM

120 VACBY ESC

EX2 - 4CW SYSTEM

CH - 1CW SYSTEM

CH - 2CW SYSTEM

X XXCH-1 COND SUPPLY TEMPERATURE X AI NOTE 1XXCH-1 CW ENTERING WATER TEMPERATURE X AIXXCH-1 REF PRESSURE X AI NOTE 1X XXCH-1 SUMP LEVEL X AIXXCH-2 CW LEAVING WATER TEMPERATURE X AIXXCH-2 REF PRESSURE AI NOTE 1

CH-3 BYPASS VALVE POSITION FEEDBACK X AIXXCH-3 CW LEAVING WATER TEMPERATURE AIX XXCH-3 CW SUPPLY TEMPERATURE X AIXXHX-1 ENTERING TEMPERATURE X AI NOTE 1X XXHX-1 LEAVING TEMPERATURE X AI NOTE 1X XXREF PRESSURE X AI NOTE 1XXTOWER 2 LEAVING WATER TEMPERATURE X AIX XXTOWER 3 LEAVING WATER TEMPERATURE X AI

XCDWP-1 STATUS X BI NOTE 1XCDWP-2 STATUS X BI NOTE 1XCDWP-3 STATUS X BI

CH-3 BYPASS VALVE POSITION CLOSE BICH-3 BYPASS VALVE POSITION OPEN BI

XCHILLER 1 CONDENSER WATER FLOW STATUS OPEN BI NOTE 1CHILLER 2 CONDENSER WATER FLOW STATUS OPEN BI NOTE 1CHILLER 2 CONDENSER WATER FLOW STATUS OPEN BI NOTE 1

XFREE COOLING VALVE POSITION CLOSE X BI NOTE 1HX PUMP STATUS BI NOTE 1

XLRG SUMP ALARM X BI NOTE 1XSML SUMP ALARM X BI NOTE 1XTOWER 1 FAN STATUS STATUS X BI NOTE 1

TOWER 2 FAN STATUS STATUS BITOWER 2 VIBRATION ALARM BI

XTOWER 3 FAN STATUS STATUS X BITOWER 3 VIBRATION DETECTION ALARM BI

CH-1 HEAD PRESSURE VALVE X AO NOTE 1CH-2 HEAD PRESSURE VALVE AO NOTE 1CH-3 HEAD PRESSURE VALVE X AO NOTE 1CH-3 TOWER BYPASS VALVE AO

TOWER 1 FAN SPEED X AO NOTE 1TOWER 2 FAN SPEED AOTOWER 3 FAN SPEED X AOCDWP-2 START STOP BO NOTE 1CDWP-3 START STOP X BO

CH-2 TOWER BYPASS VALVE X BO NOTE 1CHILLER 1 CONDENSER WATER PUMP 1 START

STOP OUTPUTBO NOTE 1

CT-1 DUMP VALVE X BO NOTE 1FREE COOLING CHANGEOVER VALVE X BO NOTE 1

HX PUMP START STOP BO NOTE 1TOWER 1 FAN ENABLE COMMAND X BO NOTE 1TOWER 2 FAN ENABLE COMMAND BOTOWER 3 FAN ENABLE COMMAND X BO

CONTROLLER SPARE HARDWARE POINTSANALOG INPUT(S) 1

UNIVERSAL INPUT(S) 8ANALOG OUTPUT(S) 15

BINARY OUTPUT(S) 14

GENERAL NOTES1. EXISTING

CW SYSTEM MP581 - 1 FLOW - SYSTEM POINTS LISTCONTROLLER: MP581 POINT TYPE ALARMSSYSTEM POINT DESCRIPTION

GRA

PHIC

HARD

WAR

E IN

PUT

HARD

WAR

E O

UTP

UT

SOFT

WAR

E PO

INT

HARD

WAR

E IN

TERL

OCK

WIR

ELES

S

NET

WO

RK

DEFA

ULT

VAL

UE

HIG

H AN

ALO

G L

IMIT

LOW

AN

ALO

G L

IMIT

BIN

ARY

LATC

H DI

AGN

OST

IC

SEN

SOR

FAIL

DIAGNOSTICS NOTESCOM

MU

NIC

ATIO

N F

AIL

LAKOSFILTER

LARGESUMP

TREATMENTALARM

SMALLSUMP

TREATMENTALARM

(EXISTING CW SYSTEM)

CH - 1OPEN

BICHR 1 CW FLOW

CH - 2OPEN

BICHR 2 CW FLOW

CDWP - 1

BOCH-2 TOWER BYPASS VALVE

AI

CW SUPPLY

AI

TWR2S TEMP

AICH-1 CW ENTERING TEMP

CDWP - 2

THERMAL PASTE

CWR

BO

BI

S/S

STS

CDWP - 1

BO

BI

S/S

STS

CDWP - 2

(EXISTING) CT - 1

(NEW) CT - 2

COOLING TOWER 1

A


CMD


STS

CW PITAI

CH-1 SUMP LEVEL

CWR

(EXISTING) CTS-2

CHR - 3OPEN

BICHR 3 CW FLOW

AO

BYPASS

AI

TWR3S TEMP

CDWP - 3

BO

BI

S/S

STS

CDWP - 3

(NEW) CT - 3

CWR

HX - 1

P - X

BO

BI

S/S

STS

P-X

COOLING TOWER 2

B


STS



VIB ALM

COOLING TOWER 3

B


STS



VIB ALM

AOTOWER 1 FAN SPEED



SPD




AI REF PRESSURE

AI REF PRESSURE

AI REF PRESSURE

BOFC VALVE

AICH-3 CW TEMP

AICH-2 CW TEMP

BOCT DUMP VAL

AI

CW SUPPLY

AIHX TEMP

AIHX TEMP

FDBKAI

VALVE POSITION

SUMP TREATMENT ALARMS

A

BI BI

CLOSEBI

POSITION

(ADD. ALTERNATE)

HH.1J H.6

11

10

10.4

9

8

7.9

EXISTING MAKE UP AIR UNIT TO REMAIN


REMOVE AIR INTAKE HOOD

EXISTING TRANSFORMERS AND ELECTRICAL TO REMAIN




REMOVE EXISTING CWR PIPING

BACK TO ROOF PENETRATION

AND CAP AND PREPARE FOR

CONNECTION TO NEW

CONDENSER WATER PIPING.

REMOVE EXISTING CWS

PIPING BACK TO ROOF

PENETRATION AND CAP

AND PREPARE FOR

CONNECTION TO NEW

CONDENSER WATER

PIPING.

REMOVE EXISTING

NATATORIUM CWR PIPING

AND SUPPORTS BACK TO

WALL PENETRATION. CAP

PIPE INSIDE BUILDING.

SEAL AND REPAIR WALL.

EXISTING AIR INTAKE TO REMAIN

OWNER SHALL REMOVE EXISTING FENCE;

OWNER WILL PROVIDE ANY REQUIRED

FENCING AND LANDSCAPING.

REMOVE COOLING TOWER AND

SUPPORTS






REMOVE ABOVE GRADE CWR PIPING

AND SUPPORTS THROUGH BUILDING.

SEAL BUILDING PENETRATION. RE:

MD102 FOR CONTINUATION.

EXISTING RELIEF HOODS TO REMAIN



EXISTING EXHAUST FANS TO REMAIN (TYP)






EXISTING SCREEN WALL TO REMAIN. CONTRACTOR

SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY REQUIRED

MODIFICATIONS, TEMPORARY REMOVAL, OR

DAMAGE TO EXISTING SCREEN WALL RESULTING

FROM WORK ASSOCIATED WITH REMOVAL AND

REINSTALLATION OF COOLING TOWERS AND

ASSOCIATED PIPING. SCREEN WALL SHALL BE

RETURNED TO ORIGINAL CONDITION AND INTEGRITY

IF ANY MODIFICATIONS ARE REQUIRED OR IF

DAMAGE OCCURS.

EXISTING GAS PIPING ON ROOF TO REMAIN.

COORDINATE DEMO AND NEW WORK WITH

EXISTING ROOF GAS PIPING SO AS TO

AVOID ANY DAMAGE.

EXISTING ROOF

DRAINS TO

REMAIN (TYP)

EXISTING SATELLITE

DISH TO REMAIN

GG

G

REMOVE ABOVE GRADE CWR PIPING TO

BUILDING. RE: MD102 FOR CONTINUATION.

ISSUE/ REVISIONS


ENGINEER OF RECORD

PROJECT INFORMATION

A:


FOR:


COLLEGE

DRAWN BY CHECKED BY

PROJECT NO.

PROJECT ADDRESS:

DATE

MJR JDF

OCCC130001001

12/14/2017

7777 S. MAY AVE.


MA

IN B

UIL

DIN

G C

OO

LIN

G T

OW

ER

RE

PL

AC

EM

EN

TO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

CO

MM

UN

ITY

CO

LL

EG

EO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

, OK

PL

OT

TE

D B

Y: R

ach

el S

pitle

r D

AT

E: 1

2/1

4/2

01

7 9

:4

7:0

3 A

M D

WG

N

AM

E: V

:\O

CC

C\C

oo

lin

g T

ow

er R

ep

la

ce

me

nt\D

ra

win

gs\M

D1

01

.d

wg

LA

ST

S

AV

ED

B

Y: R

sp

itle

r D

AT

E: 1

2/1

3/2

01

7 3

:5

4:1

6 P

M


918.877.6000 918.877.4000 FAX


11/14/201795% REVIEW SET


CA # 3537

EXPIRES 6/30/2018

L

I

C

EN

S

E

D

P

R

O

F

E

SS

IO

N

A

L

E

N

G

IN

E

E

R

O

K

L

AH

O

M

A

JEFFERYDON

FERGUSON19755


MD101

DEMOLITION PLAN

MECHANICAL ROOF






TO BID.


ROOF DRAINS AND ROOF-MOUNTED SATELLITE DISH.

GENERAL NOTES

N

EXISTING HX TO REMAIN

EXISTING CH-3 TO REMAIN


REMOVE CDWP-3 AND CAP

OPENING WATERTIGHT


18" CWS

8" CWS

14" CWS

14" CWS

8" CWS

8" CWS

8" CWR

8" CWR

8" CWR

8" CWR

8" CWS

8" CWR

8" CWR

16" C

WS

8" C

WS

8" C

WS

8" C

WR

14" CWR

EXISTING CH-2

TO REMAIN

EXISTING CH-1

TO REMAIN

(E) CWR UP TO ROOF

(E) CWS DN. FROM ROOF

8" CWS

4" CWS

8" C

WR

8" C

WS


EXISTING CDWP-6 TO

BE ABANDONED IN

PLACE.

10" C

WS


WATER SUMP TO REMAIN

REMOVE CWR PIPING. RE: MD101 FOR CONTINUATION

(E) CWS DN. FROM CT-2 ON ROOF

(E) CWR UP TO CT-2 ON ROOF

EXISTING IN-GROUND SUMP. CAP AND SEAL PIPING

PENETRATIONS FROM EXISTING GROUND MOUNTED

COOLING TOWERS. EXISTING UNDERGROUND

PIPING SHALL BE GROUTED AND END SEALED WITH

STEEL PLATE. AFTER CAPPING AND SEALING

PENETRATIONS, CONTRACTOR SHALL FULLY DRAIN

AND CLEAN SUMP OF SILT AND DEBRIS, INCLUDING

POSSIBLE EXISTING FORMING MATERIALS.

SCHEDULE WITH OWNER.

REMOVE CWR PIPING BACK

TO POINT INDICATED.

CTS-2 (E)

CTS-1 (E)

8" C

WS

(E) PUMP

(E) PUMP

(E) PUMP

(E) PUMP

(E) PUMP

EXISTING CDWP-5

TO REMAIN

(E) PUMP


FILTRATION SYSTEM

REMOVE PIPING

FROM CDWP-3 TO

POINT INDICATED

REMOVE PIPING TO

POINT INDICATED

REMOVE PIPING AND

CONTROL VALVE

AND CAP AT FLANGE

EXISTING FLOOR

DRAIN TO REMAIN

REMOVE PIPING AND

CONTROL VALVE

AND CAP AT FLANGE

REMOVE PIPING AND

CONTROL VALVE

REMOVE PIPING TO

POINTS INDICATED

ISSUE/ REVISIONS


ENGINEER OF RECORD

PROJECT INFORMATION

A:


FOR:


COLLEGE

DRAWN BY CHECKED BY

PROJECT NO.

PROJECT ADDRESS:

DATE

MJR JDF

OCCC130001001

12/14/2017

7777 S. MAY AVE.


MA

IN B

UIL

DIN

G C

OO

LIN

G T

OW

ER

RE

PL

AC

EM

EN

TO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

CO

MM

UN

ITY

CO

LL

EG

EO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

, OK

PL

OT

TE

D B

Y: R

ach

el S

pitle

r D

AT

E: 1

2/1

4/2

01

7 9

:4

6:4

1 A

M D

WG

N

AM

E: V

:\O

CC

C\C

oo

lin

g T

ow

er R

ep

la

ce

me

nt\D

ra

win

gs\M

D1

02

.d

wg

LA

ST

S

AV

ED

B

Y: R

sp

itle

r D

AT

E: 1

2/1

3/2

01

7 4

:1

0:2

6 P

M


918.877.6000 918.877.4000 FAX


11/14/201795% REVIEW SET


CA # 3537

EXPIRES 6/30/2018

L

I

C

EN

S

E

D

P

R

O

F

E

SS

IO

N

A

L

E

N

G

IN

E

E

R

O

K

L

AH

O

M

A

JEFFERYDON

FERGUSON19755


MD102

DEMOLITION PLAN

MECHANICAL

GROUND FLOOR






TO BID.



REMAIN.

GENERAL NOTES

N

ISSUE/ REVISIONS


ENGINEER OF RECORD

PROJECT INFORMATION

A:


FOR:


COLLEGE

DRAWN BY CHECKED BY

PROJECT NO.

PROJECT ADDRESS:

DATE

DAL LLV

OCCC130001001

12/14/2017

7777 S. MAY AVE.


MA

IN B

UIL

DIN

G C

OO

LIN

G T

OW

ER

RE

PL

AC

EM

EN

TO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

CO

MM

UN

ITY

CO

LL

EG

EO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

, OK

PL

OT

TE

D B

Y: K

atie

W

ilcze

k D

AT

E: 1

2/1

3/2

01

7 3

:3

6:5

8 P

M D

WG

N

AM

E: V

:\O

CC

C\C

oo

lin

g T

ow

er R

ep

la

ce

me

nt\D

ra

win

gs\S

00

1.d

wg

LA

ST

S

AV

ED

B

Y: K

wilcze

k D

AT

E: 1

2/1

3/2

01

7 3

:2

1:4

0 P

M


918.877.6000 918.877.4000 FAX


11/14/201795% REVIEW SET

LARRY LEEVORBA11654

L

I

C

EN

S

E

D

P

R

O

F

E

SS

IO

N

A

L

E

N

G

IN

E

E

R

O

K

L

AH

O

M

A


CA # 3537

EXPIRES 6/30/2018


S001

NOTES

GENERAL STRUCTURAL

STEEL INSPECTIONS REQUIRED

HOOK

d O

R

1"C

LR

.

TYP. LAP SPLICE

d

90° BEND

STIRRUP OR TIE

d

12d

6d OR

4" MIN.

R= 4d FOR #8 BARS OR SMALLER

R= 5d FOR #9, #10 AND #11 BARS

R= 6d FOR #14 AND #18 BARS

CONCRETE RE: SCHED

48d MASONRY

4d

2

1

2

" MIN.

EMBED

RE: SCHED

FACE

OF

CONC

SIZE TYP LAP OTHER LAP MIN. EMBEDMENT FOR

LENGTH(IN) LENGTH(IN)* STD. 90 DEG HOOK(IN)

#3 22 32 9

#4 29 43 11

#5 36 54 14

#6 43 64 17

#7 63 94 20

#8 72 107 22

* REFERS TO REINFORCING WITHOUT ADEQUATE COVER OR

PLACED CLOSER TOGETHER THAN 2 BAR DIAMETERS.

3000 PSI CONCRETE REINFORCING LAP SPLICE AND 90

DEGREE HOOK LENGTHS SCHEDULE:

R

R

R

=

2

d

2

S101

4

S101

HI

10

10.4

11

9

8

7.9

J H.6 H.1 H

REFERENCE POINT

3

S101

LO

18" DIA. X 4'-0" DEEP PIPE SUPPORT FOUNDATION. PROVIDE

(8) #5 VERT REINFORCING AND #3 TIES AT 10" O.C. PROVIDE

(3) #3 TIES IN TOP 5". PROVIDE 3" CLR TO REINF., TYP.

COORDINATE WITH MECHANICAL FOR LOCATION

AND PIPE SUPPORT, BY OTHERS

W12x2

6

W12x2

6

W12x26

W12x26

11'-9

3

4

" +/-

13'-4

" +

/-

5

S-101

5" STD PIPE

(TYP OF 4)

EDGE OF

UNIT)

1

1 4

"

5" STD PIPE

(TYP OF 4)

5" STD PIPE

(TYP OF 4)

COORDINATE

DIMS WITH

TOWER MFR.

5" STD PIPE

(TYP OF 4)

W1

2x2

6

W1

2x2

6

6

S-101

W1

2x2

6

W12x26

W12x26

W12x26

1'-9

1 2

" +

/-

(F

.V

.)

4'-0

" (F

.V

.)

4'-0

" (F

.V

.)

2'-0

" +

/-

(F

.V

.)

5

1

4

" (F.V.)

6'-10" (F.V.)

9

S-101

W12x26

W12x26

EXISTING PIPE COL.

(TYP 12 PLCS)

W12x26

W12x26

W12x26

5'-10" (F.V.)

5

1

4

" (F.V.)

EDGE OF UNIT

PROVIDE 3/8"

STIFFENER PLATE

ON FAR SIDE OF

W12X65, TYP.

7

S-101

3'-7

1 2

" (F

.V

.)

7'-7

1

2

" (F.V.)

EXISTING

WALL

RE: PLAN

W12 FRAMING, RE:

PLAN

3/8" SHEAR PL

WITH (3) 3/4" DIA.

THRU BOLTS

FULL PEN TOP AND

BOTTOM WITH

BACKING BARS

3 1/2"

ALL STEEL SHALL

BE HOT-DIP GALV.

FIELD WELDS SHALL

BE TOUCHED UP WITH

ZINC RICH PAINT.

5" STD PIPE COL.

EDGE OF

UNIT

ALL STEEL SHALL

BE HOT-DIP GALV.

FIELD WELDS SHALL

BE TOUCHED UP WITH

ZINC RICH PAINT.

4"x9"x3/8" PL

WITH (3) 3/4" DIA.

A325 THRU-BOLTS

1/4" CAP PL

TYP.

3/16"

3/16"

TYP.

3"

3"

1 1

/2

"

2"

18" DIA PIER WITH 9 #6

VERT AND #3 TIES AT 12"

O.C. PROVIDE 3 TIES IN

TOP 5" EXTEND VERTICALS

INTO PIER CAP AND

OFFSET TO CLEAR BOLTS.

RE:S001 PIER NOTES

3'-6

"

3"

TYP

2'-0"x2'-0"x3'-6" PIER CAP

WITH (4) #5 U-BARS TOP

AND BOT. EA DIRECTION

1

1

2

" NON-SHRINK

GROUT

1

1

4

"x12"x12"

BASE PLATE

(4)

3

4

" DIA F1554 GR

36 ANCHOR BOLTS

AT 9" GAGE

4"P

RO

J F

OR

3

4

" D

IA

B

OL

T

6" P

RO

J F

OR

1" D

IA

B

OL

T

36

"

MIN

2"

TOP OF

FOOTING

FIN GRADE

T.O.S

5'-0" A.F.G.

ABOVE FINISHED ROOF

5'-0"

CLEAN EXISTING COLUMN TO

SOUND METAL. IF COLUMN

EXHIBITS MORE THAN 10%

SECTION LOSS, CONTACT EOR.

EDGE OF

UNIT

6"x6"x1/2" PL

ALL STEEL SHALL

BE HOT-DIP GALV.

FIELD WELDS SHALL

BE TOUCHED UP WITH

ZINC RICH PAINT.

4"x9"x3/8" PL

WITH (3) 3/4" DIA.

A325 THRU-BOLTS

1/4" CAP PL

3/16"

TYP.

3/16"

3/16"

2"

TYP.

1 1/2"

3"

3"

6"

UNO

EQUIPMENT BASE6"

UNO

4"

UN

O

3"

3

1 2

"

18"

1/2" CHAMFER (TYP)

ALL EXPOSED

EDGES OF

CONCRETE

#3 AT 24" MAX OC

EACH WAY AT MID

DEPTH OF PAD

#3 DOWELS AT EACH

CORNER. EMBED 3"

WITH HILTI HIT-HY

200 SAFE SET

ADHESIVE SYSTEM,

TYP.

INTERIOR EQUIPMENT PAD

FINISH FLOOR

RE: MECH FOR

LOCATION

3" STD PIPE COL.

EDGE OF

UNIT

ALL STEEL SHALL

BE HOT-DIP GALV.

FIELD WELDS SHALL

BE TOUCHED UP WITH

ZINC RICH PAINT.

4"x9"x3/8" PL

WITH (3) 3/4" DIA.

A325 THRU-BOLTS

5/8" x 8" x 1'-2" CAP PL

TYP.

3/16"

3/16"

TYP.

3"

3"

1 1

/2

"

2"

1

1

2

"1

1

2

"

2

1 4

"2

1 4

"

1

1 2

"

1

1 2

"

11'-9

3

4

" +/-

13

'-4

" +

/-

5

S-101

49

'-3

" +

/-

TO

R

EF

P

OIN

T

18'-1" +/-

TO REF POINT

18" DIA PIER, TYP

COORDINATE

WITH ANY

UTILITIES ETC IN

THE VICINITY

ISSUE/ REVISIONS


ENGINEER OF RECORD

PROJECT INFORMATION

A:


FOR:


COLLEGE

DRAWN BY CHECKED BY

PROJECT NO.

PROJECT ADDRESS:

DATE

DAL LLV

OCCC130001001

12/14/2017

7777 S. MAY AVE.


MA

IN B

UIL

DIN

G C

OO

LIN

G T

OW

ER

RE

PL

AC

EM

EN

TO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

CO

MM

UN

ITY

CO

LL

EG

EO

KL

AH

OM

A C

ITY

, OK

PL

OT

TE

D B

Y: K

atie

W

ilcze

k D

AT

E: 1

2/1

3/2

01

7 3

:3

6:5

9 P

M D

WG

N

AM

E: V

:\O

CC

C\C

oo

lin

g T

ow

er R

ep

la

ce

me

nt\D

ra

win

gs\S

10

1.d

wg

LA

ST

S

AV

ED

B

Y: K

wilcze

k D

AT

E: 1

2/1

3/2

01

7 3

:3

6:4

7 P

M


918.877.6000 918.877.4000 FAX


11/14/201795% REVIEW SET

LARRY LEEVORBA11654

L

I

C

EN

S

E

D

P

R

O

F

E

SS

IO

N

A

L

E

N

G

IN

E

E

R

O

K

L

AH

O

M

A


CA # 3537

EXPIRES 6/30/2018


S101

FRAMING PLAN

COOLING TOWER

N

APPENDIX B – Reference Sheet

1. Company _______________________________ Contact Person __________________

Address ________________________________ Telephone ______________________

E-Mail _________________________________ Fax ____________________________



E-Mail _________________________________ Fax ____________________________



E-Mail _________________________________ Fax ____________________________

APPENDIX C

REQUIRED FORMS

PLEASE NOTE:

The following forms must be completed, signed and notarized, where applicable,

and returned with your submitted response. Any forms not completed will result

in disqualification of your proposal.

Supplier Contract Affidavit Solicitation 2-RFP-18-006 ______________________________________, of lawful age, being first duly sworn, on oath says: In accordance with 74 O.S. 85.42(B), the supplier certifies that no person who has been involved in any manner in the development of this contract while employed by Oklahoma City Community College shall be employed by the supplier to fulfill any of the services provided for under said contract. _____________________________________________ ________________________________ Signature Date _____________________________________________ ________________________________ Printed Name Title STATE OF ___________________________________) COUNTY OF _________________________________) Subscribed and sworn to before me this ______ day of _________________, 20_____, by ____________________ Notary Public (or Clerk or Judge) Signature ______________________________

My Commission Number ______________________________ My Commission Expires ______________________________

(Seal)

Certification for Competitive Bid and Contract (Non-Collusion Certification)

Solicitation # 2-RFP-18-006

A. For purposes of competitive bid or contract, I certify:

1. I am the duly authorized agent of _________________________________________________, the bidder

submitting the competitive bid herewith, for the purpose of certifying the facts pertaining to the

existence of collusion among bidders and between bidders and state officials of employees, as well as

facts pertaining to the giving or offering of things of value to government personnel in return for special

consideration in the letting of any contract pursuant to said bid;

2. I am fully aware of the facts and circumstances surrounding the making of the bid to which this stamen is

attached and have been personally and directly involved in the proceedings leading to the submission of

such bid; and

3. Neither the bidder nor anyone subject to the bidder’s direction or control has been a party:

a. to any collusion among bidders in restraint of freedom of competition by agreement to bid at a fixed

price or to refrain from bidding

b. to any collusion with any state official or employee as to quantity, quality or price in the prospective

contract, or as to any other terms of such prospective contract, nor

c. in any discussions between bidders and any state official concerning exchange of money or other

thing of value for special consideration in the letting of a contract.

B. I certify, if awarded the contract, whether competitively bid or not, neither the contractor nor anyone

subject to the contractor’s direction or control has paid, given or donated or agreed to pay, give or donate

to any officer or employee of Oklahoma City Community College any money or other thing of value, either

directly or indirectly, in procuring this contract herein.

_____________________________________________ _________________________________________ Authorized Signature Certified this Date _____________________________________________ _________________________________________ Printed Name Title _____________________________________________ _________________________________________ Phone Number Fax Number _____________________________________________ Email

CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE IMPORTANT: THIS MUST BE READ, SIGNED AND RETURNED WITH BID DOCUMENTS

Certificate of Compliance with Executive Order 11246 as amended for Contract in Excess of $10,000.

In entering into any resulting contracts over $10,000, the contractor agrees to comply with the Equal Employment Opportunity requirements stipulated in Executive Order 11246 as amended by Executive Order 11375. These specific requirements state:

I. “Equal Opportunity Clause” During the performance of this/these contract(s) the contractor agrees as follows: A. The contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because for race,

creed, color, or national origin. The contractor will take affirmative action to ensure that applicants are employed, and employees are treated during employment, without regard to their race, creed, color or national origin. Such action shall include, but not be limited to the following: Employment, upgrading, demotion or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, notices to be provided by the contracting officer setting forth the provisions of this nondiscrimination clause.

B. The contractor will, in all solicitation or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the

contractor, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race, creed, color or national origin.

C. The contractor will send to each labor union or representative or workers with which he has a collective

bargaining agreement or other contractor understanding, a notice to be provided by the agency contracting officer, advising the labor union or workers representative of the contractors commitments under Section 202 of Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, and shall post copies of the notice in conspicuous places available to employees and applicants for employment.

D. The contractor will comply will all provisions of Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, and the rules, regulations and relevant orders of the Secretary of Labor.

E. The contractor will furnish all information and reports required by Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, and the rules, regulations, and order of the Secretary of Labor, or pursuant thereto, and will permit access to his books, records, and accounts by the contracting agency and the Secretary of Labor for purposes of investigation to ascertain compliance with such rules, regulations and orders.

F. In the event of contractors noncompliance with the nondiscrimination clauses of this contract or with any of such rules, regulations or orders, this contract may be canceled, terminated or suspended in whole or part and the contractor may be declared ineligible for further government contracts in accordance with procedures authorized in Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965 and such other sanctions may be imposed and remedies invoked as provided in Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, or by rule, regulation, or order of the Secretary of Labor as otherwise provided by law.

G. The contractor will include the provisions of paragraphs (A) through (G) in every subcontractor purchase order

unless exempted by rules, regulations or orders of the Secretary of Labor issued pursuant to Section 204 of Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, so that such provisions will be binding upon each subcontractor or vendor. The contractor will take such action with respect to any subcontract or purchase order as the contracting agency may direct as a means of enforcing such provisions including sanctions for non-compliance: Provided, however, that in the event the contractor becomes involved in, or is threatened with, litigation with a subcontractor or vendor as a result of such direction by the contracting agency, the contractor may request the United States to enter such litigation to protect the interests of the United States.

II. Certification on Non-segregated Facilities By the submission of this bid and/or acceptance of purchase orders during the above period, the bidder, offeror, applicant, or subcontractor certifies that he does not maintain or provide for his employees any segregated facilities at any of his establishments, and that he does not permit his employee to perform their services at any locations, under his control, where segregated facilities are maintained. He further agrees that breach of this certification is a violation of the equal opportunity clause in this contract. As used in this certification, the term “segregated facilities” means any waiting rooms, work areas, rest rooms, and wash rooms, restaurants, and other storage or dressing areas, parking lots, drinking fountains, recreation or entertainment area, transportation, and housing facilities provided for employees which are segregated by explicit directive or are in fact segregated on the basis of race, creed, color or national origin, because of habit, local customs or otherwise. He further agrees that (except where he has obtained identical certifications from proposed contractors for specific time periods) he will obtain identical certification from proposed subcontractors prior to award of subcontracts exceeding $10,000 which are not tax exempt from the provision of the equal opportunity clause; that he will retain such certifications in his files; and that he will forward the following notice to such proposed subcontractors (except where the proposed subcontractors have submitted identical certifications for specific time periods).

III. Disabled Veteran and Vietnam Era Veteran Affirmative Action Program Requirements

In entering into any contract that exceeds $10,000, the bidder agrees to comply with the Disabled Veteran and Vietnam Era Veteran Affirmative Action Program Requirements as stipulated in Public Law 93-508 and all amendments thereto. Failure to comply with the requirements of Public Law 93-508, Title 41, CFR60-250 and Title 41, CFR60-741 and all amendments thereto shall be deemed a material breach of this agreement and subject this contract to cancellation and rescission at the option of Oklahoma City Community College.

Certification of Compliance If awarded this Contract ________________________________ agrees to comply with the provisions of Clauses I and II above. _____________________________________ ______________________________ Signature Date _____________________________________ ______________________________ Printed Name Title

STATE OF ___________________________________)

COUNTY OF _________________________________)

Subscribed and sworn to before me this ______ day of _________________, 20_____, by ____________________

Notary Public (or Clerk or Judge) Signature ______________________________ My Commission Number ______________________________ My Commission Expires ______________________________

(Seal)

Appendix D – Please complete and return if a proposal will not be submitted.

NO BID RESPONSE FORM

Solicitation #2-RFP-18-006 Please be advised that our company does not wish to submit a proposal in response to the attached referenced Invitation to Bid for the following reasons: ______ Too busy at this time ______ Not engaged in this type of work ______ Project too large/small ______ Cannot meet mandatory specifications (Please specify below) ______ Other (Please specify) _________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________ ________________________________ Company Name Date _______________________________ ________________________________ Signature Title _______________________________ ________________________________ Printed Name Address ________________________________ ________________________________ _________________________________ Phone Number Email

Please return to: Mr. Craig Sisco, Director of Purchasing Oklahoma City Community College Purchasing Office, JMC Room 140 Oklahoma City, Oklahoma 73159 [email protected]

mailto:[email protected]